- Itek construction+Consulting, Inc.

- Itek construction+Consulting, Inc.

REGULATORY AGENCIES & UTILITIES

ZONING

DEPARTMENT:

Middletown Planning and

Zoning Commission

19 W. Green Street

Middletown, DE 19709

Contact: Morris Deputy

Tel: (302) 378-9120

BUILDING

DEPARTMENT:

Middletown Permitting and

Inspections Department

19 W. Green Street

Middletown, DE 19709

Contact: Neal Stokes

Tel: (302) 378-1171

ENVIRONMENTAL

HEALTH

DEPARTMENT:

State of Delaware, Delaware

Health and Scial Services -

Division of Public Health, Office of Food Protection

43 South Dupont Highway

Dover, Delaware 19901

Contact: Kobe

Tel: (302) 741-8648

FIRE

DEPARTMENT:

New Castle County

Delaware Fire Service Center

2307 MacArthur Road

Contact: Michael Moran

Tel: (302) 323-5365

Fax: (302)323-5366

WATER

UTILITY:

Town of Middletown Public

Works

431 Haveg Road

Middletown, DE 19709

Contact: Keith Fletcher

Tel: (302) 449-2147

SEWER UTILITY:

Town of Middltetown Public

Works

431 Haveg Road

Middletown, DE 19709

Contact: Tyler Reynolds

Tel: (302) 378-1171 Ext: 226

NATURAL GAS

UTILITY:

Chesapeak Utilities

350 South Queen Street

Dover, DE 19904

Contact: Vince Fiorelli

Tel: (302) 736-7846

ELECTRICAL

UTILITY:

Town of Middletown Public

Works

431 Haveg Road

Middletown, DE 19709

Contact: Shane Lane

Tel: (302) 378-5143

TELEPHONE

UTILITY:

Verizon Communications

Tel: (800) 479-1919

UTILITY COORDINATOR

NOTE to GC:

FOR ALL WATER, SEWER,

NATURAL GAS, & ELECTRICITY

UTILITIES CONTACT:

Gaucher & Associates Inc.

2060 Baldwin Court

Seaside, CA 93955

Contact: Paul or Meg Gaucher [email protected]

Tel: (831) 393-1760

Fax: (831) 393-2858

(E)

(N)

@

Ø

ABBREVIATIONS

CENTER LINE

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

NEW CONSTRUCTION

AT

DIAMETER OR ROUND

FRP

FRT

GA

GALV

GC

GYP

EA

EL

ELEC

ELEV

EQ

EXT

AFF

ALUM

ARCH

AS

ASS

ABOVE FINISH FLOOR

ALUMINUM

ARCHITECT(URAL)

ART AND CHAIRS SUPPLIER

ALARM SYSTEM SUPPLIER

BD

BLDG

BOARD

BUILDING

CMU

CO2

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT

CO2 SUPPLIER

CO2AS CO2 ALARM SUPPLIER

CS CHEMICAL SUPPLIER

DIM DIMENSION(S)

EACH

ELEVATION (VERTICAL HEIGHT)

ELECTRIC(AL)

ELEVATION

EQUAL

EXTERIOR

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANEL

FIRE RETARDANT-TREATED

GAUGE

GALVANIZED

GENERAL CONTRACTOR

GYPSUM

N.I.C.

NO

OC

OSB

PHS

POS

PREP

PVC

R

RTU

SIM

SPS

SS

SSS

STR

HS

HVAC

INT

KES

HOOD SUPPLIER

HEATING AND VENTILATING

INTERIOR

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

MAX

MECH

MFR

MIN

MISC

MSS

MAXIMUM

MECHANICAL

MANUFACTURER

MINIMUM

MISCELLANEOUS

MUSIC SYSTEMS SUPPLIER

NOT IN CONTRACT

NUMBER

ON CENTER

ORIENTED STRAND BOARD

PHOTOGRAPHY SUPPLIER

POINT OF SALE

PREPARATION

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

RADIUS

ROOF TOP UNITS

SIMILAR

SODA POP SUPPLIER

SUPPORT SIGNAGE

CCTV AND SAFE/CASHBOX

STRUCTURE

UPS

VAR

W/

WA

WCS

WS

T

T.B.D.

TP

TRS

TSV

TYP

TAB

TCC

THS

TLS

TMB

TMS

TENANT

TO BE DETERMINED, SEE FIELD

REFERENCE MANUAL

TENANT'S TEST & BALLANCE VENDOR

TENANT'S CABLING CONTRACTOR

TENAT'S HARDWARE SUPPLIER

TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MENU BOARD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MILLWORK SUPPLIER

TENANT'S PHONE SUPPLIER

TENANT'S RAILING SUPPLIER

TENANT'S SIGN VENDOR

TYPICAL

UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY

VARIES

WITH

WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

TENANT'S WALK-IN COOLER SUPPLIER

TENANT'S WINDOW SHADE SUPPLIER

Store Number: 2483

MIDDLETOWN, DE

655 Middletown-Warwick Rd. Middletown, DE 19709

CODE AUTHORITIES

BUILDING CODE:

ZONING CODE:

MECHANICAL CODE:

PLUMBING CODE:

ENERGY CODE:

FUEL GAS CODE:

ELECTRICAL CODE:

FIRE CODE:

ACCESSIBLITY:

2012 International Building Code

2006 Uniform Development Code (Division 40 of New Castle County Code)

2012 International Mechanical Code

2012 International Plumbing Code

2012 International Energy Conservation Code

2012 International Fuel & Gas Code

2011 National Electrical Code

2012 Delaware State Fire Prevention Regulations (DSFPR), Life Safety Code-NFPA 101 2009

ICC/ANSI A117.1-2009

PROJECT INFORMATION

BUILDING CODE & ZONING DATA

1.

OCCUPANCY GROUP:

OCCUPANCY SEPARATION REQUIRED:

OCCUPANCY SEPARATION PROVIDED:

2.

TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION:

3.

USE GROUP:

ALLOWABLE AREA:

AREA INCREASE W/ SPRINKLERS:

ACTUAL AREA:

TENANT LEASE AREA:

4.

ALLOWABLE NO. OF STORIES:

ACTUAL NO. OF STORIES:

ALLOWABLE BUILDING HEIGHT:

ACTUAL BUILDING HEIGHT:

A-2

1-HOUR

2-HOUR

II-B

3

1

A-2

9,500 S.F.

28,500 S.F.

8,115 S.F.

2,413 S.F.

75'-0" MAXIMUM HEIGHT

23'-0"

5.

OCCUPANT LOAD, TENANT SPACE

KITCHEN-COMMERCIAL:

DINING ROOM AND CIRCULATION:

TOILET ROOMS AND CIRCULATION:

TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD:

SEATING:

INTERIOR:

PATIO:

TOTAL:

993 SF / 200 = 5 OCC.

962 SF / 15 = 65 OCC.

170 SF / 0 = 0 OCC.

= 70 OCC.

TOTAL OCCUPANT LOAD TO BE POSTED:

99 OCC. (MAX OCCUPANCY)

THE CALCULATED OCCUPANT LOAD IS LESS THAN THE PROPOSED POSTED OCCUPANT LOAD. ALL

LIFE SAFETY AND RESTROOM CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE POSTED OCCUPANT LOAD.

6. MEANS OF EGRESS REQUIRED:

MEANS OF EGRESS PROVIDED:

7. FIRE SPRINKLERS:

2

2

100% SPRINKLERED

8. PLUMBING FIXTURES

WATER CLOSETS

REQ'D PROV'D

MEN'S: 1 1

WOMEN'S: 1 1

1

1

54 SEATS

12 SEATS

66 SEATS

LAVORATORIES

REQ'D PROV'D

1

1

URINALS

REQ'D PROV'D

0

0

0

0

SCOPE OF WORK

TENANT INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR ALTERATION TO AN EXISTING SHELL BUILDING

GROUP

PROPOSED USE:

TENANT

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL

USE

A-2

LANDLORD:

TENANT:

ARCHITECT:

MECHANICAL

ELECTRICAL

PLUMBING

ENGINEER:

STRUCTURAL

ENGINEER:

DSM Commercial

910 S. Chapel St.

Suite 100

Newark, DE 19713

Contact: Jim Trancedi

[email protected]

Tel: (302) 283-1800

Fax: (302) 283-1365

Chipotle Mexican Grill

1401 Wynkoop Street

Denver, Co 80202

Contact: Cory Flavin [email protected]

Tel: (303) 222-6018 r e d architecture + planning

855 Grandview Avenue

Suite 295

Columbus, OH 43215

Contact: Bruce Culver [email protected]

Tel: (614) 487-8770

Fax: (614) 487-8777

NatIonal Engineering

788 Morrison Road

Columbus, OH 43230

Contact: Andy Demansik [email protected]

Tel: (614) 751-9610

Jezerinac Geers and Associates

5640 Frantz Road

Dublin, OH 43017

Conact: Andy Heigley [email protected]

Tel: (614) 766-0066

Fax: (614) 481-1223

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS

1

1

A101

1

1

EXTERIOR ELEVATION

MARKER

1

1

A101

1

1

1

A101

SIM

1

A101

SIM

INTERIOR ELEVATION

MARKER

SECTION MARKER

SECTION / DETAIL

0

1

A101

View Name

View Scale

COLUMN GRID LABEL

VIEW LABEL

LEVEL MARKER

Room name

101

ROOM NAME & NUMBER

1

REVISION NUMBER

1i

XX.X

XX.X

XX.X

X

DOOR NUMBER

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT NUMBER

FURNITURE NUMBER

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT NUMBER

WASHROOM ACCESSORIES NUMBER

W1

WALL TAG

LEVEL TARGET

NORTH ARROW

KEY PLAN

AREA OF WORK

2

A000

ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

1" = 50'-0"

DRAWING INDEX AND REVISIONS

6 5 4 3 2 1 SHEET NO.

● A000 Project Data

A126

A130

A131

A140

A141

A142

A101

A110

A115

A116

A117

A120

A125

A002

A003

A010

A011

A012

A013

A014

A015

A016

A100

A150

A200

A210

A220

A230

A300

A400

S100

S110

S300

Accessibility Requirements

Life Safety Plan

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Specifications

Architectural Site Plan

Architectural Site Details

Slab Work Plan

Architectural Floor Plan

Architectural Wall Types

Door & Hardware Schedule

Finish Plan

Finish Details

Tile Details

Fixtures, Furniture & Equipment Plan

Fixtures, Furniture & Equipment Schedules

Reflected Ceiling Plan

Ceiling Details

Unistrut and Tectum Plans

Architectural Roof Plan

Exterior Elevations

Elevations - Interior Dining

Elevations - Interior Kitchen

Restroom Details

Building Sections

Perspectives

Slab Plan

Exist. Roof Framing Plan

Roof Framing Details

SHEET DESCRIPTION

F100

M010

M100

M200

M300

Fire Protection Plan

Mechanical Specifications

HVAC Plan

HVAC Schedules

HVAC Details

P010

P100

P110

P200

P300

E010

E100

E110

E200

E300

Plumbing Specifications

Plumbing Plan Water & Gas

Plumbing Plan Waste & Vent

Plumbing Schedules

Plumbing Details

Specifications

Electrical Lighting Plan

Electrical Power Plan

Electrical Schedules & Details

Electrical Details

VICINITY MAP

655 Middletown-Warwick Road

TRUE PLAN

1

A000

VICINITY MAP

12" = 1'-0"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

1

Revisions:

10/28/15 PERMIT REVISION

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Project Data

Checked:

EH, EW

A000

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

A.D.A.A.G. INTERIOR ACCESSIBILITY COMPONENTS

THIS TENANT SPACE IS REQUIRED TO BE ACCESSIBLE AS SET FORTH IN THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 1994 AND ITS REVISED 2010 STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN. MAINTAIN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ACT AND ITS ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES (A.D.A.), (A.D.A.A.G.).

1. FOOD SERVICE LINES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLEAR WIDTH OF 36" WITH TRAY

SLIDES MOUNTED NO HIGHER THAN 34" ABOVE THE FLOOR. IF SELF-SERVICE SHELVES

ARE PROVIDED, AT LEAST 50% OF EACH TYPE MUST BE WITHIN REACH RANGES

SPECIFIED IN A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 308.

36 min

1. ACCESSIBLE RAMPS SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 405.

2. IF A RAMP HAS A RISE GREATER THAN 6" OR A HORIZONTAL PROJECTION GREATER THAN 72", THEN

IT SHALL HAVE HANDRAILS ON BOTH SIDES. HANDRAILS ARE NOT REQUIRED ADJACENT TO ASSEMBLY

SEATING AREAS. CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN A HANDRAIL AND AN ADJACENT WALL SHALL BE 1-1/2" MIN.

2. SELF-SERVICE SHELVES AND DISPENSING DEVICES FOR DISHWARE, CONDIMENTS,

FOOD AND BEVERAGES SHALL BE INSTALLED TO COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 308.

3. THE CROSS SLOPE OF RAMP SURFACES SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN 1:48.

FOOD SERVICE LINES

4. EXISTING RAMP'S SLOPE SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 405.2. FOR A RAMP NOT RISING MORE

THAN 3" THE MAXIMUM SLOPE CAN BE 1:8>X>1:10. FOR A RAMP RISING GREATER THAN 3" BUT

NOT MORE THAN 6" THE MAXIMUM SLOPE CAN BE 1:10>X>1:12.

1. ACCESSIBLE STAIRS SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 504.

2. ALL STEPS ON A FLIGHT OF STAIRS SHALL HAVE UNIFORM RISER HEIGHTS

TREAD DEPTHS ALONG EACH RUN. RISERS SHALL BE 4" HIGH MIN. AND UNIFORM

AND 7" HIGH MAX. TREAD SHALL BE 11" DEEP MIN.

3. THE CLEAR SPACE BETWEEN HANDRAILS AND WALL SHALL BE 1-1/2" MIN.

HANDRAIL GRIPPING SURFACES SHALL BE CONTINUOUS ALONG THEIR LENGTH

AND SHALL NOT BE OBSTRUCTED ALONG THEIR TOP AND SIDES. THE TOP OF

HANDRAIL GRIPPING SURFACES SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN 34" AND 38"

ABOVE STAIR NOSINGS.

1. ELEMENTS OF ACCESSIBLE RESTROOMS SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTIONS 603, 604, 605,

606, 607, 608, 609 & 610.

X

Y

2. ACCESSIBLE URINALS SHALL BE STALL-TYPE OR WALL-HUNG AT A MAXIMUM OF 17" ABOVE FINISH

FLOOR. URINALS SHALL HAVE A 30" x 48" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE TO ALLOW A FRONT APPROACH AND

THE FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE HAND-OPERATED WITH THE CONTROLS INSTALLED ACCORDING TO

SECTION 308.

3. HOT WATER LINES AND DRAIN PIPES UNDER LAVATORIES SHALL BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE

CONFIGURED TO PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT. THERE SHALL BE NO SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES

UNDER LAVATORIES.

4. IF HAND OPERATED METERING FAUCETS ARE USED, THE FAUCET SHALL REMAIN OPEN FOR0 10

SECONDS MINIMUM.

5. THE SPACE BETWEEN THE WALL AND THE GRAB BAR SHALL BE 1-1/2". THE GRAB BAR ASSEMBLY

SHALL BE CAPABLE OF WITHSTANDING BENDING STRESSES, SHEAR STRESSES, SHEAR FORCES, AND

TENSILE FORCES OF UP TO 250 LBF.. GRAB BARS SHALL NOT ROTATE WITHIN THEIR FITTINGS.

6. MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO OPERATING CONTROLS FOR RESTROOM ACCESSORIES NOT SPECIFICALLY

CALLED OUT IN THE A.D.A.A.G. SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REACH RANGES SPECIFIED IN A.D.A.A.G.

SECTION 308.

1. ACCESSIBLE DOORS SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 404.

2. THRESHOLD, IF PROVIDED AT DOORWAYS, SHALL BE 1/2" HIGH MAXIMUM. EXISTING OR

ALTERED THRESHOLDS 3/4" HIGH MAXIMUM THAT HAVE A BEVELED EDGE ON EACH SIDE

WITH A SLOPE NOT STEEPER THAN 1:2 ARE ALSO PERMITTED.

3. DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE. HANDLES, PULLS, LATCHES, LOCKS AND OTHER OPERABLE

PARTS ON DOORS AND GATES SHALL COMPLY WITH 309.4. OPERABLE PARTS OF SUCH

HARDWARE SHALL BE 34" MINIMUM AND 48" MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR

GROUND. WHERE SLIDING DOORS ARE IN THE FULLY OPEN POSITION, OPERATING

HARDWARE SHALL BE EXPOSED AND USABLE FROM BOTH SIDES.

4. DOOR CLOSERS AND GATE CLOSERS. DOOR CLOSERS AND GATE CLOSERS SHALL BE

ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF 90 DEGREES, THE TIME REQUIRED TO

MOVE THE DOOR TO A POSITION OF 12 DEGREES FROM THE LATCH IS 5 SECONDS MINIMUM.

SPRING HINGES. DOOR AND GATE SPRING HINGES SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM THE

OPEN POSITION OF 70 DEGREES, THE DOOR OR GATE SHALL MOVE TO THE CLOSED POSITION

IN 1.5 SECONDS MINIMUM.

5. ACCESSIBLE DOORS THAT ARE NOT FIRE DOORS OR EXTERIOR HINGED DOORS SHALL HAVE

A MAXIMUM FORCE FOR PUSHING OR PULLING THE DOOR OPEN OF 5 LBF. THIS FORCE DOES

NOT APPLY TO THE FORCE REQUIRED TO RETRACT LATCH BOLTS OR DISENGAGE OTHER

DEVICES THAT MAY HOLD A DOOR IN A CLOSED POSITION.

PLAN

32 min

Y

X

CLEAR DOORWAY WIDTH

24 min

Y

EXTENSION AT BOTTOM OF RUN

FRONT APPROACHES - SWINGING DOORS

24 min

18 min, 24 preferred

NOTE: X = 12 IN IF DOOR HAS

BOTH A CLOSER AND LATCH.

48 min

X

EXTENSION AT TOP OF RUN

4 max 32 min

NOTE:

X IS THE MINIMUM HANDRAIL

EXTENSION REQUIRED AT EACH TOP

RISER. X = 12" MIN. Y IS THE MINIMUM

HANDRAIL EXTENSION REQUIRED AT

EACH BOTTOM RISER. Y IS EQUAL TO

OR GREATER THAN THE TREAD DEPTH.

alternate door location clear floor space

36 min

18 min

18

60 min

CLEAR FLOOR SPACE

AT WATER CLOSETS

36 min

12 min

36 min

CL

12 min

12 max

54 min

42 min

7-9

BACK WALL SIDE WALL

GRAB BARS AT WATER CLOSETS toilet paper

12 max

54 min

56 min

59 min w. wall mounted w.c.

w. floor mounted w.c.

56 min

59 min x x = 42" min. at latch approach only x = 60" min. all other approaches. hinge approach only if z = 42", then x = 54" floor not to exceed fountain depth

30 min

STANDARD STALL STANDARD STALL (END OF ROW)

TOILET STALLS

17-25

48 min

17-25 w. wall mounted w.c.

w. floor mounted w.c.

30 min clear floor space

48 min

CLEAR FLOOR SPACE

AT LAVATORIES knee clearance

8 min

6 max toe clearance

17-25 depth

LAVATORY CLEARANCE

FREE-STANDING

FOUNTAIN OR COOLER

BUILT-IN FOUNTAIN

OR COOLER x where x < 24, y = 30, where x > 24, y > 36.

CLEAR FLOOR

SPACE equipment permitted in shaded area

DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS

8 min 6 max

SPOUT HEIGHT AND

KNEE CLEARANCE

NOTE: ALL DOORS IN ALCOVES SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CLEARANCES FOR FRONT APPROACHES.

x

58 min

NOTE: X = 36 IN MINIMUM IF Y = 60 IN;

X = 42 IN MINIMUM IF Y = 54 IN.

HINGE SIDE APPROACHES - SWINGING DOORS

48 min

X

36 min

NOTE: Y = 48 IN MINIMUM IF

DOOR HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER.

48 min

LANDING

60" min

RAMP RUN < 30' max

LANDING

60" min

COMPONENTS OF A SINGLE RAMP RUN AND

SAMPLE RAMP DIMENSIONS

1. CONTROLS & OPERATING MECHANISMS SHALL COMPLY

WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 309.

2. ALL CONTROLS & OPERATING MECHANISMS WHICH ARE

INTENDED FOR NORMAL USE BY BUILDING OCCUPANTS

SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A.D.A.A.G.-COMPLIANT CLEAR

FLOOR SPACES & SHALL COMPLY WITH REACH RANGES IN

SECTION 308.

3. REACH RANGES FOR CHILDREN UNDER AGES 12 SHALL

COMPLY WITH SECTION 308.1.

10 max 30

CLEAR FLOOR SPACE

PARALLEL APPROACH

10 max 30 24 max

OBSTRUCTED

HIGH SIDE REACH

30 10 max 30

UNOBSTRUCTED

SIDE REACH

SIDE REACH

1. ACCESSIBLE SIGNAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 703.

2. LETTERS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL HAVE A WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 3:5 AND 1:1 AND A STROKE-WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT RATIO

BETWEEN 1:5 AND 1:10.

48

CLEAR FLOOR SPACE

FORWARD APPROACH

3. CHARACTERS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL BE SIZED ACCORDING TO THE VIEWING DISTANCE FROM WHICH THEY ARE TO BE READ. CHARACTER

HEIGHT SHALL BE MEASURED VERTICALLY FROM THE BASELINE OF THE CHARACTER SHALL BE 5/8" MIN. AND 2" MAX. BASED ON THE HEIGHT OF THE

UPPERCASE LETTER "I"

4. LETTERS AND NUMERALS SHALL BE RAISED 1/32", UPPER-CASE SANS SERIF TYPE, AND SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED WITH GRADE 2 BRAILLE. RAISED

CHARACTERS SHALL BE AT LEAST 5/8" HIGH, BUT NO HIGHER THAN 2". PICTOGRAMS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE EQUIVALENT VERBAL

DESCRIPTION PLACED DIRECTLY BELOW THE PICTOGRAM. THE BORDER DIMENSION OF THE PICTOGRAM SHALL BE 6" MINIMUM IN HEIGHT. BRAILLE

SHALL NOT BE LOCATED IN THE PICTOGRAM FIELD.

5. THE CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND OF SIGNS SHALL BE EGGSHELL, MATTE, OR OTHER NON-GLARE FINISH. CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL

CONTRAST WITH THEIR BACKGROUND - EITHER LIGHT CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND OR DARK CHARACTERS ON A LIGHT BACKGROUND.

6. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED AT A DOOR, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ALONGSIDE THE DOOR AT THE LATCH SIDE. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN

IS PROVIDED AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH ONE ACTIVE LEAF, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INACTIVE LEAF. WHERE A TACTILE SIGN IS PROVIDED

AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH TWO ACTIVE LEAFS, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED TO THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RIGHT HAND DOOR.WHERE THERE IS NO WALL

SPACE AT THE LATCH SIDE OF A SINGLE DOOR OR AT THE RIGHT SIDE OF DOUBLE DOORS, SIGNS SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT

WALL. SIGNS CONTAINING TACTILE CHARACTERS SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OF 18" MIN. BY 18" MIN, CENTERED ON THE

WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 902.

3. WHERE FOOD OR DRINK IS SERVED AT COUNTERS EXCEEDING 34" IN HEIGHT FOR CONSUMPTION BY CUSTOMERS SEATED ON STOOLS

OR STANDING AT THE COUNTER, A PORTION OF THE MAIN COUNTER WHICH IS 60" IN LENGTH MINIMUM SHALL BE PROVIDED IN

COMPLIANCE WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 305 OR SERVICE SHALL BE AVAILABLE AT ACCESSIBLE TABLES WITHIN THE SAME AREA.

4. AT LEAST 5% OF ALL TABLE SEATING SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 226.

5. ACCESSIBLE SEATING AT TABLES AND/OR COUNTERS SHALL COMPLY WITH CHAPTER 3.

level landing

12 min horizontal projection or run

TACTILE CHARACTERS, IS PROVIDED BEYOND THE ARC OF ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED DOOR AND THE 45 DEGREE OPEN POSITION.

1. WHERE FIXED TABLES (OR DINING COUNTERS WHERE FOOD IS CONSUMED BUT THERE IS NO SERVICE) ARE PROVIDED, AT LEAST 5 %,

BUT NOT LESS THAN ONE, OF THE FIXED TABLES (OR A PORTION OF THE DINING COUNTER) SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE AND SHALL COMPLY

2. IN ESTABLISHMENTS WHERE SEPARATE AREAS ARE DESIGNATED FOR SMOKING AND NON-SMOKING PATRONS, THE NUMBER OF

ACCESSIBLE FIXED TABLES (OR COUNTERS) SHALL BE PROPORTIONALLY DISTRIBUTED BETWEEN THE SMOKING AND NON-SMOKING

AREAS.

surface of ramp

12 min level landing

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF y

ACCESSIBILITY

30 min

30 min

WHERE X > 24, Y = 36 MIN elevation

12 min railing with extended platform

48 min

36 min 25 max

25 max

36 min

MINIMUM CLEARANCES FOR SEATING AND TABLES

12 min section

EXAMPLES OF EDGE PROTECTION AND HANDRAIL EXTENSIONS

48

UNOBSTRUCTED

SIDE REACH

20 max

FORWARD REACH

48

20-25 max

OBSTRUCTED HIGH

SIDE REACH

DISPLAY CONDITIONS - INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL

OF ACCESSIBILITY

36 min

48

12 min

HEIGHT TO FINISH

FLOOR OR GROUND

FROM BASELINE OF

CHARACTER

HORIZONTAL VIEWING

DISTANCE

MINIMUM CHARACTER

HEIGHT

40" TO LESS THAN OR

EQUAL TO 70"

GREATER THAN 70" TO

LESS THAN OR EQUAL

TO 120"

GREATER THAN 120"

LESS THAN 72"

5/8"

72" AND GREATER

LESS THAN 180"

180 INCHES AND GREATER

LESS THAN 21'

21' AND GREATER

5/8" PLUS 1/8"/FT OF VIEWING

DISTANCE ABOVE 72"

2"

2" PLUS 1/8"/FT OF VIEWING

DISTANCE ABOVE 180"

3"

3" PLUS 1/8"/FT OF VIEWING

DISTANCE ABOVE 21'

NOTE: Y = 54 IN MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER.

NOTE: Y = 48 IN MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER.

LATCH SIDE APPROACHES - SWINGING DOORS TWO HINGED DOORS IN SERIES

48 min

32 min

12 min 36 min 12 min

60 min

1. ALL WALKS, HALLS, CORRIDORS, AISLES, SKYWALKS, TUNNELS, AND OTHER SPACES THAT ARE

PART OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL COMPLY WITH A.D.A.A.G. SECTION 402 AND ANY OTHER

APPLICABLE SECTION OF CH. 4.

2. AT LEAST ONE ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL CONNECT ACCESSIBLE BUILDING OR FACILITY

ENTRANCES WITH ALL ACCESSIBLE SPACES AND ELEMENTS.

3. AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE WITH A RUNNING SLOPE GREATER THAN 1:20 IS A RAMP AND SHALL

COMPLY WITH 405. NOWHERE SHALL THE CROSS SLOPE OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE EXCEED 1:48.

36 min

MINIMUM CLEAR WIDTH

FOR SINGLE WHEELCHAIR

60 min

60-IN DIAMETER SPACE T-SHAPED SPACE FOR 180° TURNS

1

2

VERTICAL CHANGES IN LEVEL CHANGES IN LEVEL

NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN APPLY WHEN X < 48 IN

TURN AROUND AN OBSTRUCTION

Lobby

4 max

WALKING PARALLEL TO A WALL

ADDITIONAL ACCESSIBILITY COMPONENTS

IN ADDITION TO ALL A.D.A./A.D.A.A.G. REQUIREMENTS, THIS FACILITY SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL JURISDICTION FOR ACCESSIBILITY AS LISTED BELOW AND SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS ICC/ANSI A117.1.

Y

1. ELEMENTS OF ACCESSIBLE RESTROOMS SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009

SECTIONS 603, 604, 605, 606, AND 609.

36 min

24 min 12 min

12 min

54 min

42 min

39-41 toilet paper

7-9

BACK WALL SIDE WALL

GRAB BARS AT WATER CLOSETS

X

1. ALL WALKS, HALLS, CORRIDORS, AISLES, SKYWALKS, TUNNELS, AND OTHER SPACES THAT ARE

PART OF AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009 SECTION 402

2. AT LEAST ONE ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL CONNECT ACCESSIBLE BUILDING OR FACILITY

ENTRANCES WITH ALL ACCESSIBLE SPACES AND ELEMENTS.

3. AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE WITH A RUNNING SLOPE GREATER THAN 1:20 IS A RAMP AND SHALL

COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009 SECTION 405. NOWHERE SHALL THE CROSS SLOPE OF

AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE EXCEED 1:48.

12 min 36 min 12 min

T-SHAPED SPACE FOR 180° TURNS

NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN APPLY WHEN X < 48 IN.

NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN APPLY WHEN X < 48 IN.

IF Z = 42 IN MINIMUM THAN Y = 48 IN MINIMUM.

IF Z = 36 IN MINIMUM THAN Y = 60 IN MINIMUM.

TURN AROUND AN OBSTRUCTION

1. ACCESSIBLE DOORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009 SECTION 404.

2. THRESHOLD AT DOORWAYS SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/2" IN HEIGHT. RAISED THRESHOLDS AND

FLOOR LEVEL CHANGES AT DOORWAYS SHALL BE BEVELED WITH A SLOPE NO GREATER THAN 1:2.

3. HANDLES, PULLS, LATCHES, LOCKS, AND OTHER OPERATING DEVICES ON ACCESSIBLE DOORS

SHALL HAVE A SHAPE THAT IS EASY TO GRASP WITH ONE HAND AND DOES NOT REQUIRE TIGHT

GRASPING, TIGHT PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST TO OPERATE. LEVER-OPERATED

MECHANISMS, PUSH-TYPE MECHANISMS, AND U-SHAPED HANDLES ARE ACCEPTABLE DESIGNS.

HARDWARE REQUIRED FOR ACCESSIBLE DOOR PASSAGE SHALL BE MOUNTED NO HIGHER THAN

48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AND NOT LOWER THAN 34" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR.

4. IF A DOOR HAS A CLOSER, THEN THE SWEEP PERIOD OF THE CLOSER SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO

THAT FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF 90°, THE DOOR WILL TAKE AT LEAST 5 SECONDS TO MOVE TO

AN OPEN POSITION OF 12°.

22 min

NOTE: Y = 48 IN MINIMUM AND

X = 12 IN MINIMUM IF DOOR

HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER.

HINGE SIDE APPROACHES - SWINGING DOORS

48 min

60 min

1. ACCESSIBLE SIGNAGE SHALL COMPLY WITH ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 2009 SECTION 703.

2. LETTERS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL HAVE A WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT RATIO SUCH THAT THE WIDTH OF AN UPPERCASE 'O'

SHALL BE 55% MINIMUM AND 110% MAXIMUM OF THE HEIGHT OF AN UPPERCASE 'I'.

3. CHARACTERS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL BE SIZED ACCORDING TO THE VIEWING DISTANCE FROM WHICH THEY ARE TO

BE READ, TABLE 703.2.4. THE MINIMUM HEIGHT IS MEASURED USING AN UPPER-CASE I. LOWER CASE CHARACTERS ARE PERMITTED.

SIGNS INSTALLED OVER 120" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CHARACTER HEIGHT OF 3".

4. WHERE PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION IS PROVIDED FOR ROOMS AND SPACES, SIGNS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE WALL

ADJACENT TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR, INCLUDING DOUBLE-LEAF DOORS. SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NEAREST

ADJACENT WALL. MOUNTING HEIGHT SHALL BE 60" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO THE BOTTOM OF HIGHEST LINE OF TEXT.

MOUNTING LOCATION FOR SUCH SIGNAGE SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR AREA 18" MINIMUM BY 18" MINIMUM

CENTERED ON THE TACTILE CHARACTERS IS PROVIDED BEYOND THE ARC OF ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED

POSTITION AND 45 DEGREE OPEN POSITION.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Accessibility

Requirements

Checked:

EH, EW

A002

TWO HINGED DOORS IN SERIES

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

2

A003

LIFE SAFETY PLAN - PATIO

1/4" = 1'-0"

EXIT

49 OCCUPANTS

EXISTING 2-HR RATED

ASSEMBLY BY LANDLORD

3' - 0"

3' -

0

"

3' - 0"

EXIT

5 OCCUPANTS

FIRE EXTINGUISHER,

SEE A131 FOR INFO

3' - 0"

3' - 0"

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

LESS THAN 20'-0" DEAD END

10'-6" MAX EGRESS PATH

54'-2" MAX EGRESS PATH

POINT OF DIVERGENCE

LESS THAN 20'-0" DEAD END

14'-10" MAX EGRESS PATH

48

' -

9

1

/2

"

20

' -

1

1

3/

8"

3' - 6"

LEVEL

EXIT

49 OCCUPANTS

3' -

6"

EXIT

49 OCCUPANTS

FIRE EXTINGUISHER,

SEE A131 FOR INFO

1

A003

LIFE SAFETY PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

GENERAL NOTES PER IBC 2012

44" REQUIRED EGRESS CORRIDOR WIDTH FOR OCCUPANCIES 50+.

42" REQUIRED EGRESS AISLE WIDTH FOR OCCUPANCIES 50 AND OVER.

36" REQUIRED EGRESS WIDTH FOR OCCUPANCIES UNDER 50.

SECT. 1028.9.1(4)

NO DEAD END CORRIDORS OVER 20'-0"

SECT. 1018.4

MAXIMUM EGRESS TRAVEL DISTANCE TO AN EXIT IS 75'-0". MEASURED

AS MOST REMOTE POINT ALONG THE NATURAL AND UNOBSTRUCTED

PATH OF HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL TRAVEL TO THE EXIT.

TABLE 1014.3

DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS OF EGRESS (MEASURED IN A

STRAIGHT LINE BETWEEN THE TWO) SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN

1/2 DIAGONAL OF SPACE BEING SERVED FOR EGRESS PATH.

SECT. 1015.2.1

IF FULLY SPRINKLERED DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS OF

EGRESS CAN GO DOWN TO 1/3 OF DIAGONAL.

MAXIMUM EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE 200' W/OUT SPRINKLER, 250' W/ SPRINKLER.

TABLE 1016.2

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN SEATS IS 12" FOR A DISTANCE OF

12'-0" WITH AN ADDITIONAL 1/2" OF WIDTH FOR EACH 1'-0" OR

FRACTION THEREOF BEYOND ORIGINAL 12'-0".

SECT. 1028.10.1.1

EGRESS ALONG SEATING IS MEASURED 19" FROM EDGE OF TABLE WHERE

MOVEABLE CHAIRS ARE USED, OR FROM THE EDGE OF A FIXED SEAT.

DOORS IN FULLY OPEN POSITION SHALL NOT REDUCE A REQUIRED DIMENSION

BY MORE THAN 7 INCHES. SECTION 1008.1.6 LANDINGS SHALL HAVE A LENGTH

MEASURED IN THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL OF NOT LESS THAN 44 INCHES.

DOORS, WHEN FULLY OPENED SHALL NOT REDUCE THE REQUIRED MEANS

OF EGRESS WIDTH BY MORE THAN 7 INCHES. DOORS IN ANY POSITION

SHALL NOT REDUCE THE REQUIRED WIDTH BY MORE THAN ONE-HALF.

SECT. 1005.2

SPACE BETWEEN TWO DOORS IN A SERIES SHALL BE 48 INCHES

MIN. PLUS WIDTH OF A DOOR SWINGING INTO SPACE.

SECT. 1008.1.8

EGRESS SEPARATION NOTE

OVERALL DISTANCE: 48'-9 1/2"

REQUIRED SEPARATION:

PROVIDED SEPARATION:

16'-3 1/4" MIN (SPRINKLERED)

20'-11 3/8"

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Life Safety Plan

A003

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

1.1

Contract Documents:

A.

Contractor shall use the following Tenant provided documents in the negotiation and execution of the Work. Contact

Tenant's office for copies of these documents:

1.

Chipotle Instructions to Bidders.

2.

Construction Contract for Chipotle Mexican Grill.

B.

Definitions:

1.

The term "Owner" used in these documents refers to the building Owner/Landlord.

2.

The term "Tenant" used in these documents refer to the restaurant Tenant, Chipotle Mexican

Grill, Inc.

3.

The term "Contractor" used in these documents refers to the entity responsible for performing the Work under Construction Contract for Chipotle Mexican Grill.

1.2

Scope of Work:

A.

The Work shall include construction of the site and building facilities as shown and specified in these Specifications and Drawings.

B.

When required and necessary, the Tenant will provide a subsurface exploration report as an attachment the bidding documents.

SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

1.1

Coordination:

A.

Immediately inform the Architect of discrepancies between the information indicated in the Contract

Documents and existing project conditions, and of discrepancies between information indicated on the architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical documents.

B.

Prior to fabrication and installation of new components, field verify all existing and new dimensions and installation conditions that may affect the Work. Do not scale the drawings to establish locations of items that are not located using dimensions.

1.

All dimensions are to rough face of stud or centerline of structure, unless otherwise indicated.

2.

Verify that all Subcontractors have reviewed and coordinated locations of their equipment and furnishings exposed to view with the architectural drawings. Review questions with the

Architect.

C.

Coordinate new work indicated on the Contract Documents with new work that may be provided by the Owner and Tenant under separate contracts.

D.

Coordinate the work of Vendors, Contractors and Subcontractors providing fixtures, furniture and equipment identified as "by Tenant" in these drawings and specifications.

1.

Notify the Tenant in timely fashion if any problems develop with the performance of these

Vendors, Contractors or Subcontractors.

E.

Coordinate the scheduling, sequencing, and the work of all trades and Subcontractors to assure efficient and orderly sequences of installation of interdependent construction elements.

F.

Verify that the utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with the building utility services. Coordinate work of the various specification sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment.

G.

Coordinate the installation and physical space requirements of plumbing, mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on the drawings. Follow routing shown for piping, ducts and conduit as closely as practical. Install runs parallel with and perpendicular to the line of the building. Utilize spaces as efficiently as possible to maximize accessibility for other work installation and for maintenance and for repair.

1.

Conceal piping, ducts and conduit within the construction, except as otherwise indicated.

2.

Coordinate locations of registers, fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

H.

Coordinate completion and cleanup work of all trades and Subcontractors in preparation for

Substantial Completion.

I.

To minimize disruption of Tenant's activities after Tenant occupancy of the property, coordinate access to the property with the Tenant's Construction Manager for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2

Submittals:

A.

Only when indicated in the specifications or drawings submit shop drawings, product data, and/or samples to the Architect for review. All submittals shall be made directly to the architect by the general contractor. Only submittals for specified products will be accepted unless prior approval has been obtained for a substitution (refer to Section 01630). Submittals shall be made with respect to the construction schedule to allow for adequate review time: allow (5) business days for review of submittals Divisions 3 through 10 and allow (10) business days for review of submittals in all other divisions.

Shop drawings: Submit electronic copies of each sheet of drawings. Shop drawings are original drawings prepared by the subcontractor or vendor for the purpose of conveying information to the architect and/or engineer on how a building element or product will be constructed in sufficient detail for the architect and/or engineer to determine compliance with the design intent.

In all cases one copy of the submittal shall be returned to the general contractor. Electronic submittals for shop drawing or product data in either PDF or DWF format are acceptable for review.

All submittals, regardless of format, must bear the general contractor's stamp indicating the submittal has been reviewed and approved. Any submittal not meeting the requirements set forth will be rejected by the architect.

1.3 Requests For Information

A.

In the event that the general contractor, or a subcontractor, at any tier, determines that some portion of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents requires a clarification or interpretation by the architect, the general contractor shall submit a Request For Information in writing to the architect in an electronic copy.

Requests for Information may only be submitted by the general contractor and may only be submitted to the architect. The general contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the architect or the architect's consultants. In the Request for Information, the general contractor shall set forth an interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with an explanation of why such an understanding was reached.

B.

The architect will review all Requests for Information to determine whether they are Requests for

Information within the meaning of this term. If the architect determines that the document is not a request for information, it will be returned to the general contractor, un-reviewed as to content, for re-submittal in the proper form and in the proper manner.

Responses to Requests for Information shall be issued upon receipt, but no later that five (5) working days of receipt of the Request from the general contractor; unless the architect determines that a longer amount of time is necessary to provide an adequate response. If a longer amount of time is determined necessary by the architect, the architect will, within five (5) working days of receipt of the Request, notify the general contractor of the anticipated response time. If the general contractor submits a Request for Information on an activity with five (5) working days or less of float on the current project schedule the general contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the architect to respond to the Request provided that the architect responds within the parameters set forth above.

C.

Responses to Requests for Information from the architect will not change any requirements of the contract documents. In the event that the general contractor believes that a response to a Request

For Information will cause a change to the requirements of the contract documents, the general contractor shall immediately give written notice to the architect and the tenant stating that the general contractor considers the response to be a Change Order. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive the general contractor's (or any subcontractor's) right to seek additional time or cost under the Administrative Requirements of these contract documents.

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

1.1

Regulatory Requirements:

A.

Perform all work in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal building codes, plumbing codes, mechanical codes, electrical codes, ordinances and rules and regulations governing food service establishments.

B.

Comply with local, state and federal requirements governing accessibility.

C.

Obtain all required demolition and erosion control permits required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.2

Quality Control:

A.

Maintain quality control over manufacturers, suppliers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's instructions and applicable trade standards.

C.

Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and complying with specified requirements.

1.

Request clarification from the Architect before proceeding, where manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Contract Documents.

D.

Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work, except when more stringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E.

Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of the specified quality. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed, sized and installed to withstand stress, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

F.

All dimensions shall be considered "hold-to" dimensions unless indicated otherwise (e.g. minimum or maximum dimensions.)

1.3

Testing:

A.

Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspections, tests and other services when required.

B.

Include inspection and tests as indicated in the specification sections, drawings, and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.

Test concrete in accordance with Section 03300 and drawing requirements.

2.

Test structural steel in accordance with Section 05110 and drawing requirements.

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.1

Provide temporary facilities and controls as shown and specified:

A.

Codes and Standards: Provide temporary construction facilities and controls complying with all applicable local, State and Federal local laws, regulations and codes and utility company requirements.

B.

Temporary Heating, Ventilating and Cooling:

1.

Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary heating, ventilating and cooling equipment and facilities required during the progress of the work to protect materials, finished work, and equipment against damage from low and high temperatures and humidity.

2.

Provide temporary heating, ventilating and cooling when the outside temperature and humidity is low/high enough to damage or affect in any way the performance or quality of material and product stored in the building, in any temporary storage area, or any material or product incorporated into the work.

3.

Provide temporary heating, ventilating and cooling when the outside temperature and humidity is low/high enough to significantly slow or hamper effectiveness of workers and to provide suitable working conditions.

C.

Temporary Electrical Lighting and Power:

1.

Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary electrical service for lighting and power required during the progress of the work. Include all necessary wiring, fuses, disconnect switches, safety devices, junction boxes, panels, ground fault protections, and transformer if required. Include cost for providing temporary electric generators in the Contract Sum, if temporary electric service is not available for use during progress of the work.

2.

Temporary service and lighting and power items and installations shall conform to the requirements of the NFPA National Electric Code and OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act of

1970.

D.

Water: Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary water required during the progress of the work.

Include all necessary storage tanks, piping, valves, fittings, hose and hose connections during construction and testing.

E.

Temporary Toilets: Provide, pay for and maintain temporary toilet facilities for use by the Contractor,

Contractor's employees and all Subcontractors and Subcontractors' employees. Comply with all local requirements for installation, use and maintenance of temporary toilet facilities.

F.

Barriers and Enclosures:

1.

Provide temporary construction barriers in accordance with project requirements. Exercise all necessary precautions to protect adjacent properties, outside project contact limits, during progress of the work. Take special precautions to avoid damage to existing overhead and underground utilities and services owned or operated by the Owner or by public or private utility companies.

2.

Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures at exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and protection of materials and to allow for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling.

G.

Field Office, Telephone and Email:

1.

Provide and maintain a temporary field office at the project site during progress of the work. A designated area within the existing building will be available for use as a temporary field office.

Verify area size and location with the Tenant.

2.

Maintain copies of permits, approved shop drawings, specifications, addenda and record documents at field office.

3.

Provide temporary telephone service and internet service with email and photo capabilities to field office throughout progress of the work.

4.

Provide weekly photographic documentation of project progression to Tenant.

H.

Safety and Security

1.

Provide and maintain all necessary safety provisions for protection and safety of the project work, workers and general public.

2.

Provide and maintain operable fire extinguishing devices in well-marked, accessible locations throughout the project. Provide types, quantities and locations in compliance with governing codes and ordinances.

3.

Provide all necessary security barriers and enclosures to protect the work and Tenant's operations from unauthorized entry of persons, vandalism and theft. Provide doors, when required, with selfclosing hardware and locks.

I.

Cleaning

1.

During Construction: Provide an approved on-site container for the use of all Contractors and

Subcontractors for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. Remove crates and cartons in which materials, equipment, or fixtures are received to on-site containers daily.

a.

Maintain the property in a clean and orderly condition. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site on a daily basis and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site.

2.

Dust Control: a.

Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums and other similar closed or remote spaces prior to covering or enclosing the space.

b.

Sweep and vacuum clean interior surfaces before start of surface finishing and painting.

Continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until finishing and painting is completed.

c.

Cleaning operations shall be acceptable to the Tenant's Construction Manager.

SECTION 01630 - SUBSTITUTIONS

1.1

General:

A.

Products, including materials, equipment and systems described in the Contract Documents establish the standards of required function, dimension, appearance, quality and performance of the Work. Base all bids on the

"Standards" indicated.

B.

Requests by the Contractor for changes in products, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for "substitutions:" Substitutions will be considered only under the following conditions:

1.

The indicated "Standard" cannot be provided within the Contract Time

2.

The indicated "Standard" cannot receive necessary approval by the governing authority.

3.

A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit as determined by the Architect.

C.

Submit each request for substitution to the Architect. Identify the product, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, installer or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Identify related Specification

Section and Drawing numbers. Provide documentation as directed by the Architect.

D.

Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate written request, when requested directly by subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of the Contract Documents.

E.

Substitute products, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, and installers shall not be used for the Project without

Tenant and Architect's written acceptance.

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

1.1

Preparation:

A.

Protection of existing construction: Use all necessary care and appropriate means and methods to protect and prevent damage to existing construction and property not part of the Contract Work. Repair and refinish or replace construction and property damaged during construction work, at Contractor's expense.

1.2

Selective Demolition: Provide selective demolition as shown and specified.

A.

Preparation:

1.

Coordinate work of this Section with work of various Contractors and Tenant's staff.

2.

Maintain protected access at all times.

3.

Erect and maintain weatherproof closures at exterior openings.

4.

Erect and maintain dust-proof interior partitions to prevent spread of dust or fumes.

5.

Erect and maintain barricades, enclosures, bracing, shoring, lights, warning signs and guards necessary for worker and public safety and protection of property.

6.

Disconnect, remove and cap designated utility services. Identify and mark locations of disconnected and capped utilities at the project site and on Project Record Documents.

7.

Notify and coordinate with the Tenant's Construction Manager and the building Owner for any demolition occurring outside the lease limit.

8.

Coordinate hours of operation and construction access with the Tenant's Construction Manager and the building Owner.

B.

Selective Demolition

1.

Remove existing construction to accommodate new construction as indicated.

2.

Perform selective demolition in an orderly, systematic and careful manner with least possible disturbance to public and adjacent property. Use of explosives is prohibited.

3.

Immediately remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials, except as indicated otherwise.

Do not burn or bury materials on the project site.

1.3

Cleaning

A.

Final Cleaning: Perform final cleaning upon completion of project work.

1.

Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, tools, equipment and temporary construction facilities from the site.

2.

Clean exterior grounds; remove stains, spills and foreign materials from paved areas, power wash and sweep clean. Rake clean landscaped surfaces of the grounds.

3.

Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain.

4.

Clean all finished surfaces. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces.

a.

Clean all plumbing, fire protection and electrical fixtures and equipment including ceiling area elevated ductwork and lighting fixtures.

b.

Clean permanent equipment filters and replace temporary disposable filters in mechanical units used during construction.

c.

Clean ducts, blowers and coils if mechanical units were operated without filters during construction.

5.

Clean interior and exterior glazing and mirrors, polish transparent and glossy surfaces and clean floors with appropriate materials and equipment.

6.

Remove waste, foreign material and debris from roofs, areaways and drainage systems.

7.

Before Tenant occupancy, conduct an inspection, with the Tenant, of exposed interior and exterior surfaces at all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean.

1.4

Starting and Adjusting:

A.

Prior to Substantial Completion, coordinate the start-up, test and balance, placement in operation and adjustment all systems, controls and equipment to verify proper operation. All systems shall be complete and operating prior to final inspection.

1.5

Contract Closeout:

A.

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit one operation and maintenance manual, bound in 8-1/2" x 11" text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers.

1.

Subdivide the binder contents internally with permanent dividers logically organized as described below.

Provide tab titles clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

2.

Provide a table of contents with each product or system description identified.

3.

Provide a directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the project Architect/Engineer,

Contractor, Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers.

4.

Prepare operations and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section.

Identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of project Subcontractors and suppliers. For each category, identify the following: a.

Significant design criteria.

b.

List of equipment.

c.

Parts list for each component.

d.

Operating instructions.

e.

Maintenance instructions for each equipment item and systems.

f.

Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions for identifying detrimental agents.

5.

Submit operations and maintenance data to the Tenant with final application for payment in accordance with

Exhibit C of the Construction Contract.

B.

Record/As Built Documents:

1.

Prepare and maintain on site one set of the following record/as built documents: a.

Contract Documents.

b.

Construction Documents.

c.

Change orders and other modifications to the Contract.

d.

Shop drawings, product data, and samples.

e.

Construction schedule.

2.

Store record/as built documents separate from documents used for construction.

3.

Record actual revisions to the Work, concurrently with construction progress.

4.

Legibly mark and record a description of actual products installed at each specification section, including the following: a.

Manufacturer's name and product model and number.

b.

Approved product substitutions or alternates utilized.

c.

Changes made by addenda, change orders, and other modifications.

5.

Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including the following: a.

Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first main floor datum.

b.

Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

c.

Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

d.

Field changes of dimension and detail.

e.

Details not on original Contract Document drawings.

6.

Submit record/as built documents to the Tenant with final application for payment in accordance with

Exhibit C of the Construction Contract.

C.

Warranties and Bonds:

1.

Compile warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents.

2.

Submit duplicate copies of warranties and bonds to the Tenant with final application for payment in accordance with Exhibit C of the Construction Contract.

D.

Maintenance Materials and Spare Parts:

1.

Provide extra maintenance materials and spare parts in quantities indicated in the specification sections.

2.

Place in location as directed by the Tenant's Construction Manager.

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

1.1

General: Provide site construction work, including services, utilities, earthwork, paving and landscaping in accordance with the site construction work drawings and details.

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

1.1

General: Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the General Structural Notes, structural drawing

and details. Follow shell building documents for specifications, joints and geotech.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

ACI 117 "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2.

ACI 301 "Structural Concrete for Buildings."

3.

ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting."

4.

ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting."

5.

ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."

6.

ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Under Slab Vapor Retarder: Stego Industries LLC, 877-464-7834, internet www.stegoindustries.com high density polyethylene Stego Wrap (10 mil) Vapor Barrier meeting or exceeding ASTM E1745 performance criteria for

Class C vapor retarders.

1.

Seam Tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive.

2.

Pipe boots: Shop or site fabricated from vapor retarder material and seam tape.

B.

Concrete:

1.

Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I

2.

Aggregate: ASTM C33.

3.

Water: Clean and potable.

4.

Reinforcement: When required, comply with drawings reinforcement requirements.

5.

Compressive Strength: Minimum 3000 psi at 28 days.

6.

Admixtures: All admixtures shall be approved by the Tenant's Construction Manager prior to placement in the concrete mix.

C.

Topping Concrete: When required to suit installation conditions, Ardex Diama-Top of Ardex Engineered Cements

(888) 512-7339, internet www.ardex.com

1.

ULTRAFLOR ARDEX DIAMA-TOP, self-leveling concrete repair material.

2.

Any pinholes that need to be filled shall be filled with ARDEX DIAMA-FILL filling compound for polished concrete, concrete terrazzo and other cementitious wear surfaces applied at the appropriate time during the polishing process.

3.

The primer for areas to receive ARDEX DIAMA-TOP will be ARDEX EP 2000 Substrate Preparation Epoxy.

4.

Installation shall be performed by factory-trained professional applicators in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.1

Installation

A.

Vapor Retarder: Place, protect and repair vapor retarder sheets in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.

Provide a single layer of vapor retarder material over level compacted slab base.

2.

Lap joints and seams 6 inches and seal with seam tape.

3.

Seal all penetrations and repair damaged areas before concrete placement.

B.

Reinforcement Place and inspect all reinforcing steel before concrete is placed.

C.

Concrete Placement:

1.

Place cast-in-place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and 306R recommended practices for hot weather and cold weather concreting. Do not place concrete when temperature is below

40 degrees F.

2.

Wet cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, using moist curing or moisture-retaining covers

D. Finish: Except where additional floor finish is scheduled, provide a smooth steel trowel finish.

1.

Exposed concrete used as a finish floor surface shall have a smooth finished surface, uniform in texture and appearance and free of trowel marks and other defects affecting ease of maintenance.

2.

Grind smooth surface defects as directed by the Tenant's Construction Manager.

E.

Testing: When required, comply with drawings and specification sections testing requirements.

F.

Topping Concrete: Prepare concrete floor slab substrate surfaces, prime substrate surfaces, mix, install and finish topping concrete in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

1.1

2.1

General: When scheduled, provide a stained finish for existing concrete floors as shown and specified.

Materials:

A.

Concrete Stain: Terrastain, (706) 237-6066, ”Moss -1008”, an acid-free concrete stain.

3.1

Installation

A.

Preparation:

1.

Verify concrete substrates are dry and free of materials that would interfere with stain penetration.

B.

Clean existing concrete floors by pressure washing or scrubbing with rotary floor machine and suitable commercial detergent. Rinse and wet vacuum to remove all residue.

1.

Clean concrete floors previously coated with liquid curing materials, sealers, hardeners, paints, waxes, adhesives or water repellents by steel shot abrasive cleaning. Rinse and wet vacuum to remove all residue.

C.

New concrete floors should be allowed to cure for 2 or more weeks.

D.

The surface temperature of the concrete should be between 45 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit.

E.

Equipment: "Blastrac" by Wheelabrator Corp., 800/544-4144, or approved equal electric powered portable units with self-contained dust collection system. Provide unit size and shot media suitable for conditions and proposed stain finish materials as approved by the Tenant's Construction Manager.

1.

Perform penetration tests recommended by the stain manufacturer before initial stain application.

F.

Application for Large spaces: Apply Terrastain with a pump up garden-type sprayer using a light, wide spray setting. Move the spray wand in random patterns to avoid repetitive overlapping lines. Apply until the surface is wet, but do not allow puddles to form. Lightly blot up puddles or drips with a clean, absorbent cloth or sponge.

G.

Application for Small spaces: Apply Terrastain with a brush, rag, mop or high quality paint roller (3/8" to 1/2" nap). Use a clean absorbent cloth or sponge to blot roller marks or drips.

H.

Coverage: Typical product yields are 150 to 250 square feet per gallon, but will vary based on environmental conditions or the application rate.

I.

Drying time: Terrastain dries in 1 to 3 hours depending on the humidity and temperature of the installation site.

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A010

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

SECTION 03395 - CONCRETE SEALING AND POLISHING

1.1

General: Provide a sealed and polished concrete floor finish as shown and specified.

A.

Standards

1.

American Society for Testing and Materials: a.

ASTM-C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.

b.

ASTM G23-81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray c.

ASTMC805, Impact Strength

2.

American Concrete Institute a.

ACI 302. 1R-89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction

B.

Submittals: Provide the following:

1.

Manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions. Include Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDS) and identify application requirements, curing time and safety requirements.

2.

Certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming compliance with performance criteria.

3.

Manufacturer's certification that installer is a certified applicator of special concrete floor finishes, and familiar with manufacturer's installation procedures and requirements for the specified sealed and polished concrete floor finish.

4.

Manufacturer's and installer's written acceptance of substrate surface and installation conditions.

C.

Quality Assurance:

1.

Installer Qualifications: a.

Use a certified installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft.

b.

The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify the applicator.

c.

Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. Applicator shall have not less than three years successful experience installing sealed and polished floor finishes similar to those required for this project.

d.

Provide a letter of certification from special concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is a certified applicator and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer.

2.

Protection: Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, means, methods and procedures acceptable to the floor finish manufacturer and required to protect the concrete floor surface and provide a suitable substrate for the installation of the specified sealed and polished concrete floor finish.

A.

Project Conditions:

1.

Comply with the floor finish manufacturer's environmental limitations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature, and humidity, ventilation and other conditions affecting the special floor finish performance.

a.

Concrete must have an average Floor Flatness rating of at least 40.

b.

Concrete must have an average Floor Levelness rating of at least 40.

c.

Concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application of RetroPlate can begin. Wet cure of the concrete is preferred. No concrete sealer is necessary.

d.

Application of RetroPlate shall take place prior to installation of equipment, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application.

2.

Before general sealer/hardener application, prepare and coat a jobsite test area of size acceptable to the

Architect, to verify and approve proper surface preparation, application techniques and coverage rate.

3.

Close finished floor areas to traffic during floor finish application and after application for time period directed by the floor finish manufacturer.

4.

The completed RetroPlated slab will be covered to prevent damage by the other trades during store completion.

2.1

Materials

A.

Hardening/ Sealing Agent

1.

RetroPlate 99 manufactured by Advanced Floor Products Inc. (801) 812-3420 www.retroplatesystem.com

2.

RetroGuard Stain Inhibitor

3.

Joint Filler: CreteFill Pro 75. Two component 100% solids non-staining Polyurea Elastomer.

4.

Spall Repair: Multiple minor surface defects and irregularities: Crete Fill Spall Repair: High Strength hybrid urethane, two part 100% solids.

5.

Manufacturer's Representative: Contact Curtis Turnbull at RetroPlate for a list of Certified Applicators

(888)942-3144 [email protected]

3.1

Installation

A.

Surface Conditions

1.

Examine substrate, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

2.

Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place

Concrete," and Project Conditions above.

3.

Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents.

B.

Application

The following RetroPlate process will be followed as listed below:

A concrete grinding machine must be used. Floors should be started using a 50, 80 or 100 grit diamond pucks depending on the condition of the slab. Current design is for a non-aggregate floor, meaning the following process is not intended to expose aggregate. Please proceed accordingly. The process is as follows:

1.

Grind floor using 100 grit resin diamonds.

2.

Clean the floor using automatic scrubber or comparable.

3.

Grind floor using 200 grit resin diamonds.

4.

Clean the floor using automatic scrubber or comparable.

5.

Apply RetroPlate 99 to floor at 200 sq. ft. per gallon, scrubbing product into the floor and allowing product to soak until turning slick. If it becomes sticky, apply water to the surface as necessary, leaving the product on the floor for at least 60 minutes.

6.

Grind floor using 400 grit resin diamonds.

7.

Clean the floor using automatic scrubber or comparable.

8.

Clean and remove any excess RetroPlate. Let the floor dry overnight.

9.

Continue the polishing process using 800 grit resin diamonds.

10.

Clean the floor using automatic scrubber or comparable.

11.

Alternately, depending on slab condition, grind floor using 1200-1500 grit resin diamonds.

12.

Clean the floor using automatic scrubber or comparable.

13.

The same process will be used for new floors as well as rehab floors. Floor prep for the rehab floors will be separate.

14.

Apply an even coat of RetroGuard Sealer with a brush, roller, or low-pressure sprayer, and when surface is dry, burnish the floor with a black burnishing pad. Apply a second coat of RetroGuard one hour after the initial application, and again burnish the floor with a black burnishing pad.

15.

Do not walk on surface for 12 hours, and do not introduce any water or moisture for at least 48 hours, allowing for proper drying and setting of RetroPlate and RetroGuard. Water will minimize the sealing properties of RetroPlate and RetroGuard.

C.

Start any of the floor finish applications win presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

D.

Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface

1.

Concrete must be in place a minimum of 28 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application can begin.

2.

Application is to take place at least 10 days to the prior to racking and other in-store accessory installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application.

3.

Only a certified applicator shall apply RetroPlate 99. Procedures must be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample.

4.

Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen.

5.

Polish to a level 2 shine.

E.

Workmanship and Cleaning

1.

The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times.

2.

Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces, as necessary.

3.

Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations.

4.

Remove debris from jobsite a.

Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations.

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

1.1

General: Provide unit masonry assemblies as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02 "Specifications for Masonry Structures."

2.

NCMA "TEK Bulletins."

3.

BIA "Technical Notes on Brick Construction."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Size and thickness as shown on drawings.

1.

ASTM C 90, load-bearing, normal weight, natural color CMU, properly cured at time of delivery, linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.065%.

2.

Provide special shapes where required.

3.

Provide exterior wall CMU containing an integral polymeric water-repellent admixture.

a.

Manufacturer: W. R. Grace "Dry-BlockR System Block Admix ".

B.

Face Brick:

1.

Manufacturer: Watsontown Brick Company, 800-538-2040, internet www.watsontownbrick.com

2.

Type: "Sturbridge M Type I Standard" complying with ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. No efflorescence when tested in accordance with ASTM C67.

3.

Size: Modular size, laying three courses to 8" vertically.

4.

Provide special shapes where required.

D.

Mortar Materials:

1.

Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or III, natural color.

2.

Masonry cement: ASTM C91, Type indicated, natural color.

3.

Aggregate: ASTM C144, clean masonry sand.

4.

Water: Clean, fresh and potable.

5.

Provide all exterior wall masonry mortar containing an integral polymeric water-repellent admixture.

a.

Manufacturer W. R. Grace, "Dry-BlockR Integral Water-Repellent Mortar Admixture".

F.

Unit Masonry Mortar Mixes: ASTM C270 proportions by volume.

1.

Face brick: Type N mortar.

2.

Dye: SGS #44 by Solomon Grind Services.

G.

Reinforced Unit Masonry Grout Mixes

1.

Concrete fill: ASTM C94 3,000 psi concrete.

H.

Joint Reinforcement, Wall Ties And Anchors: Finish, ASTM A-153 hot-dip galvanized

1.

Manufacturer: Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

2.

Horizontal joint reinforcement: Welded ladder type with matching corners and Tee units.

a.

Single Wythe masonry: Standard single 9 gage side and cross rods. Dur-O-Wal D/A 320 Ladur.

3.

Anchoring devices: Provide strap anchors, inserts, bolts and rods of type and size indicated.

a.

CMU to CMU: Strap anchors 1/4" x 1-1/4" x 24" steel with bent ends.

b.

CMU to structural steel: Dur-O-Wal D/A 701-708 Triangle Ties with plain steel weld-on anchor rods to receive anchors.

4.

Masonry veneer to cold-formed metal framing: Dur-O-Wal D/A 210W Tri-Tie veneer anchors, with adjustable 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire tie sections and 14 gage screw-on attachment plate.

a.

Fasteners: Dur-O-Wal D/A 807 self-drilling, self-tapping screws, 1-1/4" x #10, corrosionresistant coated. Provide two screw fasteners for each attachment plate.

5.

Seismic masonry veneer to cold-formed metal framing: When required, Dur-O-Wal D/A 213S 14 gage screw-on Seismic Anchor Plates with D/A 213SP 12 gage Seismic Pintels and ,D/A 8706 9 gage Pencil Rods.

a.

Fasteners: Dur-O-Wal D/A 807 self-drilling, self-tapping screws, 1-1/4" x #10, corrosionresistant coated. Provide two screw fasteners for each attachment plate.

I.

Concealed Masonry Through-Wall Flashing: W. R. Grace "Perm-A-Barrier" self-adhering modified bituminous sheet,

40 mils thick.

1.

Termination Mastic: W.R. Grace "Bituthene Mastic."

2.

Primer: W.R. Grace "Bituthene P-300 Primer."

3.

Termination bars: Extruded aluminum or stainless steel, 1" wide and .098" thick pre-punched at

6" on center, secured with stainless steel drive pins.

J.

Accessories

1.

Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel bars of sizes indicated.

2.

Wall weeps: Dur-O-Wal D/A 1006 "Cell Vent", clear flexible polypropylene co-polymer.

3.

Compressible joint material: Dur-O-Wal "Rapid Soft-Joint" D/A 2010.

4.

Bond breaker strips: ASTM D226 No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.

5.

Cleaning agents: a.

Face Brick and CMU: ProSoCo, Inc., "Sure Klean New Masonry Cleaners." b.

ACMU: ProSoCo, Inc., "Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner."

6.

Expansion/Control joint sealants: Polyurethane-based, elastomeric joint sealant complying with

ASTM C920 and Section 07900 requirements. Color matched to adjacent surfaces.

3.1

Installation

A.

Preparation

1.

Wet absorbent face brick masonry units requiring wetting, in accordance with BIA recommendations.

2.

Lay concrete masonry units dry.

3.

Establish, lines, levels and coursing. Ensure ties, anchors and flashing are correctly installed

4.

Mix mortar cementitious materials and aggregate in a mechanical mixer. Add water in amount to provide satisfactory workable consistency of mortar. Retemper mortar as required within two hours of mixing to replace water lost be evaporation. Discard mortar after two and one-half hours of initial mixing. Do not use mortar after it has started to set.

B.

Installation - General:

1.

Build walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown.

2.

Cut masonry units using motor-driven masonry saws to provide clean, sharp edges. Cut units to fit adjoining work neatly. Provide 100% solid units where cores would be exposed.

3.

Cold weather construction, hot weather construction, and masonry construction tolerances:

Comply with unit masonry standard ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 requirements.

C.

Laying Masonry

1.

Layout walls in advance to ensure accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths, and to properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns and offsets. Do not use less than half-size units at corners, jambs and other locations.

2.

Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with ACI 530.1 tolerances. Provide square corners and angles, except as otherwise indicated, with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.

3.

Pattern bond: Running bond. Do not use units with less than 4" of horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

4.

Lay hollow CMU/ACMU with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed CMU webs in mortar in starting courses. Maintain uniform 3/8" joint widths.

5.

Lay face brick and solid CMU/ACMU with completely filled bed and head joints. Do not slush head joints. Maintain uniform 3/8" joint widths.

6.

Compress and cut joints flush for masonry walls below grade or covered by other materials.

7.

Tool joints in all exposed masonry work to a concave joint.

8.

Provide interlocking masonry bond in each course at corners and intersecting walls.

9.

As the work progresses, build in masonry accessories and related items. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

a.

Bed hollow metal frame anchors in mortar and fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solid with fine mortar grout.

b.

Provide solid masonry bearing for all lintels, beams, joists, plates and load-bearing members.

c.

Take particular care to embed all conduits and pipes within concrete masonry without fracturing exposed shells and to fit units around switch, receptacle and other boxes set in walls. Where electric conduit, outlets, switch boxes and similar items occur, grind and cut units before building in services.

d.

Install anchors, plates and related work built into masonry work.

e.

Install reinforcing steel and concrete fill where indicated. Comply with drawing details.

10.

Horizontal joint reinforcing: Provide continuous joint reinforcing at all concrete masonry walls as follows: a.

In every second block course, 16" on center vertically, full height of wall and every block course where shown on the drawings.

b.

Lap reinforcement a full width at the corners and at intersections or use special fabricated sections.

c.

Fully embed side rods in mortar.

11.

Anchoring masonry work: Provide anchoring devices of the type indicated or required.

12.

Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where indicated.

a.

When not indicated, at maximum 30'-0" on center.

b.

Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in masonry and acceptable to Architect.

c.

Joint sealant color shall match masonry materials sealed.

13.

Lintels: Install loose steel lintels furnished under structural steel work where shown. Set lintels in full bed of mortar.

14.

Flashing and weeps: a.

Install concealed through wall masonry flashing at all wall sills, masonry openings in exterior walls with masonry above head, over all horizontal steel members built into masonry and elsewhere as indicated. Provide "drainage wall system" masonry construction.

b.

Provide end dams and positive slope to drain. Extend flashing vertically at least 8" and built into or anchor to back-up with a termination bar for a complete watertight installation.

c.

Flexible Membrane Flashing:

1.) Install membrane flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

2.) Fully adhere flashing to substrate.

3.) Lap flashing joints a minimum of 6", seal and roll with a hand roller.

4.) Trim bottom edge 1/4" back from exposed face of masonry.

5.) Seal edges, seams, cuts and penetrations with manufacturer's recommended mastic.

15.

Install weeps in head joints of final course of exterior masonry wythe above flashing. Space weeps maximum of 24" on center horizontally and located to avoid door openings. Install weeps at head joints with outside face of weep material held 1/8" from the finish face of masonry unit.

16.

Install compressible joint material at lintels and horizontal steel members. Build in joint fillers and seal with elastomeric joint sealant.

D.

Masonry Veneer Walls:

1.

Metal framed walls: Tie exterior masonry veneer wythe to back-up wall with individual metal ties screwed to metal stud framing.

2.

Space ties 16" on center vertically and horizontally.

3.

Maintain veneer wall cavity free of mortar droppings during masonry installation.

E.

Architectural Concrete Masonry Units: Install ACMU in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and the following:

1.

Draw ACMU from more than one pallet at a time during installation.

F.

Reinforced Concrete Masonry

1.

Reinforce and fill CMU/ACMU wall and column masonry where indicated. Fill all cores solid with concrete fill. Comply with NCMA TEK Bulletins 3-2, 3-3A and 14-2 recommendations.

a.

Comply with drawing details for reinforcing steel size and spacing.

2.

Install bond beams where indicated. Reinforce and fill units solid with concrete fill. Comply with drawing details for reinforcing steel size and spacing.

G.

Repair, Pointing and Cleaning

1.

In process cleaning: Wipe off excess mortar as the work progresses. Dry brush with bristle brushes exposed masonry at the end of each day's work. Remove mortar spatters and joint ridges.

2.

Clean all exposed masonry. Cleaning agents subject to Architect's approval. Before applying any cleaning agent to the entire wall, clean a sample wall area of approximately 20 square feet in a location acceptable to the Architect. Do not proceed with final cleaning until the sample area has been allowed to dry a minimum of 3 days and the test area cleaning approved. Protect all windows, doors, louvers, metal lintels and other corrodible parts. Damaged materials and work replaced at Contractor's expense.

3.

Dry clean exposed surfaces to remove large particles of mortar using hardwood wood paddles and scrapers.

Metal tools not acceptable.

4.

Presoak exposed masonry surfaces by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt.

5.

Apply cleaning solutions and clean masonry in accordance with the cleaning material manufacturer's cleaning instructions.

6.

Muriatic acid cleaning of masonry not permitted.

H.

Architectural Concrete Masonry:

1.

Keep ACMU walls clean during installation. Remove excess mortar on daily basis using brushes, rags or burlap squares.

2.

Clean completed walls with detergent masonry cleaner recommended by the ACMU manufacturer. Acid cleaning agents, abrasive cleaners, tools or powders and metal cleaning tools and brushes are not permitted.

3.

After final clean down and when walls are dry, apply ACMU acrylic finish coating in accordance with ACMU manufacturer's application instructions.

DIVISION 5 - METALS

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

1.1

General: Provide structural steel in accordance with the General Structural Notes and structural drawings and details.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following:

1.

AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings."

2.

AISC "Code of Standard Practice."

3.

AWS "Structural Welding Code, D1.1-Steel."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required.

B.

Structural Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, 36 ksi steel.

C.

Tubular Steel: ASTM A500, 46 ksi yield strength steel, cold-formed welded and seamless.

D.

Structural pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade selected by the fabricator as required for design loading, standard finish, standard weight (Schedule 40) except as otherwise indicated.

E.

Grout: ASTM C1107, pre-mixed, shrinkage resistant, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout.

F.

Shop paint primer: Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

G.

Fabrication: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification - Structural Steel for Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice." Provide welded or bolted connections in accordance with the Structural

Drawings connection requirements.

1.

Welding: Conform to AWS welding standards. Provide only continuous welds, spot welding is not acceptable.

Grind all exposed welds smooth.

2.

Splicing: Material, if spliced, shall have maximum one splice per structural member. Perform splicing by full penetration butt-welding using AWS qualified welders and welding methods.

3.

Shop painting: Shop paint structural metal members, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded and galvanized surfaces.

Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Erection: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification - Structural Steel for Buildings" and

"Code of Standard Practice".

1.

Plumb, level and align base plates for structural members with steel shims.

2.

Grout structural steel base plates solid that bear on concrete or masonry surfaces.

B.

Testing: When required, comply with drawings testing requirements.

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

1.1

General: Provide cold-formed metal framing in accordance with the General Structural Notes and structural drawings and details.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following:

1.

AISI SG02.2-01 "Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

2.

AWS "Structural Welding Codes, D1.3-Sheet Steel."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required.

B.

Load-Bearing Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM A1003, Gage, Grade and Type indicated.

1.

Components: Provide sizes and shapes indicated.

2.

Finish: Galvanized complying with ASTM A653, minimum G60 coating.

C.

Fabrication:

1.

Cold-formed metal framing may be prefabricated into panels before erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.

a.

Provide one-piece full-length cold-formed metal framing members. Splicing not permitted.

2.

Attach and join other components by welding or screw fasteners, as indicated. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.

3.

Cut framing to fit squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for angular fit against abutting members. Hold members securely in position until properly fastened.

4.

Saw cut field cut framing. Torch cutting not acceptable.

D.

Installation:

1.

Erection: Erect cold-formed metal framing members of gage and at spacing indicated on the Structural

Drawings. Align and secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by welding or screw fasteners at both inside and outside flanges.

2.

Tolerance Acceptance: Install cold-formed metal framing member as indicated on the plans. Install to

1/16" tolerance.

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A011

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

1.1

General: Provide metal fabrications as shown and specified.

A.

Submit shop drawings for the following:

1. Patio Rail systems.

a.

Show thickness, size, construction and manner of assembling various members, joint locations and railing layout.

b.

Show true profiles, connections and relationship to adjoining work and methods of anchoring.

2.1

Materials

A.

Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required.

B.

Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, 36 ksi steel.

C.

Stainless Steel:

1.

Wall: 18 gage, ASTM A167, AISI Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

2.

Corner Cove Base: Custom by Decimet Sales, Inc., Contact Tony Hines or Lisa Pappenfus at (763) 428-4321.

(No substitutes)

D.

Diamond Plate: Nominal 1/8" thick ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6, Aluminum Diamond Tread Plate.

1.

Wall: Bright reflective finish.

2.

Floor: Mil finish.

E.

Patio Railing System

1.

Submit shop drawings including the following: a.

Show thickness, size, construction and welding, as well as assembly drawings.

b.

Show true profiles, connections of all typical joint configurations c.

Show installation (fastening) and proposed grout (non-gypsum base) d.

Show gate detail and gate hardware manufacturer and model number e.

Patio railing plan, with dimensions and panel assembly locations.

2.

Fabrication a.

Patio rails and gate shall be fabricated from steel flat bar, 3/8" x 2 1/2", grade A36.

b.

Corner connector angles shall be 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 1/4" steel L angle.

c.

Gate hinges shall be a self-closing, adjustable tension type. Hinge installation shall be drilled and tapped.

Permanently welded are unacceptable.

d.

Gate stop shall have a rubber cushion stop and be affixed to the active gate.

e.

All corners and joints shall be seal welded and outside joints ground smooth.

f.

All welding spatter shall be removed before sand blasting.

3.

Finish a.

Patio railing shall be painted PPG Durethane, color 518-6 Knight's Armor. Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and

Coatings for preparation.

F.

Exposed Fasteners:

1.

Diamond Plate: #8 x 1" bevel headed stainless steel screw.

2.

Patio Railing: a.

All fasteners shall be stainless steel and powder coated to match railing sections.

b.

Spacer washers separating railing sections shall be 1 1/2" diameter and 1/2" thick they shall be one piece thick washers and not comprised of stacking washers c.

Spacer washers shall be used on all straight sections and when railing panels join at 90 degree corner angles.

G.

Shop paint primer: Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings

3.1

Installation: Comply with the Architectural Drawing details and the following:

A.

Exposed Fasteners:

1.

Corrugated Siding: Provide uniform 8" vertical and 7-3/8" horizontal pattern. All screws shall be in the "Valley". Screws shall commence approximately 3" form the side and 3" from the bottom edge of the wainscot. Exposed fasteners shall remain unpainted in natural factory supplied finish.

2.

Flat Metal Panels: Provide 18" vertical and horizontal pattern or spaced equally if 18" pattern does not finish evenly.

Exposed fasteners shall remain unpainted in natural factory supplied finish.

3.

Diamond Plate: Provide counter sunk fasteners at perimeter of panels at 2'-0" on center maximum as well as fully adhering to surface.

B.

Stainless Steel:

1.

Wall: a.

Clean stainless steel panel with mineral spirits.

b.

Install stainless steel panels with Henry 117 oil based adhesive applied to wall with 1/8" notch tooth trowel.

c.

Trim seams as indicated on the Drawings. No exposed fasteners.

2.

Corner Cove Base: Install a day prior to quarry tile base. Apply adhesive liberally to the back of the corner cove base and press and tape firmly in place until adhesive has set. Neatly caulk the top of the stainless with GE Silicone II

(color Aluminum).

a.

Over Cement Board: Bond with GE Silicone II, 100% silicone sealant for aluminum and metal.

b.

Over Stainless Steel: Bond with Hydroment Ultra-Set.

C.

Diamond Plate:

1.

Wall: Mount over plywood substrate w/ flush exposed fasteners.

2.

Floor: Provide continuous bead of silicone sealant to back side perimeter of plate prior to installation.

3.

Mount with exposed fasteners. Provide continuous bead of silicone sealant to perimeter of plate after installation.

D.

Patio Railing System:

1.

Railing posts shall be set 6" deep into a core drilled hole, 4"-6" diameter

2.

Railing posts shall be grouted in using non gypsum quick set grout.

3.

Railing posts shall be set in grout plumb and level, with a tolerance of 1/8" in 4 feet.

E.

Hand-inspect all joints and edges of installed metal materials. Unless otherwise indicated, fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Grind and ease exposed joints, and edges smooth and free of burrs.

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.1

2.1

General: Provide rough carpentry work as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following:

1.

NIST PS-1-95 "Construction and Industrial Plywood."

2.

NIST PS-2-95 "Performance Standards for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels."

C.

3.

NIST PS-20-99 "American Softwood Lumber Standard."

4.

NF&PA NDS-97 "Wood Construction and Supplement."

5.

AWPA "Wood Treatment Standards."

Materials:

A.

Lumber: Factory grade-marked, dressed, seasoned dimension lumber, S4S, air-dried, maximum 19% moisture content complying with PS-20, dimensions indicated.

1.

Blocking, nailers and similar members: Standard Grade Western Dimension Lumber or Southern Pine species.

a.

Provide preservative treated lumber, where indicated.

B.

Plywood: Factory grade-marked, complying with PS-1, square edge, 5/8" thick.

1.

APA-RATED SHEATHING EXP1.

a.

Provide Exterior Grade (EXT) plywood, where indicated.

b.

Provide fire-retardant treated plywood, where required by Building Code.

Oriented Strand Board (OSB): Factory grade-marked, complying with PS-2, square edge, 5/8" thick

2.2

Wood Treatment:

A.

Preservative Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber).

1.

Pressure preservative treat lumber with water-borne preservatives, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf.

2.

Treat wood blocking, nailers and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing.

3.

Treat wood plates, blocking, furring and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

B.

Fire-Retardant Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C27 (Plywood). Identify

"fire-retardant-treated plywood" with appropriate UL classification marking.

1.

Treated materials shall meet "Interior Type A" FR-S ratings of not more than 25 for flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed when tested in accordance with UL 723 or ASTM E84, with no increase in flame spread and evidence of significant progressive combustion upon continuation of test for additional

30 minutes.

C.

Kiln-dry all treated lumber and plywood materials after treatment to maximum 15% moisture content.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Lumber: Provide wood blocking, nailers and similar members where shown and where required for attachment of other work and surface applied items. Attach to substrate as required to support applied loading.

1.

Use only sound, seasoned materials of longest practical lengths and sizes to minimize joints.

2.

Use materials free of warp. Make tight connections between members.

SECTION 06210 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK

1.1

General: Provide finish carpentry and millwork as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards - 1999."

B.

Doors and door hardware: Install all door hardware furnished under Division 8 specification Sections.

C.

Submit shop drawings for designated millwork.

1.

Include complete details, materials lists and drawings showing fabrication of typical units, unit assemblies, locations and installation details.

2.

List proposed cabinet hardware to suit indicated unit use or function.

3.

Identify materials required to complete work ready for installation.

4.

Obtain shop drawing approval before starting fabrication.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Plywood: AWI Section 200

1.

Concealed use substrates: D-3 Paint Grade hardwood plywood, with aspen veneer core, 3/4" thick.

2.

Exposed to view finishes: Plumb Creek, AC Sanded Face Exterior Fir plywood, 23/32" thick by 4'-0" by 8'-0".

Pressure treated with d-blaze to meet Class A fire rating, where required.

B.

Millwork: Materials and construction as detailed on the Drawings.

C.

Fabrication:

1.

Millwork design and fabrication details shown on the drawings indicate design intent. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard fabrication methods. Indicate all proposed variations from the drawing design and fabrication details on shop drawings.

2.

Fabricate millwork in accordance with AWI "Custom Grade" requirements. Where details are not shown, comply with applicable Quality Standards or with alternate details acceptable to Architect as fabricator's option.

a.

All shop joints made with standard construction adhesive glued under pressure.

3.

Fabricate finished work properly framed, closely fit and accurately set to required lines and levels and rigidly secured in place.

4.

Fabricate work straight, plumb, level and in true alignment; neatly and accurately fit, scribed and thoroughly secured. Plane and sand miters and other joints. Ease all square edges. Provide millwork clean and free from warp, twist, open joints and other defects.

5.

Provide finished woodwork dressed and sanded free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain or other defects on surfaces exposed to view in finished work.

D.

Finish: Provide exposed to view plywood shop finished with clear dull sheen ML Campbell Krystal conversion varnish.

Apply two coats with scuff sanding in between. All cuts in field are to be sanded smooth and finished with clear dull sheen ML Campbell High Performance Pre-Cat Lacquer. Apply two coats with scuff sanding between.

3.1

Installation

A.

Install finish carpentry and millwork products plumb, level, true and straight with no distortion. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops) and with

1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.

1.

Scribe and cut finish carpentry and millwork products to fit adjoining work.

2.

Anchor finish carpentry and millwork items to built-in place blocking, furnished under

3.

Section 06100, or directly attach to substrate framing. Secure to grounds, blocking and nailers with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Use finish nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where clear finish is indicated.

4.

Touch-up shop finished plywood materials marred or damaged during delivery, storage and installation with custom blended polyurethane to equal Minwax "Wipe on Poly".

B.

Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.

Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

C.

Install plastic laminate countertops, shelving and trim. Provide work level, true to alignment, accurately fit to wall conditions and securely fastened to base units and other support systems as indicated.

SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

1.1

General: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic panels as shown and specified.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturer: Marlite, (330) 343-6621, internet www.marlite.com.

B.

Panel System: Marlite "Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Panels", 3/32" thick, 48" wide x full height required. White color, pebbled high gloss surface texture. USDA approved for incidental food contact.

1.

Panel trim: Extruded PVC, color matching panel color. Provide 1/2" x 1/2" inside corners, edge trim, and division moldings as required to complete the installation.

2.

Panel trim: Stainless Steel, color matching panel color. Provide 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" outside corners as required to complete the installation.

3.

Sealant: Marlite "Silicone Sealant", white gunnable silicone sealant.

4.

Panel adhesive: Marlite "C-551" water-based construction adhesive for panel application over porous surfaces.

3.1

Installation

A.

Install the FRP system products using panel adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.

Install panels plumb, level, true and straight with no distortion; providing a continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and adjacent construction.

2.

Provide corner trim, closure trim at intersections of dissimilar materials and moldings at abutting panels.

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

1.1

General: Provide building insulation as shown and specified.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Extruded polystyrene foam rigid board insulation: Dow Chemical Co., 866-583-2583, internet www.dowbuildingmaterials.com

1.

Type: Dow "Styrofoam" Type IV, 1.6 pcf minimum density, 25 psi compressive strength complying with ASTM C 578, R-value equal 5 per inch of thickness. Provide lengths and widths as required to coordinate with space insulated.

2.

Perimeter foundation walls: Styrofoam SE, R-value indicated/2" thickness.

B.

Glass fiber batt/blanket insulation: Owens Corning Corp., (800) 438-7465, internet www.owenscorning.com.

1.

Type: Owens Corning " Thermal Batt" Type I unfaced glass fibers and binders formed into flexible blankets or batts complying with ASTM C665,. Provide lengths and widths required to coordinate with spaces insulated.

2.

Exterior walls: Unfaced, R-value/thickness indicated

C.

Vapor barrier membrane: Polyethylene, minimum 6 mils thick, complying with ASTM D 4397, maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

1.

Joint tape: Pressure sensitive tape designed for sealing joints and penetrations of above and below grade vapor barrier sheets.

2.

Mounting tape: Double-faced pressure sensitive tape suitable for mounting vapor barriers to steel framing.

3.1

Installation:

A.

General:

1.

Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions of installation indicated.

Install insulation in single layer of required thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions. Fill all voids.

2.

Install exterior wall insulation continuous behind electrical boxes, conduit, piping and ductwork.

B.

Foundation perimeter walls and slabs:

1.

Install rigid foam insulation vertically from top of slab to frost line or horizontally under slabs, extending a minimum 36" in from exterior walls.

2.

Protect insulation from displacement and damage during backfilling and slab placement

C.

Exterior Walls:

1.

Install batt/blanket insulation full height at exterior wall framing. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members and provide a friction fit between edges of insulation and metal framing members.

2.

Provide galvanized wire mesh or metal strapping to provide supplementary support when required to maintain insulation in permanent proper location.

D.

Vapor Barriers:

1.

Install a single layer of vapor barrier membrane over the interior of exterior metal wall framing after installation of insulation. Secure with double faced tape at wall framing.

2.

Provide single unspliced material height. Horizontal joints not acceptable. Minimize vertical joints. Lap vertical joints and secure in place with joints taped. Provide tape sealed contact with door frames, window frames, piping, conduit, ductwork, registers and the vapor barrier.

3.

Seal all cuts and penetrations of vapor barrier membrane with tape before installing surface finishes.

1.1

General: Provide the exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

EIMA (EIFS Industry Members Association) Standards and Publications.

a.

101.01, 101.02, 101.03, 101.86, 105.01, 200.02.

b.

EIMA "Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation board."

B.

Quality Assurance:

1.

System components: a.

Produced by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by the EIFS system manufacturer.

b.

Fire performance: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.

Installer Qualifications: Performed by the system manufacturer or an applicator trained and approved by the system manufacturer. During application, the work shall be inspected by system manufacturer's representative.

C.

Environmental conditions: Comply with manufacturer's requirements. Do not install materials during wet or freezing weather.

2.1

Materials

A.

Manufacturer: STO Corp., (800) 221-2397, internet www.stocorp.com

B.

Exterior insulation and finish system: Sto Class PB "Essence NExt" EIFS.

1.

Air/Moisture barrier: Sto Guard system.

a.

Sto Gold Fill Joint compound for rough opening protection, sheathing joints and inside and outside corners.

b.

Sto Guard Mesh: Coated glass fiber fabric reinforcing mesh.

c.

Sto Gold coat: Waterproof coating for wall sheathing.

2.

Primer/adhesive and base coat: Sto Primer/Adhesive-B, one-component, polymer modified, cement based factory blended primer/adhesive used to attach insulation board to prepared sheathing substrates and as a base coat in Essence claddings.

3.

Insulation board: ASTM C578 Type 1, nominal 1.0 lb/ft³ expanded polystyrene meeting EIMA Guideline specifications for EPS insulation board.

4.

Finish coating: Sto Essence DPR, ready-mixed 100% acrylic-based, textured wall coating.

a.

Medium/Fine Sand Finish.

b.

Color as indicated on the Architectural drawings from manufacturer's full color range or match custom color.

5.

System warranty: 10 year labor and material.

C.

Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, white or gray in color.

D.

Water: Clean, potable and free of foreign matter.

E.

Reinforcing mesh: Sto open-weave glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating.

1.

Standard mesh: Sto Mesh, nominal 4.5 oz/yd² fabric.

2.

Ultra-High impact mesh: Sto Armor Mat, nominal 15 oz/yd² ultra-high impact fabric.

3.

Specialty mesh: a.

Sto Detail Mesh, nominal 4.2 oz/yd² flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric.

b.

Sto Corner Mat, nominal 7.8 oz/yd² pre-creased, heavy-duty, glass fiber fabric.

F.

Joint sealants: Polyurethane base elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920 and Section 07900 requirements.

1.

Adhesion: Evaluated in accordance with ASTM C1382.

2.

Color: Matching EIFS finish coating color, and visually acceptable to the Architect.

G.

Accessories: Provide plastic stops and trim where indicated. Materials shall be compatible with EIFS materials and acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.

1.

Starter Track: Rigid PVC plastic track with weepholes and drip edge.

3.1

Mixing

A.

Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

1.

Mix with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency.

2.

No rapid binder, anti-freeze or accelerator additives permitted.

4.1

Installation

A.

Preparation:

1.

Coordinate installation of roofing membrane, windows, doors and other wall penetrations to provide a continuous exterior wall air/moisture barrier.

2.

Coordinate installation of windows, doors and window and door flashing to provide a continuous exterior wall air/moisture barrier.

3.

Install copings and joint sealants immediately after installation of the EIFS, when EIFS coatings are dry.

B.

Installation: Install Sto Guard air/moisture barrier system and exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, complying with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work.

1.

Back wrap exposed board edges with mesh.

2.

Provide double wrap or corner mat reinforcing at all inside and outside corners.

3.

Provide expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrates and systems required, and visually acceptable to the Architect.

4.

Provide drainable starter track horizontal edge trim as base of wall, above windows and doors openings and beneath windows with concealed flashing.

C.

Insulation and adhesive application:

1.

Install insulation board with long edge horizontal using running bond pattern. Off set insulation joints with substrate joints. Stagger joints and interlock joints at corners.

2.

Apply adhesive to insulation board with a stainless steel trowel notched trowel, providing vertical uniform ribbons of adhesive when board is installed. Mount insulation board on substrate. Level, align and tamp insulation in place. Provide uniform contact and bond with joints tightly butted. Rasp edges and high areas as required to produce a level, plane surface.

D.

Base coat and reinforcing mesh application:

1.

Apply detail mesh at corners of windows, doors, and all penetrations through the EIFS.

2.

Standard mesh: Apply base coat over insulation board to a uniform 1/8 inch thickness, including high impact mesh where indicated. Embed standard reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive, lap edges at seams. Smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Allow to base coat to dry.

3.

Ultra-High impact mesh: Apply base coat over insulation board to a uniform 1/8 inch thickness. Fully embed ultrahigh impact reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive, butt edges at seams. Smooth surface until mesh is not visible.

Allow to base coat to dry. Locate at 4'-0" wide perimeter of the rear service door to 6'-0" above grade and as indicated on Architectural drawings.

E.

Apply finish coating continuously in one operation to the entire wall surface Provide a uniform finished appearance. Level and texture to the specified finish texture.

F.

Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and joints within the system using elastomeric joint sealants, in accordance with drawing details and sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

1.1

Section Includes

A.

Weather barrier membrane

B.

Seam Tape

C.

Flashing

D.

Fasteners

1.2

References

A.

ASTM International

1.

ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

2.

ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants

3.

ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting

4.

ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics

5.

ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

6.

ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

7.

ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls.

8.

ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

B.

AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

1.

Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test

C.

TAPPI

1.

Test Method T-410; Grams or Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area)

2.

Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method)

1.3

Quality Assurance

A.

Qualifications

1.

Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions.

2.

Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations.

3.

Source Limitations: Provide commercial weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

1.4

Delivery, Storage and Handling

A.

Refer to Section 01400 Quality Requirements.

B.

Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C.

Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

1.5

Scheduling

A.

Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

B.

Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation.

2.1

Manufacturer

A.

DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, D19805;

1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://constructiontyvek.com

2.2 Materials

A.

Basis of Design: Hi-performance, spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non perforated, weather barrier is based upon

DuPont Tyvek CommercialWrap and related assembly components.

B.

Performance Characteristics:

1.

Air Penetration: 0.001 CFM/feet squared at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per

ASTM E1677.

2.

Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 Method B.

3.

Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.

4.

Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yard squared, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410.

5.

Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.

6.

Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A.

7.

Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.

8.

Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 10,

Smoke Developed: 10.

2.3

Accessories

A.

Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont Tyvek Tape for commercial applications.

B.

Fasteners:

1.

For steel frame construction - DuPont Tyvek Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations:

1-5/8" rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4" or 2" metal gasketed washer.

2.

For wood frame construction - Tyvek Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners.

3.

For masonry construction - masonry tap-con fasteners with Tyvek Wrap Caps as manufactured by DuPont

Building Innovations: 2 inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.

C.

Adhesives:

1.

Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

2.

Products: a.

Liquid Nails LN-109 b.

Polyglaze SM 5700 c.

Denso Butyl Liquid d.

3M High Strength 90 e.

SIA 665 f.

Adhesives recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer.

D.

Primers:

1.

Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing.

2.

Product: a.

3M High Strength 90 b.

Denso Butyl Spray c.

SIA 655 d.

Permagrip 105 e.

ITW TACC Sta' Put SPH f.

Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer.

E.

Flashing:

1.

DuPont FlexWrap, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations.

2.

DuPont Straightflash, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc.

3.

DuPont Straightflash VF, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: dual-sided straight flashing membrane materials for brick mold and non-flanged windows and doors.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A012

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

3.1

Examination

A.

Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.

3.2

Installation - Weather Barrier

A.

Install weather barrier per regional requirements in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors.

C.

Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap.

D.

Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level.

E.

Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

F.

Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings.

G.

Overlap weather barrier

1.1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches.

1.2. Seams: minimum 6 inches.

H.

Weather barrier Attachment:

1.1. For steel or wood frame construction - Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12-18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and

24 inch on center, maximum horizontally.

1.2. For masonry construction - Attach weather barrier to masonry. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, spaced 12-18 inches vertically on center and 24 inches maximum horizontally. Weather barrier may be temporarily attached to masonry using recommended adhesive, placed in vertical strips spaced

24 inches on center, when coordinated on the project site.

I.

Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont StraightFlash to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors.

3.3

Seaming

A.

Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

B.

Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

3.4

Opening Preparation (for use with non-flanged windows - all cladding types)

A.

Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening.

B.

Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing.

Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.5

Flashing (for use with non-flanged windows - all cladding types)

A.

Cut 9-inch wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer.

B.

Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge within side edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before a adhering up the jambs.

C.

Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press into place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.

D.

Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont

StraightFlash at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing.

E.

Install DuPont FlexWrap at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

F.

Coordinate flashing with window installation.

G.

On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head.

leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

H.

Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont StraightFlash over the

45-degree seams.

I.

Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

J.

On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

3.6

Protection

A.

Protect installed weather barrier from damage.

SECTION 07512 - ROOFING SYSTEM REPAIR

1.1

General: When penetration of the existing roofing system is required to accommodate new construction,

2.1

1.1

2.1

3.1

perform necessary roofing system repair.

A.

Coordination: Before starting work, verify with the Tenant's Construction Manager and the Owner the following:

1.

Existing roof system materials and installation methods.

2.

Repair work responsibilities and warranty requirements. To maintain original warranty, where provided use original roof contractor.

B.

Qualifications: Repair work shall be performed only by an experienced roofing installer approved or licensed by the existing roofing system materials manufacturer; with not less than five years of successful experience installing and repairing roofing systems similar to this projects existing roofing system.

Materials:

A.

Provide and install only materials approved and recommended by the roofing manufacturer for repairing the existing roofing system.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Preparation: Inspect roof surface conditions with roof manufacturer's representative to verify extent and location of any other repairs required to ensure a watertight roofing system upon completion of the repair work.

B.

Make necessary repairs. Match existing roof slope, insulation materials and roofing membrane materials, except as otherwise approved by the existing roofing system manufacturer to accommodate new construction and repair work.

C.

Install curb flashing furnished by mechanical and electrical trades for new roof top equipment.

General: Provide roof scuttle and safety post as shown & specified.

A.

Coordination: Before starting work, verify with the Tenant's Construction Manager and the Owner the following:

1.

Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof scuttle(s).

2.

Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width.

3.

Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation instructions.

4.

Coordinate installation with roof membrane and roof insulation manufacturer's instructions before starting.

Materials:

A.

Manufacturer: The Bilco Company, (203) 934-6363, internet www.bilco.com or approved equal.

1.

Roof Scuttle: Type S-50 metal roof scuttle, size 3'-0" width x 2'-6" length (length denotes hinge side). The roof scuttle shall be single leaf and come pre-assembled from the manufacturer. Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum.

2.

Safety Post: Model 4 ladder safety post. The ladder safety post shall come pre-assembled from the manufacturer. Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum.

Installation:

A.

Verify that roof scuttle & ladder safety post installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation.

Section 07900 – JOINT SEALERS

1.1

General: Provide joint sealers as shown and specified.

A.

Standards:Comply with ASTM C 920 requirements.

B.

Application: Performed by skilled, experienced joint sealer applicators.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Poly urethane sealants: Tremco Commercial Sealants (800) 321-7906, internet www.tremcosealants.com,

1.

“Dymonic FC” One component, fast skinning, Low Modulus Polyurethane.

2.

“Dymeric 240 FC” Multi Component, gun grade, chemically curing, tintable fast setting polyurethane sealant.

B.

Silicone Sealants:

1.

Silicone Sealants: General Electric Silicones, (800) 295-2392, internet www.gesilicones.com

a.

“SCS1700 Sanitary – Mold/Mildew Resistant Silicone”, one component 100% silicone, fungicidal based sealant.

b.

“SCS2700 Silpruf Silicone” one component medium modulus, natural cure silicone all purpose sealant.

c.

“Silglaze II SCS2800- Glazing Sealant” one component, 100% silicone based sealer.

d.

“GE Paintable Silicone” one component paintable silicone.

2.

Dow Corning Silicones (989)496-4000 www.dowcorning.com

a.

“Dow 795” – one component, medium modulus, natural cure silicone.

b.

"795 Silicone Building Sealant" neutral, one-part silicone

3.

NovaGuard Solutions (800)380-0138 www.novaguardsolutions.com

a.

"NovaFlex metal Roof Sealant" non-corrosive, single component, oxime cured sealant

C.

Firestopping Sealants: 3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 328-1687, internet www.3M.com/firstop

1.

“3M Fire Barrier CP 25WB+ Caulk” or approved equal

D.

Joint backing: Non-absorptive, non-staining compressible, non-gassing, polyethylene foam backer rod compatible with joint sealants.

3.1 Installation:

A.

Preparation: Clean and prepare joints prior to installing sealers:

1.

Wipe shipping oils from surfaces to be sealed. Remove protective films and/or install joint backer rod if joint is larger than ¼” in width.

B.

Installation: Install joint sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacture’s installation instructions.

1.

Apply sealants in a uniform, continuous bead without gaps or air pockets. Hand tool and finish all joints so that a smooth, lip free uniform line is created along the substrate being shot. Remove any excess materials from tooled edges and ends of joint.

2.

Install joint sealants to a depth no more than ½ the width of the joint.

3.

Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

4.

Immediately, after sealant application, and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

5.

Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.

4.1

Sealant Schedule:

A.

Kitchen Area:

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Ceiling grid to FRP wall panels

2.

Base of FRP wall panels to polycrete schlutter strip. (If quarry tile is used, shoot joint with clear SCS1700).

3.

Stainless hoods to FRP wall panels. Vertical and horizontal joints.

4.

Walk in cooler walls to FRP wall panels.

5.

Stainless closure pieces at cooler walls to FRP wall panels.

6.

FRP/stainless corner guards to FRP wall panels.

7.

All sinks (multi-compartment, hand, mop and prep) to FRP/tile walls.

8.

Paper towel dispensers & soap dispensers to FRP/tile walls.

9.

Ceiling tile pipe penetrations.

10.

Wall pipe penetrations and/or escutcheons perimeters. (water & gas lines).

11.

Mop sink stainless surround perimeter to walls.

12.

FRP closure panel, at top of cooler, to cooler walls.

13.

FRP wall panels to hollow metal door frames.

14.

Coke line bundle to PVC cap.

15.

FRP to aluminum plate at walk thru.

16.

Can light trim rings to ceiling

17.

Menu Board light bracket to ceiling

Provide a continuous bead of aluminum GE SCS2800 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Stainless closer pieces, at ends of cooler walls, to cooler walls.

2.

Diamond plate perimeter to cooler walls.

3.

Base of diamond plate to polycrete schlutter strip.

4.

Stainless closure panel, at top of cooler walls, to cooler walls.

5.

Stainless outside corners to cooler walls.

6.

Top of polycrete schlutter strip to cooler walls at inside of cooler.

7.

Cooler wall/diamond plate penetrations.

8.

Stainless wrap at hollow metal door frame.

B.

Managers Office:

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Ceiling grid to FRP wall panels.

2.

Perimeter of manager’s desk to FRP wall panels.

3.

Hollow metal door frame to FRP wall panels.

4.

Top and ends of coat hanger bracket to FRP walls.

5.

Base of FRP wall panels to polycrete schlutter strip.

6.

Ceiling tile wire/pipe penetrations.

Provide a continuous bead of black GE Silpruf 2700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Base of safe to floor.

C.

Cooking Area:

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Top of wall tile to sheetrock ceiling.

2.

Hood to tile walls & sheetrock ceiling.

3.

Hood gusset to wall tile on both sides.

4.

Ceiling diffusers perimeters to sheetrock ceiling.

5.

Sink to wall tile.

6.

Paper towel dispenser/soap dispenser to tile.

7.

Carving table to wall tile.

8.

Fax line counter to walls.

9.

Stainless shelf behind grill to wall tile.

10.

Tile wall penetrations/escutcheons perimeters.

-

-

-

Provide a continuous bead of aluminum GE Silglaze SCS2809 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Joint between hood and closure skirt.

2.

Joint between hood gusset and hood.

Provide a continuous bead of champagne NovaFlex silicone at the following location:

1.

All tile to aluminum plate end caps and soffits

2.

Inside tile corners.

Provide a continuous bead of color #10 dark gray GE Silpruf SCS2700 at the following location:

1.

Base of fax line table, carving station counter and service line to concrete curb on all sides.

D.

Bathrooms:

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Top of wall tile to sheetrock ceiling.

2.

Perimeter of toilets/urinals to floor or wall tile.

3.

Perimeter of mirror to wall tile.

4.

Sink to wall.

5.

Perimeter of hand dryer to wall.

6.

Toilet paper/napkin disposals units to tile walls.

7.

Stainless shelf to wall tile.

8.

Tile wall penetrations under sink and or escutcheons to perimeters.

-

Provide a continuous bead of Champagne NovaFlex silicone at the following locations:

1.

Interior corner joints at wall tile.

2.

Wall tile to hollow metal frames.

Provide a continuous bead of color #10 dark gray GE SCS 2700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Base of hollow metal door frames to floor.

E.

Dining area:

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Wall tile to sheetrock walls.

2.

Perimeter of aluminum storefront/windows/entrances to sheetrock walls.

3.

Wall tile at serving line wall to POS counter.

4.

Richlite wall panels to wall tile (if connection joint is not even/clean).

5.

Diffuser/louvers perimeters to sheetrock walls.

6.

Top of aluminum base to painted walls.

7.

Perimeter of perforated wood panel ledgers.

-

-

Provide a continuous bead of black GE SCS2700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Base of black rubber to floor.

2.

Richlite wall panels to sill of aluminum storefront/ windows.

3.

Vertical joints of Richlite wall panels to frames/painted walls/tile (if joint is uneven or plywood is showing).

Provide a continuous bead of aluminum GE SCS2800 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Base of aluminum base to floor.

2.

Vertical connection joints at aluminum base.

3.

Base of trash can surround to floor.

Provide a continuous bead of charcoal, anodized aluminum/window bronze* Dow 795 silicone at the following location:

1.

Base of exterior storefronts to concrete floor.

*Color to be used will be determined by the color of the frames that are installed.

F.

Utensil Counter:

Provide a continuous bead of aluminum GE SCS2800 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Stainless backsplash to plywood walls.

2.

Stainless countertop to backsplash. Horizontal & vertical joints.

3.

Base of Coke machine to countertop – 3 sides.

4.

Perimeter of tea drain tray to countertop.

Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1700 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Coke line bundle to PVC cap.

2.

Stainless backsplash to white wall tile.

G.

Fire Rated Walls:

Provide a continuous bead of 3M 25WB+ at wall/ceiling penetrations in rated walls.

H.

Exterior Joints:

Provide a continuous bead or urethane sealant and backer rod at the following locations:*

1.

EIFS joints to abutting services.

2.

Brick/stone control joints.

3.

Sidewalk/concrete expansion joints.

Provide a continuous bead of Dow 795 silicone at the following locations:

1.

Aluminum frame perimeters

2. Hollow metal door frames

*Colors to be matched to adjacent surfaces

I.

Weather Barrier Sealants:

1.

Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions.

2.

Products: a.

Tremco 830 b.

Tremco Butyl c.

Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer.

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.1

General: Tenant to provide steel doors and frames as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

ANSI A250.8-2009 "Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2.

ANSI A250.11-01 "Erection Instructions for Steel Frames."

3.

SDI 122-99 " Installation for Standard Steel doors and Frames.

B.

Manufacturer: A member of the Steel Door Institute (SDI).

2.1

Materials:

A.

Steel Doors:

1.

Interior: Heavy-duty Level 2, physical performance B, Model 2 seamless construction, ASTM A1008, 18 gage cold-rolled steel face sheets, manufacturer's standard core.

2.

Exterior: Extra heavy-duty Level 3, physical performance A, Model 2 seamless construction, ASTM A1008, 16 gage cold-rolled steel face sheets; tops and bottoms closed with flush galvanized steel caps, manufacturer's standard plastic foam insulating core.

B.

Steel Frames: ASTM A1008, 16 gage cold-rolled steel.

1.

Provide combination buck, jamb and trim type frames for 1-3/4" thick doors, unless otherwise indicated.

2.

Interior and exterior frames: Set-up welded type with mitered corners, reinforced, fully seam welded with exposed welds ground smooth.

C.

Door and frame fabrication:

1.

Provide cutouts for mortised hardware, accurately located and made to fit hardware. Provide closer reinforcement for all doors with surface mounted door closers.

2.

Punch frames and factory install rubber door silencers.

3.

Provide minimum three anchors of suitable design for each jamb.

4.

Provide floor clip on bottom of each jamb. Provide angle spreaders at bottom of each set-up frame.

D.

Shop painting: Clean and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units. Apply one baked-on shop coat of rust-inhibitive prime paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10, unless doors and frames are used at the restrooms or as indicated on door hardware and finish schedule. Provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11.

B.

Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fastened to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance as recommended in SDI 122.

1.1

General: Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts as shown and specified.

1.2

Related Documents:

A.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01

Specification Sections, apply to this section.

B.

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

1.

AAMA SFM-1-87 "Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual."

1.3

Summary:

A.

Section Includes:

1.

Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units.

a.

Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront include:

(1.) Trifab VG 451T Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set

2.

Kawneer Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and components a.

Types of Kawneer Aluminum Entrances include:

(1.) 500 Swing Door; Wide stile, 5" vertical face dimension, 1-3/4" depth, high traffic applications or as indicated on Drawings.

1.4

Performance Requirements:

A.

General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction;

1.

Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): Determine to meet local codes listed on A000 b.

Importance Factor: (1.00) c.

Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): Determine to meet local codes listed on A000

B.

Storefront System Performance Requirements:

1.

Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding inward and outward wind load design pressures meeting local codes listed on sheet A000.

2.

Air Infiltration: a.

Air Infiltration for storefront frame system: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft. sq. at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf.

b.

Air Infiltration for storefront entrances: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa) for single doors and 1.567 psf (75 PA) for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" entrance door and frame shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of

6'0" x 7'0" entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot.

3.

Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf as defined in AAMA 501.

4.

Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no defection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

5.

Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance

(U-factor) shall be not more than: a.

Glass to Exterior - 0.47 (low-e)

6.

Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a.

Glass to Exterior - 70 frame and 69 glass (low-e)

7.

Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested to AAMA

Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: a.

Glass to Exterior - 38 (STC) and 31 (OITC)

1.5

Submittals:

A.

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system and storefront entrance doors indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to work, operational clearances and installation details.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color section.

1.6

Quality Assurance

A.

Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of rest reports, and calculations.

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum framed storefront system and storefront entrance doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

D.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1.

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval.

If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.7

Project Conditions:

A.

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of a aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8

Warranty

A.

Manufactures Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty.

1.

Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer.

2.1

Manufacturers:

A.

Manufacturer: Kawneer Company Inc., Contact: Cheryl Wilkerson, Phone: 317-771-9263; email:[email protected]

B.

Basis-of-Design Product Storefront Framing:

1.

Trifab 451T (thermal) Storefront System

2.

2" x 4-1/2" System Dimensions

3.

Glass: Exterior (Front-Set)

B.

Basis-of-Design Product Storefront Entrances:

1.

The door stile and rail face dimensions of the 500-Wide Stile entrance door will be as follows or as indicated on Drawings: Door: 500; Vertical Stile: 5"; Top Rail: 5"; Bottom Rail: 10"

2.

Major portions of the door members to be 0.125" nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 0.05" thick.

3.

Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastometric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer.

4.

Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening.

2.2

Materials:

A.

Provide aluminum entrances and storefront matching the existing building aluminum entrances and storefronts, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Aluminum Frame Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

C.

Aluminum Storefront Entrance Extrusions:Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.

D.

Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window and door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.

E.

Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions, or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

F.

Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with

ASTM B 456 fro Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for

SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A013

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

G.

Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

H.

Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-section dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standard Data.

2.3

Storefront Framing System:

A.

Thermal Barrier (Trifab VG-451T):

1.

Kawneer IsoLock Thermal Break with a 1/4" separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections.

a.

Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.

B.

Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C.

Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bearing fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed shall be stainless steel.

D.

Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.

E.

Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

F.

Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

2.4 Glazing Systems:

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing.

B.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.

C.

Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E.

Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1.

Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated.

a.

Color: Black

2.

Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a.

Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5

Entrance Door Systems:

A.

Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08710 Door Hardware.

2.6

Accessory Materials:

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in section 07900 - Joint Sealers

2.7

Storefront Framing Fabrication:

A.

Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

3.

Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.

4.

Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

5.

Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

6.

Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.

7.

Provisions for field replacement of glazing.

8.

Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

B.

Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

C.

Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

D.

Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturers standard installation instructions.

E.

After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8

Storefront Entrance Door Fabrication:

A.

Fabricate aluminum-framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors.

B.

Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing.

1.

Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and

1-1/8" long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with

EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord.

2.

Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance.

3.

Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.

4.

Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

C.

Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details.

2.9

Aluminum Finishes:

A.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B.

Factory Finishing:

1.

Kawneer Permafluor (70% PVDF), AAMA 2605, Fluoropolymer Coating (Color: Charcoal or as noted on Drawings)

3.1

Examination:

A.

Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefront system installation.

1.

Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.

2.

Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening.

3.

Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

4.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

Installation:

A.

Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, aluminum swing storefront entrance doors, accessories, and other components.

B.

Install aluminum framed storefront system and storefront doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C.

Set sill members and door threshold in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.

D.

Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior. Refer to section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

E.

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

F.

Install aluminum storefront framing system glass and glazing, in accordance with section 08800 and the manufacturer's requirements.

3.3

Adjusting, Cleaning, and Protection:

A.

Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B.

Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C.

Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

1.1

General: Provide door hardware as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

ANSI A117.1-2009 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2.

ANSI/BHMA A156 Series Builders Hardware

B.

Quality Assurance:

1.

Codes and standards: Provide hardware complying with local Building Code requirements and the Tenant's standards for keying and security systems.

2.

Project scheduling: Performed by an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

3.

Package each item of hardware and each lockset, complete with all screws, anchors, installation instructions and templates. Identify package indexing with corresponding item number of the hardware schedule.

4.

After hardware schedule acceptance, provide necessary templates or physical hardware to required trades for cutting, reinforcing, or preparing their products to receive hardware. Furnish templates to metal door manufacturer's.

2.1

Materials:

A.

No substitutions allowed. Requirements for manufacturer, design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated on the drawings.

B.

Review the keying system with the Tenant and provide the type required.

3.1

Installation

A.

Install each hardware item in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

Securely fasten all attached parts. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. Verify operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding or sticking, without excessive clearance.

B.

Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as required for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

C.

Mount hardware units at heights indicated in DHI "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware", unless otherwise required to comply with requirements of governing codes and regulations. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADAGG guidelines for accessibility.

1.

Top Butts: 5 inches; top of butt from head of frame.

2.

Middle Butts: 3'-2", centerline from finish floor.

3.

Bottom Butts: 5 inches; finish floor to bottom of butt.

4.

Locks: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule.

5.

Knobs: 3'-2", centerline from finish floor.

6.

Pulls: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule.

7.

Pushes: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule.

1.1

General: Provide glass and glazing as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 (1-91)"Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials."

2.

GANA "Glazing Manual - 1990."

B.

Quality Assurance:

1.

Codes and standards: Provide type of glass and glazing products that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. Comply with all applicable codes, standards and regulations that control safety glazing materials and installation.

2.

System Performance: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and, where applicable, impact loading, without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of glazing sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work.

3.

Installation: Performed only by experienced glaziers.

C.

Warranty:

1.

Insulating glass: Five years from date of installation against defects that materially obstruct vision through the glass or affect thermal and physical integrity.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Glass:

1.

Float Glass (FG): 1/4" thick clear float glass.

2.

Tempered Glass (TG): 1/4" and 1/2" thick clear, tempered safety glass, free-of-tong marks.

3.

Insulating Glass (IGL): 1" thick clear, low-e tempered sealed glass; 1/4" thick interior and exterior glass lites with 1/2" aluminum desiccated dual sealed air space; with the following characteristics: a.

Low-emissivity coating on #2 surface.

b.

Visible Light Transmittance: 68% - 70% c.

Visible Light Reflectance - Outdoors: 9%-11% d.

Solar Energy Transmittance: 32%-34% i.

j.

e.

Solar Energy Reflactance-Outdoors: 30%-34% f.

U-Value - Winter Night: 0.29

g.

U-value - Summer days: 0.28

h.

Solar Heat gain Coefficient: 0.37-0.39

Shading Coefficient: 0.43-0.45

Manufacturers/Products: i. AGC/Comfort Ti-AC40 ii.

Sun Guard/SN-68 iii.

PPG/Solarban 60 iv.

Viracon/VE1-2M

4.

Spandrel Glass (SG) 1/4" thick, heat-strengthened "Vitrolux" with fused ceramic frit on #2 surface, by Interpane Glass

Co. (800) 334-1797. Color as indicated on the drawings.

A.

Glazing Materials:

1.

Glazing Sealants: Provide elastomeric glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated; compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, complying with ASTM C920.

2.

Glazing Tape: Provide preformed, non-staining and non-migrating elastomeric tape, as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, complying with ASTM C 1281.

3.

Glazing gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on aluminum stops and neoprene, vinyl or EPDM glazing gaskets.

4.

Provide setting blocks, spacers and edge blocks of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, and compatible with surfaces contacted in installation.

C.

Fabrication: Factory fabricate and size all glass.

3.1

Installation

A.

Preparation:

1.

Field verify measurements and conditions of installation.

2.

Examine all details. Provide proper fitting to details indicated.

3.

Glazing channel dimensions shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate glazing materials thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.

B.

Install glass and glazing in accordance with the GANA "Glazing Manual" and glass manufacturer's recommendations.

1.

Install insulating glass units to comply with recommendations by Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

(SIGMA).

C.

Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Provide spacers as required.

D.

Install glazing sealants, tapes and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set glass without springing and install securely to prevent rattling or breakage.

E.

Protect glass from breakage during remaining construction. Do not remove non-permanent labels until final acceptance.

D.

Finishing:

1.

Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing, handling, and application of materials. Apply treatment at joints both directions, at flanges of trim accessories, penetrations of gypsum board (electrical boxes, piping, and similar work), fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as indicated. Apply in manner that will result in each of these items being concealed when applied decoration has been completed.

2.

Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.

3.

Interior Exposed Gypsum Board Finish: Level 5 Finish.

a.

Locations: Typical for all walls and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated b.

Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds in four coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: c.

Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint or taping compound.

d.

Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type topping compound.

e.

Fill (Third) Coat: Setting-type topping compound.

f.

Finish (Fourth) Coat: Skim coat entire surface.

4.

Interior Concealed Gypsum Board: Level 3 Partial Finishing.

a.

Finish concealed gypsum board construction that requires finishing same as exposed gypsum board construction, except the third coat and sanding can be omitted.

E.

Cement Board: Install cement board as a 16" high base at all kitchen and kitchen cook line wall types.

DIVISION 9 -- FINISHES

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

1.1

2.1

3.1

General: Provide gypsum board systems as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

GA 214-90 "Levels of Gypsum Board Finish."

A.

2.

GA-216 "Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board."

3.

USG "SA923 Drywall/Steel Framed Systems."

Materials:

Manufacturer: United States Gypsum Co. (USG), (800) 874-4968, internet www.usg.com.

B.

Metal framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 645 for materials and sizes.

1.

Partition metal framing: a.

Studs: Galvanized steel, C-shaped, sizes indicated, 20 gage "ST20" b.

Runners: Match studs, type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs.

Installation

Provide flexible ceiling runners for full height metal stud framed partitions continuous from floor to underside of structural members or deck above.

C.

Ceiling and Soffit metal framing/suspension systems:

1.

Small areas: Metal stud framing of appropriate size and gage for spans indicated.

2.

Large areas: Furring channel "Grillage" or "Direct Suspension System" designed for concealed support of gypsum board ceilings, of proper type for use indicated.

3.

Furring members: 20 gage, galvanized steel screw type, hat-shaped furring.

D.

Gypsum board panels: USG "Sheetrock" complying with ASTM C1396, tapered edge face panels, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end joint conditions, 5/8" thick.

1.

General use panels: Sheetrock Regular panels.

2.

Fire rated panels: Sheetrock Firecode Core panels.

3.

Water-resistant: panels: Sheetrock HUMITEK panels.

E.

Cement board: USG DUROCK Cement Board, 5/8" thick x manufacturer's standard width, complying with ANSI A118.9, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

F.

Fasteners: USG Type "S" bugle head screws for metal framing, USG Type "W" bugle head screws for wood framing, manufacturer's recommended length for panel thickness indicated.

G.

Trim: Galvanized steel with knurled and perforated flanges. USG Dur-A-Bead corner bead, No. 200B casing bead metal trim, No. 093 Control Joint.

H.

Joint treatment: USG Joint Treatment System, utilizing "Sheetrock Brand Joint Tape", and "Sheetrock Brand Setting-

Type (DURABOND)" compound for tape bedding and topping.

I.

Adhesives: USG "Sheetrock Brand Setting-Type (DURABOND) 210 or 90" compound for tape bedding and topping.

J.

Acoustical sealant: USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant, water-base type, gunnable sealant for sealing sound-rated gypsum board systems.

K.

Sound attenuation insulation: USG Thermafiber unfaced 3-1/2" thick, mineral fiber insulating batts/blankets; standard lengths and widths required to coordinate with spaces insulated.

A.

Install metal wall and partition framing and ceiling suspension/ support systems in accordance with USG Bulletin

SA 923 and complying with ASTM C754.

1.

Ceiling suspension/ support systems: Metal furring system/direct suspension or steel stud framing system.

2.

Wall and partition framing: a.

Install steel studs per schedule or at spacing indicated with bottom and top runner tracks anchored to substrates. Provide flexible ceiling runner tracks at full height partitions.

b.

Terminate partition stud system 4" above ceilings, except where indicated to be extended to structural support or roof deck above. Brace tops of partition framing to structure or roof deck at maximum 4'-0" on center spacing.

c.

Frame openings more than 2'-0" wide with two 20 gage studs at each jamb.

d.

Coordinate the installation of supplementary blocking and nailers, provided under Section 06100 work, to support shelving, millwork, toilet accessories, and similar work that cannot be adequately supported by gypsum board alone.

B.

Application and Finishing: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and Gypsum Association

GA 216 "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board."

1.

Screw fasten all gypsum board panels.

2.

Metal Trim: Install metal corner beads at external corners of gypsum board work and metal trim wherever edge of gypsum board would be exposed. Use longest practical lengths.

3.

Control Joints: Locate and install control joints in accordance with USG Bulletin SA923 "Good Design Practice" recommendations.

C.

Acoustical Treatment:

1.

Where sound-attenuation insulation is indicated, seal gypsum board construction at perimeters, control joints, junction boxes, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions.

2.

Install sound attenuation insulation at scheduled partitions and ceilings. Install insulation in single layer of required thickness. Extend full thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tight around obstructions.

Fill all voids.

3.

At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between edges of gypsum board and fixtures, cabinets, ducts, and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of acoustical sealant.

4.

Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely close up openings and joints with a bead of acoustical treatment.

1.1

General: Provide quarry tile flooring and base as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

ANSI A137.1 "Ceramic Tile."

2.

TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturers:

1.

Quarry Tile: Emser Tile, (713) 462-2411, internet: www.emser.com

a. For ordering purposes, email all orders to [email protected]

2.

Waterproofing: a.

Setting and Grouting Materials: Custom Building Products. (800) 272-8786, internet www.custombuildingproducts.com

b.

Quarry Tile Base Membrane: Laticrete (800) 243-4788 x 219, internet www.laticrete.com

B.

Quarry Tile: Emser Tile 6" x 6" x 1/2" E-Quarry Tile with 6" cove base and appropriate trim; "Gray" color.

1.

Entire Kitchen Area: Provide non-abrasive finish quarry tile.

C.

Waterproofing for elevated floor slabs: Mapei Planicrete W, heavy-duty trowelable two component waterproof membrane and adhesive.

D.

Setting Adhesive: Custom Building Materials, Versabond, Color: gray

E.

Grout: Custom Building Materials, CEG Lite Epoxy Grout, Color: #165 Delorean Gray

F.

Quarry Tile Base Membrane: Laticrete 9235 waterproof membrane conforming to ANSI A118.10-1999.

3.1

Installation

A.

Preparation: Clean substrate surfaces, scheduled to receive quarry tile, thoroughly and remove all coatings that may impair bond.

1.

Center tile fields both directions in each floor area. Adjust layout to minimize tile cutting. Avoid tile less than one-half size. Locate cuts to be least conspicuous.

2.

Maintain units uniformly "in plane." Provide straight, uniform joint widths and grout lines.

B.

Elevated Floor Slabs: Install waterproofing membrane at elevated floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive quarry tile floor finish. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform minimum 30 mil thickness bonded securely to substrate.

1.

Extend waterproofing up vertical wall surfaces minimum 10" high.

2.

Extend membrane down into floor drain flanges to assure continuous waterproofing at drainage points.

C.

Wet Areas: Install waterproofing membrane at all quarry tile wall base. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform minimum 30 mil thickness bonded securely to substrate.

1.

Extend Laticrete 9235 waterproofing up all vertical wall surfaces receiving quarry tile base minimum 10" high.

Extend Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane 10" minimum horizontally from all vertical wall surfaces receiving quarry tile base.

D.

Installation: Install, grout and clean ceramic tile in accordance with referenced TCA installation details and

ANSI standard specifications for setting methods scheduled.

1.

Floors: Latex-portland cement mortar on concrete; TCA detail F113 and ANSI A108.5, grout ANSI A108.10.

Wet cure grout.

2.

Base: Latex-portland cement mortar on cement board.

SECTION 09340 - CERAMIC TILE

1.1

General: Provide ceramic wall tile as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

ANSI A137.1 "Ceramic Tile."

2.

TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturers:

1.

Ceramic Tile: Emser Tile, (713) 462-2411, internet: www.emser.com

2.

For ordering purposes, email all orders to [email protected]

B.

Ceramic Tile: Series - Emser Ceramic, Color- White, Type - Glazed with Lugs, Size - 2 x 8 (nominal size) 2 1/8" x 8 1/2"

(finished size), Model # - SJIWHITGL0208WAL, horizontal stack bond pattern

C.

Setting Adhesive: Thinset Mortar, Custom Building Products, Series - Prolite Grey Thinset, Model # - ZCUPROJGYTHN30

D.

Grout: Custom Building Products, Series - Fusion Pro Grout (New Taupe #185), Model # - ZCUFP18512T, 1/16" grout joints.

3.1

Installation

A.

Preparation: Clean substrate surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile thoroughly and remove all coatings that may impair bond.

1.

Protect surrounding work from damage.

2.

Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates.

3.

Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

4.

Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.

5.

Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

B.

Kitchen:

1. Lay tile in horizontal stack bond, starting pattern with a full tile at the ceiling plane.

2.

Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall horizontally and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used at the ends of the wall. Exception: when one end of the wall is a tile-to-gypsum board transition. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

3.

Use specified stainless steel corner guards at tile-to-tile and tile-to-FRP outside corners.

4.

Use corner bead of 100% silicone sealant, color to match grout, at inside corners where tile meets tile.

5.

Use corner bead of 100% silicone sealant, white, at inside corners where tile meets paint gyp. board, tile meets FRP or tile meets aluminum.

6.

Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, escess mortar, or excess grout.

7.

Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

8.

Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. Refer to section 07900 Joint Sealers.

9.

Clean tile and grout surfaces.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A014

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

C.

Restrooms: Install, grout and clean ceramic tile in accordance with referenced TCA installation details and

ANSI standard specifications for setting methods scheduled.

1.

Lay tile in horizontal stack bond, starting pattern with a full tile at the top of the base.

2.

Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall horizontally and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used at the ends of the wall. Exception: when one end of wall is an outside corner.

Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

3.

Use corner bead of 100% silicone sealant, color to match grout, at inside corners where tile meets tile.

4.

Use corner bead of 100% silicone sealant, white, at inside corners where tile meets paint gyp. board, tile meets FRP or tile meets aluminum.

5.

Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

6.

Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

7.

Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

Refer to section 07900 Joint Sealers.

8.

Clean tile and grout surfaces.

SECTION 09510 - SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS

1.1

General: Provide acoustical ceiling systems as shown and specified.

A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1. CISCA "Acoustical Ceilings - Use and Practice."

2. ASTM C635.

3. ASTM C636.

B.

Related Sections:

1.

09515 Cementitious Wood Fiber Acoustical Panels: Suspension system.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturer: USG Interiors, Inc., (800) 950-3839, internet www.usg.com

B.

Ceiling Panels: USG "Sheetrock Lay-In ClimaPlus No. 3270" ceiling panels with white, stipple texture, vinyl facing, 24" x 48" x 1/2".

C.

Suspension System: Provide intermediate duty, structural class, direct hung systems adequate to support light fixtures, ceiling diffusers and other normal accessories.

1.

Exposed "Tee" Grid System for use with Lay-In Ceiling panels: USG "Donn DX System" non-fire rated with

15/16" exposed face, cold-rolled galvanized steel with aluminum face cap, white paint finish on exposed surfaces. Provide hemmed edge aluminum wall angles, 15/16" exposed leg, white paint finish matching exposed grid.

2.

Concealed "Tee" Grid System for use with Painted Gypsum Board Ceilings & Soffits or with Cementitious

Wood Fiber Acoustical Panels (Tectum): USG "DGLW" Heavy Duty Drywall Suspension System with

1 5/8" deep by 1 1/2" wide main tees and 1 1/2" deep by 1 1/2" wide cross tees.

3.

Hanger Wire: No. 12 SWG galvanized steel wire.

3.1

Installation

A.

Install acoustical ceiling materials and suspension systems in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, complying with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work.

B.

Suspension system installation shall be laser leveled with a maximum surface leveling tolerance of 1/8" in

12'-0".

C.

Install exposed Tee suspension systems with main tees nominally 12 feet long spaced 48 inches O.C. and cross tees nominally 4 feet long spaced 24 inches O.C.

D.

Install concealed Tee suspension systems with main tees nominally 12 feet long spaced 24 inches O.C.

and cross tees nominally 2 feet long spaced 48 inches O.C.

E.

Hanger wire shall be spaced 48" O.C. along main tees, at all four corners of light fixtures (where applicable), at midpoint of cross tees adjacent to light fixtures and duct outlets, and adjacent to main tee splices.

F.

Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying either directly to building structure or to hangers that are secure and appropriate for substrate.

G.

Provide edge trim molding at perimeter of acoustical ceiling installation and intermediate vertical surfaces.

Use maximum lengths. Miter trim corners to Provide tight, accurate joints. Connect moldings securely to substrate surfaces.

SECTION 09515 - CEMENTITIOUS WOOD FIBER ACOUSTICAL PANELS

1.1

General: Provide Cementitious Wood Fiber Acoustical Panels as shown and specified.

A. Related Sections:

1. 09510 Suspended Lay-In Ceiling Systems: Tee grid suspension system.

2.

09900 Paints and Coatings: Acoustical Panel Paint Finish

2.1

Materials:

A. Acoustical Panels: Equal to Tectum, Cementitious wood fiber acoustical panels.

Tectum Inc. (888) 977-9691, internet: www.tectum.com

B. Panel Size: Nominally 1 inch thick, see plan for panel sizes.

C. Factory Finishes:

1.

Natural (no finish).

2.

Factory Painted Natural (where panels are indicated to be field painted).

3.

Factory Painted White.

D. Insulation: Fiberglas Sound Batts, 3 1/2 inches thick per plan.

E. Screws: Use pre-finished, natural-colored drywall screws or field paint screw heads when installing natural

(un-finished) acoustical panels.

F. Accessories: Natural touch-up paint by panel manufacturer.

G. Suspension System: Provide where indicated. Provide Armstrong 'Axiom' 6" classic trim (AX6STR) white, suspend with 12 ga. wire hangers hung at 48" O.C. max.

3.1

Installation

A.

Attach acoustical panels to substrates as follows:

1.

Wood Joists or Trusses: Attach acoustical panels directly to wood framing members, where indicated, with 2 1/4 inches minimum length drywall screws spaced at 12 inches O.C. maximum across width of panels in rows no more than 24" O.C. Install additional wood framing and/or blocking as necessary to ensure that framing members for panel attachment are spaced no more than 24 inches apart. Do not attach acoustical panels directly to wood roof sheathing to avoid roofing membrane puncture.

2.

Steel Roof Deck: Attach acoustical panels directly to steel roof deck bottom flute, where indicated, with

1 3/4 inch minimum length self-tapping drywall screws spaced at 12 inches O.C. maximum across width of panels in rows no more than 24" O.C. Install sheet metal straps directly to bottom of steel deck where necessary to form an attachment surface along panel edges.

3.

Ceiling Suspension System: Attach acoustical panels to lay-in ceiling suspension systems, where indicated, with 1 3/4 inch minimum length self-tapping drywall screws spaced at 12 inches O.C. maximum across width of panels in rows no more than 24" O.C.

B. Install panels as indicated per plan.

1.1

General: Provide wood flooring as shown and specified.

3.1

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

NOFMA "Hardwood Flooring Installation Manual."

2.

NOFMA "Hardwood Flooring Finishing/Refinishing Manual."

B.

Delivery, Storage and Handling: Place wood flooring materials in rooms or spaces to receive flooring a minimum of 48 hours before the start of installation. Open packages of sealed flooring to permit natural adjustment of moisture content. Maintain temperature range of 60º F to 70º F before, during and after installation of flooring.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Wood flooring: 3/4" x 2-1/4" kiln-dried, #2 Select Red Oak hardwood strip flooring, plain sawn, tongue and groove edges.

1.

Standard random lengths complying with NOFMA grading rules.

B.

Fasteners: Screw type flooring nails, fully barbed flooring brads or machine driven fasteners as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

C.

Underlayment: APA-CC-EXT plywood underlayment, minimum 3/4" thick.

Installation:

A.

Preparation: Before installing flooring, clean and inspect substrate surfaces.

1.

Clear away debris, scrape up cementitious deposits; remove sealers, dust, dirt, oil, grease and other substances detrimental to proper performance of wood flooring.

2.

Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and are ready to receive flooring.

a.

When moisture is present, install a single layer of polyethylene vapor barrier over concrete, all edges lapped 4". All joints sealed with tape.

3.

Install single layer of plywood underlayment. Space joints 1/4" on all sides.

4.

Vacuum underlayment surface clean immediately before flooring installation.

B.

Install wood strip flooring in accordance with NOFMA standards, instructions and recommendations for the applications indicated.

1.

Blind nail wood strip flooring into plywood underlayment. Space fasteners at 8" intervals, with minimum two fasteners per strip. Countersink all nail heads.

2.

Provide expansion space at all wall lines.

C.

Sanding: Allow installed wood strip flooring to acclimate to building conditions before sanding.

1.

Machine sand in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clean with power vacuum. Verify that entire surface of floor is level and smooth without ridges or cups.

D.

Finish: Finish installed wood flooring with two coats of clear urethane floor finish. Provide surface preparation, finish materials and application conforming to Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings requirements.

SECTION 09653 - RUBBER WALL BASE

1.1

General: Provide resilient rubber wall base as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

ASTM D 2240 Rubber - 85 Shore A

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturer:

1.

Johnsonite, Inc., (800) 899-8916, internet: www.johnsonite.com

B.

Resilient Rubber:

1.

.125" (3.17 mm) Thickness

2.

"Black" color

3.

Straight (toeless)

4.

Inside and outside corners with 4" returns.

C.

Setting Adhesive: Johnsonite 960 Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive

3.1

Installation:

A.

Preparation: Clean substrate surfaces scheduled to receive resilient rubber and vinyl wall base thoroughly and remove all coatings that may impair bond. A uniform temperature of at least 65 degrees Fahrenheit shall be maintained for

24 hours before, during and after the installation is completed. The wall base and adhesives shall be conditioned in the same manner. Coiled wall base shall be uncoiled and lay flat for at least 24 hours at 65 degrees Fahrenheit prior to installation. Floor and walls shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, all paints, wallpaper, and all other foreign material, which may affect proper adhesive bonding. Wall base may be installed on interior plaster, gypsum wall board, concrete, masonry, mineral-reinforced cement board or similar porous surfaces. Wall base shall not be installed on surfaces that will be exposed to drastic temperature changes or moisture.

B.

Application: Use a 1/8" square notch trowel to apply adhesive. Allow adhesive to set up and then apply wall base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

SECTION 09705 - RESINOUS FLOORING (KITCHEN AND RESTROOMS)

1.1

General: Provide labor and material for a 1/4 inch thick seamless cementitious urethane flooring system, including cove base, surface preparation and finish texture.

A.

Related Section:

1.

Concrete Division 3.

B.

Accepted manufacturer installers:

1.

Contact John Conway, Dur-A-Flex Inc. Director of Business Development, 860-528-9838 [email protected] for list of approved installation contractors for either new or renovation Chipotle projects.

2.

The installer shall have been approved by the flooring system manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the product specified. The specific contractor will be formally accredited as a "Tier One Strategic

Account - Restaurant Installer". A letter stating these credentials shall be provided by the installation contractor.

C.

Delivery, Storage and Handling:

1.

Deliver material to job in clean, clearly labeled containers and inspect prior to start of job.

2.

Store material in a dry enclosed area, out of direct sunlight protected by the elements. Keep temperature of storage area between 60 F and 85 F, in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations.

D.

Environmental Requirements:

1.

Refer to Technical Department for application of Poly-Crete MDB before 14 days of new concrete installation.

2.

Verify that substrate is properly equipped with vapor barrier and perimeter drains.

3.

Verify supply of adequate utilities including electric, water, heat, air conditioning (between 50 F and 85 F) and lighting of no less than 80 ft. candles measured at floor surface.

4.

Free area of other trades during and for a period of 24 hours after floor installation.

5.

Protect finished floor from damage by subsequent trades.

E.

Warranty:

1.

Submit a one year warranty against defects in material and workmanship upon substantial completion of installation.

2.1

Products

A.

Product Description

1.

Poly-Crete MDB multiple component, seamless trowel applied system with Poly-Crete CF dark grey topcoat as manufactured as supplied by Dur-A-Flex, Inc 800-253-3539.

2.

Cove Base: a.

For applications below 85 degrees slab temperature: Use Poly-Crete WR to form and design cove bases.

Poly-Crete WR will set up quickly if working temperature reaches top end of application limits.

b.

For applications above 85 degrees slab temperature: Switch from Poly-Crete WR to an epoxy cove system using Flintshot aggregate and Glaze 4 Cove-Res with Water-Clear Hardener. Surface of cove base to receive two topcoats of Poly-Crete CF dark grey as manufactured and supplied by Dur-A-Flex, Inc. 800-253-3539

(First Coat is considered as a grout coat, second coat will be applied in such a way to provide a smooth, easy to clean cove face).

VOC Content

PHYSICAL PROPERTY

Percent Reactive

Bond Strength to Concrete

Compressive Strength

Tensile Strength

Impact Resistance @ 125 mils

TEST METHOD

ASTM-D-4541

ASTM C-579

ASTM D-638

MIL D-3134

RESULT

100%

0 g/l

400 psi, substrate fails

7,400 psi

1,800 psi

>160 inch lbs with no visible damage or deterioation.

B.

Product Mixing:

1.

Mix on site with manufacturer supplied pre measure kits and approved mixing equipment to ensure a timely, accurate mix ratio and minimize waste.

3.1

Execution

A.

Preparation:

1.

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test ASTM F 1869-98. Application will proceed only when the vapor/ moisture emission rates from the slab is less than and not higher than 12 lbs/ 1,000 sf/ 24 hrs. Or perform relative humidity test using is situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 92% relative humidity level measurement.

2.

Create a surface profile having a minimum profile of CSP 4-6 as described by the international Concrete

Repair Institute with a steel shot blast machine, scarifier or dust-free diamond grinders.

3.

Verify that the surface is dry and perfectly clean, free of all dust, preparation debris, oil, grease, detergent film, sealer and/ or curing compounds.

B.

Installation:

1.

Application may proceed only while air, material and substrate temperatures are between 50 F and 85 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point.

2.

Wherever a free edge will occur, including doorways, wall perimeters, expansion joints, columns, drains and equipment pads, a 1/4 inch deep by 1/4 inch wide keyway shall be cut in.

3.

Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 1/4 inch wide are to be chiseled or chipped out and repaired per manufacturer's recommendations.

4.

Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete MD (up to 1/4 inch).

5.

Deep Fill and Sloping material (over 1/4 inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete WR.

6.

Prime lower wall area to accept cove base with Dur-A-Flex Glaze 4 Cove-Res mixed with Glaze 4 Water-Clear hardener. Extend Primer material to floor at least 2 inches out from the base of wall.

7.

Install a 4 or 5 inch high integral cove base at perimeter wall prior to installing the flooring system.

8.

Cove base to be created using Poly-Crete WR or Dur-A-Flex Cove Res mixed with Glaze 4 Water-Clear hardener and Dur-A-Flex flintshot aggregate (Epoxy cove bases should only be considered when slab temperature is above 85 degrees F).

9.

When cove base has cured, apply an initial grout coat of Poly-Crete CF. Allow grout coat to dry.

10.

Install flooring system with flintshot aggregate broadcast into the Poly-Crete MD at an approximate rate of

1/2 lb. per square foot. Aggregate should be broadcast to rejection.

11.

Allow floor to cure for at least 8 hours. Sweep and vacuum all loose flintshot aggregate.

12.

Using the edge of a steel trowel or a rub stone, remove any surface defects that may have been caused by broadcasting the flintshot aggregate in a lateral direction. Note: Flintshot should always be broadcast in an upwards motion to allow the sand to land softly on the surface of the wet Poly-CreteMD.

13.

Clean and Vacuum floor a second time prior to the application of the Poly-Crete CF top-coat.

14.

Seal the floor and coves with Poly-Crete CF at recommended spread rate.

15.

Surface of cove base and floor to cove transition points must remain smooth and provide a resulting easy to clean surface. Maintain an average 3/4 inch radius cove base transition. Provide careful attention to details to prevent top-coat puddles or surface irregularities that could snag a cleaning mop or collect dirt/ debris.

SECTION 09770 - SPECIAL WALL SURFACING - PHENOLIC INTERIOR WALL PANELS

1.1

General: Provide paper/phenolic composite wall panels and accessories for interior walls and millwork as shown and specified.

1.2

Related Sections:

A.

Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing

B.

Section 06210 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork

C.

Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

D.

Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems

1.3

Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following:

A.

ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

B.

ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness

C.

ASTM D 6272 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and

Electrical Insulating Materials by Four-Point Bending

D.

ASTM E 84 - Standard Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials

E.

ASTM E 831 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials by Thermomechanical

Analysis

1.4

Design/Performanance Requirements:

A.

Design and size of wall panel assemblies including wall panels, mounting system to support weight of panels.

B.

Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on expected movement of material as defined in fabrication guidelines.

1.5

Quality Assurance:

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a minimum of three years documented experience.

1.6

Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A.

Refer to Section 01400 Quality Requirements.

B.

Deliver products packaged to minimize damage during shipping. Include items such as wooden side boards, wooden lids, and spacers or protective sheeting between panels to protect the panels from surface and/or edge damage.

C.

Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store products in an enclosed area protected from direct sunlight, moisture and heat. maintain a consistent temperature and humidity. Do not store sheets, or fabricated panels vertically.

D.

When moving sheets, lift evenly to avoid dragging panels across each other and scratching the surface. Remove all labels and stickers immediately after installation.

1.7

Scheduling:

A.

Coordinate wall panel assemblies with flashing, trim, and other adjoining work to provide a complete installation.

B.

Ensure that products of this section are provided in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

1.8

Project Conditions:

A.

Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B.

Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before composite wall panel fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9

Warranty:

A.

20 Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Use.

2.1

Manufacturers:

A.

Manufacturer: Richlite Company, Contact: Sergei Hasegawa; New York Office, 66 North 11th Street; Brooklyn, NY 11249;

Tel: 718-715-0843; Mobile: 718-986-9265; Fax: 718-210-3595; Email:([email protected]); Web: www.richlite.com

2.2

Application:

A.

Apply Phenolic Composite Wall Panels at walls and other surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. Phenolic Composite all Panels are architectural wall panels applied over a sheathed stud wall or other solid blocking per Drawings.

2.3

Phenolic Wall Panels:

A.

Phenolic Composite Wall Panels: Richlite wall panel material:

1.

Solid wall panel material manufactured of thermosetting resins, homogeneously reinforced with wood-based fibers that are heated and compressed to become a solid sheet material.

2.

Color: Black Diamond

3.

Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, with shop-applied surface sealer.

4.

Thickness: a.

1/4" minimum b.

5/16"

5.

Physical Properties: a.

ASTM E 831-06 Coefficient of linear thermal expansion:

1) X Direction edge 11.7 &micro;m/(m degreesF)

2) Y Direction edge 6.46 &micro;m/(m degreesF)

3) Z Direction face 39.3 &mirco;m/(m degreesF) b.

ASTM D 2240 Hardness / Shore D:

1) Face 92 average.

2) Edge 91 average.

c.

ASTM D 638-08, Tensile Strength and Tensile Modulus:

1) X Direction Tensile Strength face (psi) 14,600

2) Y Direction Tensile Strength face (psi) 18,100

3) X Direction Tensile Modulus face (Msi) 1.15

4) Y Direction Tensile Modulus face (Msi) 1.68

d.

ASTM D 6272-02, Flexural Strength and Flexural Modulus:

1) X Direction Flexural Strength face (Ksi) 18.8

2) Y Direction Flexural Strength face (Ksi) 23.6

3) X Direction Flexural Modulus face (Msi) 1.16

4) Y Direction Flexural Modulus face (Msi) 1.68

6.

Fire Performance: a.

Flame Spread: Class A, ASTM E 84.

b.

Smoke Development: Less than 450, ASTM E 84.

2.4

Accessories:

A.

Panel Fasteners: #10 x 1-1/4" flat phillips head black oxide wood screws to be used with wood blocking and

#10 x 1-1/4" flat phillips head black oxide sheet metal screws to be used with sheet metal blocking as recommended by the manufacturer.

B.

Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of composite wall panels by means of factory-applied coating.

C.

Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete composite wall panel assembly including trim, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. match material and finish of composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated.

2.5

Fabrication:

A.

General: Fabricate and finish composite wall panels and accessories at the fabrication location to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements.

B.

Fabricate panels to comply with indicated panel layout, profiles and configurations; and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1.

Edge Treatment: Fabricate panels with eased sanded edges

2.

Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.

3.

Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

4.

Sand and prepare surfaces with 150 grit sandpaper and maroon scotchbrite per manufacturers fabrication guidelines.

5.

Drill through holes to have tolerance for expansion and contraction.

6.

Dimensional Tolerances: a.

Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.

b.

Squareness: 0.25 inch maximum.

C.

Finish:

1.

Apply manufacturer recommended finish of "Richlite Enhancer"

2.

Finish to be applied in the shop and not on site.

3.

Touch up for site work use "Richlite Enhancer"

3.1 Examination:

A.

Do no begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B.

Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, dry, and free from defects detrimental to installation of the panel systems.

C.

Examine wall framing to verify that panel support members and anchorage have been installed, with no deflection greater than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (L/240).

D.

Confirm interior sheathing is plumb and level, with no deflection greater than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (L/240).

E.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2

Preparation:

A.

Clean Surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B.

Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3

Installation:

A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B.

Install solid phenolic wall panels plumb and level and accurately spaced.

C.

Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

D.

Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving composite wall panels.

E.

Do not use construction adhesives to apply wall panels directly to substrates or wall board. Use mechanical fasteners only.

3.4

Erection Tolerances:

A.

Shim and align composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A015

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

3.5

Cleaning:

A.

On completion of composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer.

Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B.

Replace composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures.

3.6

Protection:

A.

Protect installed products until completion of project.

B.

Touch-up, repair and replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

1.1

General: Provide paints and coatings as shown and specified.

A.

Provide surface preparation, prime, intermediate and finish coatings for interior and exterior and existing scheduled surfaces and items.

B.

Provide Tenant-selected finishes and colors for all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

1.2

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.3

Summary:

A.

This section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1.

Exposed exterior items and surfaces.

2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.

3.

Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

1.4

Quality Assurance:

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C.

Provide lead free prime and finish coatings. All top coatings shall be mold and mildew resistant.

1.5

Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or tile of material.

2.

Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3.

Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4.

Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6.

Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8.

VOC content

B.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application.

1.6

Project Conditions

A.

Apply water-based paints only when the temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C) unless otherwise stated on the technical data bulletin.

B.

Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees C).

C.

Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

2.1

Manufacturers:

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules.

B.

Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturer is referred to in the paint schedule by use of shortened versions of the name, which is shown below:

1.

PPG Industries, Inc.

2.

Materials - No substitutions allowed.

2.2

Paint Materials, General

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B.

Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality "professional" paint material of the various coating types specified.

Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

Colors: Color guided selected by owner and will be strictly adhered too, unless otherwise noted.

C.

Exterior Coatings:

Exterior Ferrous Metals:

Preparation:

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

Remove all visible oil, grease, soil, rust and all other soluble contaminates from steel surface. Uniformly roughen surface with 150-grit paper. Remove all dust before solvent cleaning by the use of stiff bristle brush.

(1) coat PPG; 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils.

(2) coats PPG; 90-1210 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils.

Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure)

Exterior Patio Railing:

Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil, loose paint, rust and all other soluble contaminates from steel surface.

Remove all dust before solvent cleaning SSPC-SP1 by the use of stiff bristle brush. SSPC-SP3 may be required as a more aggressive preparation to remove loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter from the surface. Performance is better with more aggressive preparation.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

(1) coat PPG; 95-3300 Durathane DTM Urethane Mastic (250 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 to 5.0 mils.

(1) coat PPG; 95-3300 Durathane DTM Urethane Mastic (250 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 to 5.0 mils.

Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure) be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller.

Exterior Galvanized Metal:

Preparation: Before applying primer or other surface treatments, clean galvanized metal surface to SSPC-SP1 that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil, grease and soap film before priming use of Krud Kutter

Metal Clean & Etch may be required on bare or new galvanized. Surface must be clean, dry and free of contaminants, including salt deposits. Additional prep may be needed to SSPC-SP2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

Note: Some selected areas of bare concrete surfaces will require (1) coat of Perma Crete 4-503 Concrete

Primer before steel installation over all concrete surfaces.

Owner Option 1:

Prime:

Finish:

(1) coat PPG; 6-209 SpeedHide Galvanized Metal Primer (400 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 to 5.0 mils.

(2) coats PPG; 90-1210 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils.

Owner Option 2:

Prime:

Finish:

(1) coat PPG; 97-145 Pitt-Guard DTR Epoxy Mastic Primer (150 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 to 7.0 mils.

(2) coats PPG; 90-1210 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils.

Owner Option 3 (Low VOC):

Prime: (1) coat PPG; Amerlock 2 Fast Dry VOC Compliant Epoxy (84 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 to 6.0 mils.

Finish: (2) coats PPG; Amershield VOC Aliphatic Urethane (84 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 to 8.0 mils.

Application: Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure) be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller.

Existing Stucco/EIFS Surfaces (including wet areas):

Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil and all other foreign substances with cleaning solutions and/or scrapers.

Allow to dry and sand all areas that need smoothing and dust off.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

Exterior Wood:

(1) coat PPG; 4-603 Perma-Crete Alkali Resistant Primer (100 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 to 1.9 mils.

(2) coats PPG; 4-22 Perma-Crete Hi-Build Acrylic (100 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2 to 5.8 mils.

Airless spray with back roll using 3/4" nap roller.

Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil and all other foreign substances with cleaning solutions and or scrapers.

Allow to dry and sand all areas that need smoothing and dust off.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

D.

Interior Coatings:

(1) coat PPG; 17-921 Seal Grip Primer Sealer (100 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than

2.0 to 4.0 mils.

(2) coats PPG; 70-501 Manor Hall Exterior Semi-Gloss or PPG Acri-Shield Semi-Gloss PP649 (50 g/L VOC):

Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 to 3.0 mils.

Brush, Roll or Spray

Interior Metals: (Doors, door frames, where indicated)

Preparation: Remove all visible rust, oil, grease, soil and all other foreign substances with cleaning solutions and/or scrapers. Allow to dry and sand all areas that need smoothing and dust off.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

(1) coat PPG; 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. (Repaints only require spot prime on bare metal surfaces.)

(2) coats PPG; V-50-410 Breakthrough Satin Sheen Acrylic (250 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 to 2.0 mils.

Conventional spray, HVLP or Airless spray. Touch-ups shall be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller.

Interior Metals: (Metal Deck)

Preparation: Remove all visible rust, oil, grease, soil and all other foreign substances with cleaning solutions and allow to dry before priming.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

(1) coat PPG; 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. (Primer only required on unpainted decking or to spot prime bare areas in decking.)

(2) coats PPG; 90-1110 Pitt-Tech Plus Satin Acrylic (100 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils.

Conventional spray, HVLP or Airless spray. Touch-ups shall be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller.

Interior Gyp. Bd.:

Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil and all other foreign substances with cleaning solutions. Fill hairline cracks, holes and other defects with filler compatible with finish coats. Sand smooth all areas filled and/or areas to make a smooth overall finish.

Prime:

Finish:

Application:

(1) coat PPG; 9-900 Pure Performance Acrylic Primer (0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 to 2.0 mils. (Spot prime required only on repaint projects.)

(2) coats PPG; 90-300 Pure Performance Eggshell Acrylic Finish (0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 to 2.0 mils.

Conventional spray, HVLP or Airless spray. Touch-ups shall be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller.

Interior Wood Trim and Plywood - Clear Polyurethane Finish:

(Plywood finishes shall be shop applied in a controlled environment)

Shop Preparation: Scuff sand between coats.

Shop Finish:

Application:

(2) coat, ML Campbell Krystal conversion varnish, Clear Dull Sheen

Spray

Field Preparation: All cuts in field are to be sanded smooth. Scuff sand between coats.

Field Finish:

Application:

(2) coat, ML Campbell High Performance Pre-Cat Lacquer, Clear Dull Sheen

Wipe on with t-shirt rag.

E.

Color Guide

WHERE

Interior Doors, Door Frames, Rails and Rail

Frames, Where Specified

Interior Ferrous Metals, Where Specified

WHAT

PPG Breakthrough

250 Acrylic Satin

V50-410 Series

PPG Breakthrough

250 Acrylic Satin

V50-410 Series

Dining Room and Hallway Gyp. Bd.

PPG Pure Performance Zero

VOC Eggshell 9-310 series or PPG Wallhide Eggshell /

PPG Hi-Hide Eggshell

80-310 / PP389 Series

Dining Room and Hallway Gyp. Bd. Ceiling PPG Pure Performance Zero

VOC Flat 9-100 Series or PPG

Speedhide 6-4110XI Flat

Restroom and Serving Area Soffit Gyp. Bd.

PPG Pure Performance Zero

VOC Eggshell 9-310 series or PPG Wallhide Eggshell /

PPG Hi-Hide Eggshell

80-310 / PP389 Series

Interior Metal Roof Deck and Metal

Columns

Patio Railing

PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Satin

Acrylic Finish 90-110 Series

Durethane DTM Urethane

95-3300 Series

COLOR

PPG 541-5

"Victorian Pewter"

PPG 541-5

"Victorian Pewter"

PPG 549-1

"Moonlit Snow"

PPG 549-1

"Moonlit Snow"

PPG 549-1

"Moonlit Snow"

PPG 541-5

"Victorian Pewter"

PPG 518-6

'Knight's Armor"

SHEEN

Satin

Satin

Eggshell

Flat

Eggshell

Eggshell

Gloss

3.1

Installation:

A. Examination:

1. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate for application of coatings specified.

2. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry.

3.

Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer.

4.

Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions.

5.

Correct the above conditions and any other conditions which could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application.

B.

Preparation:

1.

Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.

2.

Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal with shellac or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer stains and marks that might bleed through paint finishes which cannot be completely removed.

3.

Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings.

4.

Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of disodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry.

5.

For specific substrate preparation, see individual specifications.

6.

Provide necessary staging, ladders, shield, protective coverings and drop cloths. Protect floors, walls and adjacent work and materials. Remove and properly replace temporary protection and coverings removed from any part of the work or finish. Repair damage at Contractor's expense.

C.

Application:

1.

General: Mix, prepare and apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a.

Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

b.

Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.

c.

Coating surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions.

d.

Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.

e. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

2.

Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a.

The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method.

b.

Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements as directed by Tenant. Paints and coatings work is subject to acceptance by the Tenant.

c.

Keep brushes and rollers clean, free from contamination and suitable for the finish required.

d.

Unless otherwise indicated, allow exterior paints to dry for 48 hours and interior paints to dry for

24 hours between coats.

e.

Sand lightly and remove dust between coats to achieve required finish.

f.

Finished surfaces shall be uniform in finish and color and free of brush marks, sagging, holidays, corduroy and other imperfections. Coverage and hide shall be complete.

g.

Edges of paint or finish adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean without overlapping.

Cut paint in neatly around glass or other edges.

h.

Paints and coatings work is subject to acceptance by the Tenant. Correct unsatisfactory work not complying with these specifications as directed by the Tenant.

D.

Cleaning:

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

E.

Protection:

1. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect / Tenant.

2. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

3.

After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

F.

Maintenance: Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Tenant.

1.

Provide one gallon of paint and wood stain of each type and color required for maintenance purposes.

Provide original, unopened, labeled containers with color samples and a list of project use.

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10522 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHES

1.1

General: Provide portable fire extinguishers as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following:

1.

NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Provide minimum 10 lb. capacity fire extinguishers in quantity and type complying with local code and fire regulations requirements.

1.

Provide new fire extinguishers fully loaded, tested, UL and FM labeled and listed and ready for use.

2.

Provide manufacturer's recommended mounting brackets and hardware.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Install fire extinguishers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, at heights and locations acceptable to the local fire regulations enforcement authority

DIVISION 11- NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12495 - WINDOW SHADES

1.1

General: Provide window shades as shown and specified.

A.

Standards: Shade fabric material shall meet the requirements of the following:

1.

NFPA 701 Flame Test and California US Title 19 for flame retardant materials.

B.

Field measure window openings and verify installation conditions prior to window shade fabrication

C.

Warranty:

1.

5 years against defects in materials and workmanship.

2.

1 year for service call repairs and adjustments.

2.1

Materials:

A.

Manufacturer: Insolroll Window Shading Systems, Inc. (800) 447-5534, internet www.insolroll.com

B.

Window Shades: Insolroll 2000 Solar Screen Shades, manual operation.

1.

Solar Screen Shade Fabric: Insolroll woven fiberglass yarn, 5% openness, Charcoal/Bronze color.

2.

Provide manufacturer's recommended mounting brackets and hardware.

C.

Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate window shade units to completely fill existing window openings from jamb to jamb and from head to 42" AFF or the nearest horizontal mullion from 40"-44" AFF.

1.

Adjustment system controlled by plastic bead chain on polyester cord. Multi-banded steel spring clutches keep shade in desired position.

2.

Roller tube 2" extruded aluminum, sized to minimize deflection.

3.

Fabric attached to roller tube using two-sided adhesive tape.

4.

Fabric bottom hem RF heat sealed pocket with enclosed hem bar.

3.1

Installation:

A.

Install window shades level and plumb in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and drawing details.

Provide units securely anchored in place with recommended hardware and accessories to provide smooth operation without binding.

DIVISIONS 13 - 14 - NOT APPLICABLE

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Architectural

Specifications

Checked:

EH, EW

A016

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

6

9

10

10

12

12

EXISTING SPRINKLER ROOM

EXISTING ROOF LADDER

9

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

1

A101

EXISTING ADA

PARKING SPACES

TWO (2) SPACES

MARKED FOR

FAX PARKING BY

TENANT G.C.

10

2,413 SQUARE FEET

LIMITS OF

CONSTRUCTION

EXISTING CURB, TYP.

EXISTING LIGHT POLE

EXISTING PARKING

STRIPING, TYP.

EXISTING 400 SF

CONCRETE PATIO

SLAB

EXISTING SIDEWALK

9

EXISTING

LANDSCAPING, TYP.

9 9

MIDDLETOWN-WARWICK ROAD

EXISTING

DUMPSTER

ENCLOSURE

1,000 GAL. EXCLUSIVE

GREASE INTERCEPTOR

BY TENANT G.C.

EXISTING

ADJACENT

TENANT'S DRIVE

THROUGH AISLE

9

GENERAL NOTES

ALL SITE WORK INCLUDING PAVING, CURBING, PARKING, PARKING LOT LIGHTING,

SIDEWALKS, LANDSCAPING, AND DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE ARE EXISTING UNLESS

NOTED OTHERWISE.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

EXISTING PUBLIC

SIDEWALK

EXISTING

MONUMENT SIGN

1

A100

ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

1/16" = 1'-0"

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Architectural Site Plan

A100

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

HORIZONTAL RAIL

7/16"Ø HOLE IN POST

1/2" THICK SPACERPLATE

X 1 1/2"Ø W/ 1/2"Ø HOLE

3/8 X 2 1/2 POSTS, TYP.

L-2 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 3/8"

X 2'-11" LONG

1/2"

3

A101

RAILING PLAN DETAIL

3" = 1'-0"

1/2" VARIES 1/2" VARIES

3/8 X 2 1/2 RAILS, TYP.

EASE EDGES OF

TOP RAIL, TYP.

3/8 X 2 1/2 POSTS, TYP.

PUNCH 7/16"Ø HOLD, TYP.

3/8"Ø THREADED STUD W/

STAIN. STL. ACORN HEAD NUT

AT EACH END W/ S.S. FLAT

WASHER ON ONE SIDE AND

LOCK-WASHER ON OTHER.

REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS

FOR PATIO RAILING COLOR

CORE DRILL 5" DIA. HOLE

IN CONCRETE TO RECEIVE

RAILING STANCHION. SET

RAILING STANCHION IN

CEMENTITIOUS GROUT

2

A101

RAILING MOUNTING DETAIL

1" = 1'-0"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

PATIO RAILING BY

TENANT RAILING

SUPPLIER; SEE DETAIL

2&3/A101

NO HOLES REQUIRED

IN END POSTS,

TYPICAL

1/2"

3' - 0"

1/2"

3' - 0"

12' - 2 1/2"

12' - 5 3/8"

1/2"

3' - 0"

1

A101

PATIO PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

1/2"

3' - 0"

1/2"

5' - 11 3/4"

1/2"

3' - 0"

1/2"

3' - 0"

1/2"

3' - 0"

12' - 2 1/2"

12' - 5 3/8"

1/2"

3' - 0"

1/2"

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Architectural Site Details

A101

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

TRENCH DRAIN REFER

TO PLUMBING PLANS

SLAB ON GRADE, TYP.

SAWCUT AT PERIMETER

SLOPE

REFER TO PLAN

(2) #3 BARS

CONTINUOUS, BOTTOM

4" MINIMUM

COMPACTED GRAVEL

1' - 2"

5

A110

TRENCH DRAIN DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

SLOPE

REFER TO PLAN

4" HIGH CONCRETE

CURB WITH 4x4

W1.4/1.4 W.W.F.

FINISH CORNER

WITH CHAMFER OR

ROUNDED EDGE

REFER TO CURB PLAN

ROUGHEN EXISTING

SLAB ON GRADE OR

USE SIKA DUR 32 LPL

EPOXY BONDING

AGENT BELOW CURB

4

A110

CONCRETE CURB DETAIL

3/4" = 1'-0"

30' - 0 1/8"

LEASE DIMENSION

7' - 7 3/8"

V.I.F.

3' - 10"

V.I.F.

17' - 4 5/8"

V.I.F.

NOTE:

G.C. SHALL TAKE DIGITAL PHOTOS OF THE INTERIOR

PERIMETER OF THE DEMISED SPACE IMMEDIATELY

AFTER DEMOLITION, PRIOR TO THE START OF

CONSTRUCTION AND SEND TO THE ARCHITECT FOR

REVIEW. ANY STRUCTURE, PIPING, CONDUIT ETC. THAT

MAY IMPACT CONSTRUCTION OF THE SPACE OR BE

UNSIGHTLY IF EXPOSED IS OF PARTICULAR INTEREST.

EXISTING STEEL COLUMN TYP. OF FIVE (5)

NOTE:

G.C. SHALL IMMEDIATELY FIELD MEASURE TENANT

SPACE @ THE START OF CONSTRUCTION TO

CONFIRM OVERALL DIMENSIONS MATCH THIS PLAN

- NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF DIFFERENT.

28' - 10 5/8"

V.I.F.

8"

V.I.F.

11" V.I.F.

6' - 8"

V.I.F.

2' - 1" V.I.F.

2' - 5"

V.I.F.

14' - 5"

V.I.F.

3' - 0"

V.I.F.

3

A110

DEMISED PREMISES PLAN

1/8" = 1'-0"

4 1/2"

2' - 3 3/8"

5 3/8"

2' - 3 3/8"

2' - 6"

1' - 0 7/8"

1' - 5 1/8"

5' - 0"

TRENCH DRAIN TO BE RECESSED IN MIN.

8" THICK CONCRETE SLAB WITH 4" MIN.

CONCRETE BED BELOW DRAIN, REFER TO

5/A110 AND MANUFACTURERS

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

3' - 0"

AREA FOR 4" SLAB ON TOP OF EXISTING

SLAB FOR WATER HEATER PLATFORM,

SEE A115 FOR WATER HEATER DETAILS

SLOPE FLOOR IN THIS AREA

ONLY TO DRAIN 1/40 MIN.

17' - 4 1/2"

LOCATION OF

MOP SINK

12' - 1 1/8"

6" PVC PIPE

FOR SYRUP LINE

4' - 1 3/4"

HIGH CAPACITY

FLOOR DRAIN, REFER

TO PLUMBING

DRAWINGS

12' - 8 1/4"

13' - 3 1/2"

7' - 1 1/8"

COORDINATE FLOOR SINK ELEVATION

WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION

8" x 8" x 4" HIGH

CONCRETE CURB FOR

POWER STUB, TYP. OF

TWO (2). REFER TO

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

6' - 0 1/4"

4

A110

4" CONCRETE CURB,

COORDINATE EXACT

LOCATION WITH FINAL

EQUIPMENT LOCATION

8' - 10 1/2"

6' - 2 3/4"

4' - 10 3/4"

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

5' - 8"

6' - 11"

5' - 3 3/4"

5" X 5" POWER STUB LOCATION,

COORDINATE WITH E110

18' - 7"

9' - 8"

6' - 1 1/4"

PROVIDE POWER STUB TO BANQUETTE.

PULL FROM UNDERGROUND TO AVOID

TRENCHING NEW SLAB. SEE ELEC

DRAWINGS

LANDLORD TO PROVIDE POROUS FILL,

CHIPOTLE G.C. TO PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER

AND 4" CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE. REFER TO

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS.

6" PVC PIPE FOR SYRUP LINES

FLOOR SINK LOCATION TYP.

COORDINATE WITH FLOOR

PLAN & PLUMBING PLAN TYP.

1' - 0"

FLOOR DRAIN

LOCATION TYP.

COORDINATE WITH

FLOOR PLAN &

PLUMBING PLAN TYP.

POWER STUB LOCATION

COORDINATE WITH E110

5' - 6 5/8"

6' - 0"

AREA FOR RECESSED WALK OFF

MAT. INSTALL PER

MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS;

REFER TO 12/A125 FOR DETAILS

EXISTING SIDEWALK AND PATIO SLAB

2

A110

SLAB WORK PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

GENERAL NOTES

1.

VERIFY OVERALL INTERIOR DIMENSIONS, INTERIOR COLUMN PLACEMENTS, AND EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS IN FIELD AND

NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION.

2.

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE INSIDE FACE OF EXISTING STUD WALLS.

3.

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE CENTERLINE OF FIXTURE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

4.

GC TO REVIEW ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR LIGHTING OR POWER STUB LOCATIONS PRIOR TO POURING SLAB.

5.

REFER TO "03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE" IN SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE PATCHING OR INSTALLATION INFORMATION.

6.

VERIFY PERIMETER FOUNDATION INSULATION IS EXISTING IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO

COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

4" CONCRETE CURB, COORDINATE

EXACT LOCATION WITH FINAL

EQUIPMRENT LOCATION

3' - 6 5/8"

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

4"

4"

8' - 0 1/8"

8" x 8" x 3" HIGH

CONCRETE CURB

FOR POWER

STUB, TYP. OF

TWO (2). REFER

TO ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS

4" CONCRETE CURB, COORDINATE

EXACT LOCATION WITH FINAL

EQUIPMENT LOCATION

13' - 9"

4" 4"

1' - 4" 3' - 3 3/8"

2' - 6 1/4" 4' - 10 3/4"

1

A110

CURB PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

5" X 5" POWER STUB LOCATION,

COORDINATE WITH 1/A110 AND E110

18' - 4 3/8"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Slab Work Plan

A110

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

4 1/4"

3 5/8"

19' - 2 3/8"

3 5/8"

8' - 8 7/8"

3 5/8"

10 3/4"

3 5/8"

2' - 2 1/8"

12' - 2 7/8"

3 5/8"

3' - 2 5/8"

20' - 5 1/4"

3 5/8"

2' - 2 1/8" 3' - 4 1/8"

10' - 3 1/8"

3 5/8"

NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS FROM EXTERIOR

AND DEMISING WALLS TAKE FROM

EXISTING FINISHED FACE OF WALL

10 1/2"

6"

3 5/8"

8 1/8"

3 5/8"

3 5/8"

2' - 9 3/8"

8 1/8"

3 5/8"

3 5/8"

3 5/8"

6' - 5 1/8"

10' - 3 1/8"

3 5/8"

3' - 10"

2

A115

ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

3

W1a

10

W1ax

KITCHEN

108

8

A220

9

11

W1

A200

3

W1ax

4

W1

OFFICE

109

W1

W1ax

W1a

12

A220

13

4" CONCRETE CURB

REFER TO 1/A115

W1ax

W1ax

W1

6

A220

7

W7

COOKING

107

W1ax

COOLER

110

W1a

3

A220

4

6" METAL STUDS, BATT

INSULATION AND 2 LAYERS

TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. BY

LANDLORD

W1a W7

2

W3a W7

W3a

14

A220

POS

104

5

4" CONCRETE CURB, REFER TO 1/A110

A220

1

SERVING

106

W3a

OFFICE WALLS

TO EXTEND

TO BOTTOM

OF DECK

PROVIDE SHEET OF

24 GAUGE

GALVANIZED METAL

BEHIND SHEATHING,

EXTEND 18" BEYOND

EDGE OF HOOD IN

ALL DIRECTIONS

PROVIDE BLOCKING IN

WALL FOR ARTWORK

15

A125

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

DOOR FRAME TO BE

FLUSH WITH AC PLYWOOD

FOR LAVATORY

ELEVATION, DIMENSION

AND ADA INFORMATION,

SEE SHEET A230

W3a

W19x

W3

W4a

1

A210

2

W4a

W21a

W2

W3a

MEN

111

16

A125

W2

W2

3

A210

4

6

W4a

W4a

9

W4a

W4ax

PASSAGE

103

5

W4a

W4

W4a

A210

10

W4a

W4a

W4a

W4a

UTENSIL COUNTER BY

MILLWORK SUPPLIER

W21a

W2

1

A300

W2

WOMEN

112

UTENSIL

102

W4a

W3a

W3a

W4a

W4a

DINING

101

PROVIDE BLOCKING IN

WALL FOR ARTWORK

W19x

W17ax W17ax

W17ax

1A

PATIO

113

1

A115

ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

MAIN ENTRY

100

8

A210

7

1

A200

ORDERING

105

W3a

W17ax

6

A210

5

W17ax

W17ax

W17ax

W17ax

1B

1

A200

GENERAL NOTES

1.

NEW CONSTRUCTION

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

NEW CONSTRUCTION WITH

SOUND BATT INSULATION

WALK-IN COOLER

2.

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FRAMING, OR CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3.

DASHED CIRCLE IN RESTROOM INDICATES 5'-0" TURNING DIAMETER

REQUIRED BY ADA.

4.

REFER TO WALL FINISH SCHEDULE ON A120.

5.

STUD SIZES AS INDICATED ON PLAN.

6.

INTERIOR DOORS ARE 4" OFF OF PERPENDICULAR WALL UNLESS ADJACENT

TO AC PLYWOOD FINISH, THEN FRAME SHOULD BE HELD 1/2" OFF

ADJACENT WALL.

7.

IN SITUATIONS WHERE TENANT'S G.C. IS TO PROVIDE TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. FOR A

RATED ASSEMBLY, THE TYPE 'X' GYP. BD. IS REQUIRED TO GO BENEATH THE

SHEATHING AND FINISHES.

8.

SEE SHEET A125 FOR ADDITIONAL SHEATHING BEHIND CERTAIN WALL

FINISHES.

9.

SEE A117 FOR DOOR TYPES.

10. TENANT'S G.C. TO FRAME ENTIRE BOX TO HOLD DIMENSIONS NOTED ON

THIS PLAN. ANY VARIATION DUE TO FIELD CONDITIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT

TO CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL'S CM AND ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY TO ASSURE

ACCURATE DIMENSIONS FOR PREPARATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS. FAILURE TO

ADHERE TO THESE REQUIREMENTS RESULTING IN ANY REMEDIATION

REQUIRED TO MEET DESIGN INTENT WILL BE AT CONTRACTOR'S COST.

11. SEE A116 FOR WALL TYPES.

12. PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACKS AT WALLS WHICH GO TO THE UNDERSIDE

OF THE DECKING.

13. PROVIDE FULL HEIGHT BLOCKING IN WALL FOR ALL SHELVING, TYP.

14. DESIGNATES TWO (2) HOUR RATED ASSEMBLY RUN

TIGHT TO DECK, REFER TO UL U#419 ON A116 FOR DETAILS.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Architectural Floor Plan

A115

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

METAL ROOF DECK

STEEL CHANNEL DEFLECTION

TRACK FASTENED TO STEEL

DECK

STEEL TOP TRACK (ONE

GAUGE HIGHER THAN METAL

STUDS)

METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

(SEE METAL STUD SCHEDULE

FOR SIZE AND GAUGE)

2

A116

DEFLECTION TRACK DETAIL @ PARTITION

6" = 1'-0"

METAL ROOF DECK

TYPICAL TEK SCREWS

LINE OF LOWER DECK FLUTE

PERPENDICULAR TO ROOF DECK SPAN

CONT. 16 GA. METAL TRACK

FASTENED TO METAL DECK

ABOVE WITH TWO #1016- TEK AT

EACH STUD FASTENING POINT.

FASTEN INTO LOWER FLUTE ONLY

METAL STUDS AT 24" O.C.

HUNG FROM METAL TRACK

ABOVE WITH #10-16 TEK

SCREWS BOTH SIDES.

TYPICAL TEK SCREWS

METAL ROOF DECK

LINE OF LOWER DECK FLUTE

CONT. 16 GA. METAL TRACK

FASTENED TO METAL DECK

ABOVE WITH TWO #10-16

TEK AT EACH END STUD

FASTENING POINT. FASTEN

INTO LOWER FLUTE ONLY.

METAL STUDS AT 24" O.C.

HUNG FROM METAL TRACK

ABOVE WITH #10-16 TEK

SCREWS BOTH SIDES.

4

A116

SOFFIT HANGING DETAIL

3" = 1'-0"

(2) NESTED 16 GA. METAL

TRACKS FASTENED

TOGETHER WITH (2) #10-16

TEK SCREWS BOTH SIDES

AND FASTENED TO ROOF

DECK WITH (4) #10-16 TEK

SCREWS AT LOWER DECK

FLUTE ONLY, SET @ 36"O.C.

MAX.

1/2

"

LATERAL BRACING,

CR 1-1/2" X 16 GA.,

GALVANIZED

3/4

"

3/4

"

3/4"

3/4"

FRAMING SCREWS (TYP. OF 4)

2" X 2", 16 GA. CLIP ANGLE

1/4" LESS THAN STUD WIDTH

GALVANIZED METAL STUD

3

A116

FIRST LEVEL START AT 4'-0"

ABOVE FLOOR

LATERAL BRACING DETAIL @ PARTITION

NOT TO SCALE

WALL TYPES

1. G.C. SHALL PROVIDE SOLID BLKG. IN WALLS AS NEEDED

2. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLAN FOR ALL STUD SIZES

3. REFER TO A120 FOR ALL WALL FINISHES

CLG.

SEE RCP

CLG.

SEE RCP

20 GA. MTL. STUD ANGLE BRACING

@ 48" O.C. - EXTEND TO DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON RCP,

OR AT OFFICE WALLS, EXTEND STUDS

AND SHEATHING TO DECK ON EXPOSED

SIDE(S) OF WALL

5/8" PLYWOOD EACH SIDE

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER

BD. EACH SIDE TO 1'-4" AFF

FLOOR

W1

INTERIOR PARTITION

5/8" PLYWOOD

EXISTING WALL

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS

BACKER BD. TO 1'-4" AFF

FLOOR

W1ax

INTERIOR PARTITION

CLG.

SEE RCP

20 GA. MTL. STUD ANGLE BRACING

@ 48" O.C. - EXTEND TO DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON RCP

EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING TO

DECK ON EXPOSED SIDE(S) OF WALL

PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION

BATT INSUL. WHERE REQ'D, SEE

FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BD.

EACH SIDE TO FULL HEIGHT OF TILE

FLOOR

W3

INTERIOR PARTITION

GENERAL NOTES

REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE AND CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISHES KEY PLAN ON SHEET A120 FOR WALL

FINISHES, REFER TO FLOOR PLAN ON A115 FOR METAL STUD SIZE.

CLG.

SEE RCP

20 GA. MTL. STUD ANGLE BRACING

@ 48" O.C. - EXTEND TO DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON

RCP, OR AT OFFICE WALLS, EXTEND

STUDS AND SHEATHING TO DECK ON

EXPOSED SIDE(S) OF WALL

5/8" PLYWOOD

STUD SCHEDULE & NOTES

W/ HUNG SHELVING SIZE/TYPE

362S125-18

362S137-33

600S137-33

600S162-43

W/O HUNG SHELVING

UP TO 12'-0"

UP TO 16'-0"

UP TO 22'-0"

UP TO 26'-0"

UP TO 12'-0"

UP TO 16'-0"

UP TO 22'-0"

1.

2.

3.

4.

ALL HEIGHTS REFER TO UN-BRACED HEIGHTS.

ALL HEIGHTS BASED ON 16" O.C. SPACING.

BOTTOM TRACK TO BE SAME GAUGE AS STUD.

TOP TRACK TO BE ONE GAUGE HIGHER.

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER

BD. EACH SIDE TO 1'-4" AFF

FLOOR

W1a

INTERIOR PARTITION

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON RCP

EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING TO

DECK ON EXPOSED SIDE(S) OF WALL

RESTROOM

OR KITCHEN

SIDE

5/8" PLYWOOD

PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION

BATT INSUL. WHERE REQ'D, SEE

FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BD.

TO FULL HEIGHT OF TILE

W2

INTERIOR PARTITION

20 GA. MTL. STUD ANGLE BRACING

@ 48" O.C. - EXTEND TO DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON RCP

EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING TO

DECK ON EXPOSED SIDE(S) OF WALL

RESTROOM

OR KITCHEN

SIDE

PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION

BATT INSUL. WHERE REQ'D, SEE

FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BD.

TO FULL HEIGHT OF TILE

W3a

INTERIOR PARTITION

PARTITION NOTES

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

ALL METAL STUDS TO CONFORM TO LOCAL BUILDING CODES.

ALL STUD WALLS AND PARTITIONS REQUIRE GYP. BOARD ON BOTH SIDES FOR THE FULL

HEIGHT OF THE STUDS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILED OTHERWISE.

ALL SUSPENDED WALLS SHALL HAVE GYP. BOARD WHICH EXTENDS 4" ABOVE THE SUSPENDED

CEILING UNLESS SHOWN AND/OR NOTED OTHERWISE BY THE ARCHITECT.

FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD MAY SUBSTITUTE FOR GYP. BOARD WHERE SO DIRECTED BY THE

ARCHITECT.

ALL STUD WALLS AND PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS LINES OF BRIDGING SPACED AT

4'-0" MAXIMUM ON CENTER. THE BRIDGING SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED TO THE STUDS

WITH EITHER SCREWS OR WELDS. REFER TO DETAILS THIS SHEET.

ALL STUDS SHALL BE "CEE" STUDS WITH FLANGE STIFFENERS.

THE MATERIALS AND DETAILS SHOWN ARE FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS. WHERE THE STUD

MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS OR LOCAL ORDINANCES ARE MORE RESTRICTIVE,

THEY SHALL APPLY.

TYPICAL FASTENER:

A.

STEEL STUDS TO STEEL STUDS OR TRACKS:

• 20 GAUGE - #8 - 18 X 1/2" TEKS WITH PHILIPS PAN HEAD - MIN. 2 PER CONNECTION

• 18/16 GAUGE - #10 - 16 X 3/4" TEKS WITH PHILIPS PAN HEAD - MIN. 3 PER CONNECTION

B.

STEEL STUDS OR TRACKS TO WOOD PURLINS, GIRDERS AND BEAMS:

• #14 - 10 X 1-1/2" H.W.H. TYPE "S" METAL-TO-WOOD TEKS AT 12" O.C., 2" FROM EACH END

C.

STEEL STUDS OR TRACKS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL (TUBE/WIDE FLANGE COL'S, BM'S, GIRDER'S, ETC.

• 0.145" DIA. HILTI X-EDNI FASTENERS, 5/8" MIN, LENGTH AND MIN. OF 2 PER

CONNECTION, OR 2 ROWS AT 16" O.C. FOR CONTINUOUS APPLICATIONS SUCH AS

TRACKS, U.O.N.

D.

PLYWOOD TO STEEL STUDS:

• #10 - 24 X 1-1/4" TEKS/3 (PLYMETALTEKS) WITH THIN WAFER HEAD - 24" O.C. FILED,

12" O.C. PERIMETER

E.

GYPSUM BOARD TO STEEL STUDS:

• #7 X 1-1/4" HI-LOW TYPE "S" BUGLE HEAD SCREWS FOR 3/8" TO 5/8" GYPSUM

BOARD TO 25 GAUGE OR 20 GAUGE STUDS

• #6 X 1-1/4" TYPE S-12 BUGLE HEAD SCREWS FOR 3/8" TO 5/8" TO 18 GAUGE OR 16

GAUGE STUDS OR TRACKS

• FIELD - 12" O.C. CEILINGS, 24" O.C. WALLS

• BUTT JOINTS 12" O.C.

F.

STEEL STUDS OR TRACKS TO CONCRETE:

• 0.145" DIA. HILTI X-DNI FASTENER, 1" MIN. LENGTH, 2 ROWS AT 16" O.C.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

CLG.

SEE RCP

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON

RCP EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING

TO 1/2" BELOW TOP OF BOX, REFER

TO A210 FOR BOX HEIGHT

5/8" PLYWOOD BOTH SIDES

CLG.

SEE RCP

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON

RCP EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING

TO 1/2" BELOW TOP OF BOX, REFER

TO A210 FOR BOX HEIGHT

5/8" PLYWOOD

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

W3ax

CLG.

SEE RCP

NOT USED

EXISTING WALL

FLOOR

W4ax

INTERIOR PARTITION

CLG.

B.O. DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON

RCP EXTEND STUDS AND SHEATHING

TO 1/2" BELOW TOP OF BOX, REFER

TO A210 FOR BOX HEIGHT

5/8" PLYWOOD

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

FLOOR

INTERIOR PARTITION

W4

RESTROOM

OR KITCHEN

W/ TILE SIDE

20 GA. MTL. STUD ANGLE BRACING

@ 48" O.C. - EXTEND TO DECK

WHERE NO CLG. IS INDICATED ON RCP

OR AT OFFICE WALLS EXTEND STUDS

AND SHEATHING TO DECK ON EXPOSED

SIDE(S) OF WALL

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER

BD. TO FULL HEIGHT OF TILE

5/8" PLYWOOD

B.O.H. KITCHEN SIDE

PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION

BATT INSUL. WHERE REQ'D, SEE

FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATIONS

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS

BACKER BD. TO 1'-4" AFF

INTERIOR PARTITION

W7

20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C.

FLOOR

W4a

INTERIOR PARTITION

CLG.

SEE RCP

EXISTING GYP. BD.

EXISTING WALL

FLOOR

W17ax

INTERIOR PARTITION

FLOOR

W19x

INTERIOR PARTITION

2-LAYERS EXISTING

GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES

EXISTING WALL

CLG.

SEE RCP

3/4" HAT CHANNEL

FLOOR

INTERIOR PARTITION

W21a

EXISTING DEMISING WALL

2 LAYERS EXISTING GYP.

BD. BOTH SIDES

5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER

TO FULL HEIGHT OF TILE

W22

NOT USED

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Architectural Wall Types

A116

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

DOOR HARDWARE

ALL HARDWARE SHALL MATCH STOREFRONT, VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT AND/OR CHIPOTLE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ORDERING.

1A

MAIN ENTRY - PAIR

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

(2) CONTINUOUS HINGE

(1) MORTISE CYLINDER

(1) TEMP CORE

(2) CUSTOM WOOD PULLS

(2) CUSTOM WOOD PUSH

(1) DEADBOLT

(1) EXIT INDICATOR

(1) HEADER BOLT

(1) THRESHOLD BOLT

(2) DOOR CLOSER

(2) DOOR STOP

(2) OVERHEAD STOP

(2) CLOSER BACK PLATE

(1) THRESHOLD

(2) SMOKE SEAL

(2) DOOR SWEEP

TYPE 1: PAIR 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" EXTERIOR ALUMINUM WIDE STILE & RAIL

DOORS WITH CLEAR, INSULATED, TEMPERED SAFETY GLAZING (EXISTING).

EXISTING

HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD-84" (SIZE 7'-0") (EXISTING)

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-103, BRUSHED CHROME; C.O. CYLINDER AT 34" MIN. FROM

BOTTOM OF DOOR(EXISTING)

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE, (BRUSHED CHROME)

1 1/2" DIAMETER, VARIES HIGH - PROVIDED BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER. MOUNT TOP

OF PULLS FLUSH WITH TOP OF GLAZING STOP IN DOOR, RE: SHOP DRAWINGS

1 1/2" DIAMETER, VARIES HIGH - PROVIDED BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER. MOUNT TOP

OF PULLS FLUSH WITH TOP OF GLAZING STOP IN DOOR, RE: SHOP DRAWINGS.

ADAMS RITE, MODEL MS1850S-310-628 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4089-00-130 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4016 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4015 (EXISTING)

DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P (TOP JAMB), (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

IVES, MODEL FS446 (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

GLYNN-JOHNSON, MODEL GL450 (454S 630) (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

DORMA, MODEL BP89, ALUMINUM (EXISTING)

REESE, MODEL S424A-72 (SIZE 72") USE NON-SHRINK STRUCTURAL GROUT BED

UNDER THRESHOLD(EXISTING)

REESE, MODEL F-797B-21 (EXISTING)

PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-36 (36" DOOR) (BLACK), CHIPOTLE FURNISHED

1B

MAIN ENTRY - PAIR

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

(2) CONTINUOUS HINGE

(1) MORTISE CYLINDER

(1) TEMP CORE

(2) CUSTOM WOOD PULLS

(2) CUSTOM WOOD PUSH

(1) DEADBOLT

(1) EXIT INDICATOR

(1) HEADER BOLT

(1) THRESHOLD BOLT

(2) DOOR CLOSER

(2) DOOR STOP

(2) OVERHEAD STOP

(2) CLOSER BACK PLATE

(1) THRESHOLD

(2) SMOKE SEAL

(2) DOOR SWEEP

TYPE 1: PAIR 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" EXTERIOR ALUMINUM WIDE STILE & RAIL

DOORS WITH CLEAR, INSULATED, TEMPERED SAFETY GLAZING (EXISTING).

EXISTING

HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD-84" (SIZE 7'-0") (EXISTING)

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-103, BRUSHED CHROME; C.O. CYLINDER AT 34" MIN. FROM

BOTTOM OF DOOR(EXISTING)

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE, (BRUSHED CHROME)

1 1/2" DIAMETER, VARIES HIGH - PROVIDED BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER. MOUNT TOP

OF PULLS FLUSH WITH TOP OF GLAZING STOP IN DOOR, RE: SHOP DRAWINGS

1 1/2" DIAMETER, VARIES HIGH - PROVIDED BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER. MOUNT TOP

OF PULLS FLUSH WITH TOP OF GLAZING STOP IN DOOR, RE: SHOP DRAWINGS.

ADAMS RITE, MODEL MS1850S-310-628 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4089-00-130 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4016 (EXISTING)

ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4015 (EXISTING)

DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P (TOP JAMB), (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

IVES, MODEL FS446 (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

GLYNN-JOHNSON, MODEL GL450 (454S 630) (ALUMINUM) (EXISTING)

DORMA, MODEL BP89, ALUMINUM (EXISTING)

REESE, MODEL S424A-72 (SIZE 72") USE NON-SHRINK STRUCTURAL GROUT BED

UNDER THRESHOLD(EXISTING)

REESE, MODEL F-797B-21 (EXISTING)

PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-36 (36" DOOR) (BLACK), CHIPOTLE FURNISHED

NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO RETROFIT LOCKS TO BE KEYED THE SAME AS DOORS 1B & 3

NOTE: EXIT INDICATOR ARRIVES WITH SIGNS STATING "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING

BUSINESS HOURS" AND "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED".

VERIFY REQUIRED SIGN WORDING WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ONE SIGN

IS TO BE PLACED IN A VISIBLE LOCATION ABOVE THE DOORS.

NOTE: THERE IS TO BE NO EXTERIOR HOLE OR CYLINDER

NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO RETROFIT LOCKS TO BE KEYED THE SAME AS DOORS 1A & 3

NOTE: EXIT INDICATOR ARRIVES WITH SIGNS STATING "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING

BUSINESS HOURS" AND "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED".

VERIFY REQUIRED SIGN WORDING WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ONE SIGN

IS TO BE PLACED IN A VISIBLE LOCATION ABOVE THE DOORS.

NOTE: THERE IS TO BE NO EXTERIOR HOLE OR CYLINDER

4

MANAGER'S OFFICE - SINGLE LEAF

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

(3) HINGE

(1) LOCKSET

(1) TEMP CORE

(1) KICKPLATE

(1) DOOR STOP

(3) DOOR SILENCERS

(1) SECURITY WINDOW

TYPE 2A: 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" HOLLOW METAL DOOR.

TYPE 1: HOLLOW METAL (WELDED)

STANLEY, MODEL FBB179-26D (SIZE 4-1/2" X 4-1/2")

SCHLAGE, MODEL L9453BD-06A

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE (FINISH: BRUSHED CHROME)

HIAWATHA, MODEL KP834-32D

DON-JO, MODEL 1407-630, STAINLESS STEEL

IVES, MODEL SR64

AIR LOUVERS, MODEL VSL1212TEMPPAK SLIMLINE 12" X 12" X 1/4" LITE KIT (10" X

10" GLASS VISIBLE)

5

WOMEN'S ROOM - SINGLE LEAF

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

(3) HINGE

(1) CLOSER

(1) LOCKSET

(1) DOOR STOP

(3) DOOR SILENCERS

(2) KICK PLATE

(1) COAT HOOK

TYPE 2: 3'-0" X 7'-4 WITH 5/8" UNDERCUT X 1-3/4" HOLLOW METAL DOOR

TYPE 2: HOLLOW METAL (WELDED)

STANLEY, MODEL FBB179-260 (SIZE 4-1/2" X 4-1/2")

DORMA, MODEL 7414AR ALUMINUM

SCHLAGE, MODEL AL40S SAT 626

IVES, MODEL FS436

IVES, MODEL SR64

HIAWATHA, MODEL KP834-32D

MILLS, MODEL FT6519, SUPPLIED BY WASHROOM ACCESSORIESVENDOR, MOUNT

T.O. HOOK AT 47 1/2"

WINDOW FRAME TYPES

NOTE: ALL STOFRONT FRAMING AND

GLAZING EXISTING BY LANDLORD

DOOR TYPES

RE: DOOR SCHED

RE: DOOR SCHED

1/4" CLEAR

TEMPERED

GLASS

RE: DOOR SCHED

EQ 10" EQ

RE: DOOR SCHED

DOOR TYPE 3

INSULATED HOLLOW

METAL DOOR

(EXISTING)

DOOR TYPE 2A

INSULATED HOLLOW

METAL DOOR

DOOR TYPE 2

HOLLOW METAL

DOOR

CLEAR,

INSULATED,

TEMPERED

SAFETY GLASS

KICK PLATES

WHERE SCHEDULED

5/8" UNDERCUT

DOOR TYPE 1

WIDE STILE & RAIL

ALUMINUM DOOR

W/ TEMPERED GLAZING

DOOR FRAMES

2" RE: SCHED 2"

2"

RE: DOOR SCHEDULE

2"

FRAME TYPE 2 FRAME TYPE 1

NOTE: GC TO VERIFY THE WALL THICKNESS

PRIOR TO ORDERING DOOR FRAMES.

3

KITCHEN (REAR EXIT) - SINGLE LEAF

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

TYPE 3: 3'-6" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" INSULATED HOLLOW METAL DOOR (EXISTING)

TYPE 1: HOLLOW METAL (WELDED) (EXISTING)

(1) HINGE

(1) EXIT DEVICE

(1) RIM CYLINDER

(1) TEMP CORE

(1) DOOR CLOSER

HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD (SIZE 7'-0") (EXISTING)

MONARCH, MODEL XX-R-L-DANE-42 32D (SIZE 42") (EXISTING)

GLS, MODEL RCIC-7-LZ-626 (EXISTING)

SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE (FINISH: BRUSHED CHROME)

DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P (TOP JAMB), ALUMINUM (EXISTING)

(1) CLOSER BACK PLATE

(1) THRESHOLD

(1) WEATHERSTRIP

(1) DOOR SWEEP

(1) DOOR VIEWER

DORMA, MODEL BP89, ALUMINUM (EXISTING)

PEMKO, MODEL 2750A-42 (SIZE 42") (EXISTING)

REESE, MODEL DS75C-204, (SIZE 21") (EXISTING)

PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-42 (42" DOOR) (BLACK) CHIPOTLE FURNISHED

(1) EXIT ALARM

(1) DOOR SILENCERS

(1) DOOR BUZZER

IVES, MODEL U698-26D, C.O. VIEWER AT 60" FROM BOTTOM OF DOOR

(EXISTING)

TRINE, MODEL 206-3 (EXISTING)

IVES, MODEL SR64 (EXISTING)

TRINE, MODEL 233 (EXISTING)

(1) LEVER MONARCH, MODEL DANE, ALUMINUM (EXTERIOR SIDE) (EXISTING)

(1) KICKPLATE HIAWATHA, MODEL KP834-US32D (EXISTING)

NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO RETROFIT LOCKS TO BE KEYED THE SAME AS DOORS 1A & 1B

TYPICAL EXTERIOR DOOR TYPES

ALIGN TOP OF WOOD PULL

WITH TOP OF GLASS

WOOD PULL BY TENANT

MILLWORK SUPPLIER; REFER

TO HARDWARE SCHEDULE,

THIS SHEET

12" PEPPER DISC LOGO IN

HIGH PERFORMANCE, CAST

VINYL COLOR: 'WHITE'

HOURS OF OPERATION

1.125" FONT: GOTHAM

MEDIUM COLOR: 'WHITE'

TEMPER INSULATED GLASS

TYP. DOORS

EQ EQ EQ EQ

MAIN/SINGLE ENTRY DOOR

12" PEPPER DISC LOGO

IN HIGH PERFORMANCE

CAST VINYL COLOR:

'WHITE' OR 'BLACK'

CONFIRM PRIOR TO

ORDERING

SERVICE ENTRANCE

1.125" FONT: GOTHAM

MEDIUM COLOR: 'WHITE'

EQ EQ

6

MEN'S ROOM - SINGLE LEAF

DOOR:

FRAME:

HARDWARE:

(3) HINGE

(1) CLOSER

(1) LOCKSET

(1) DOOR STOP

(3) DOOR SILENCERS

(2) KICK PLATE

(1) COAT HOOK

TYPE 2: 3'-0" X 7'-4 WITH 5/8" UNDERCUT X 1-3/4" HOLLOW METAL DOOR

TYPE 2: HOLLOW METAL (WELDED)

STANLEY, MODEL FBB179-260 (SIZE 4-1/2" X 4-1/2")

DORMA, MODEL 7414AR ALUMINUM

SCHLAGE, MODEL AL40S SAT 626

IVES, MODEL FS436

IVES, MODEL SR64

HIAWATHA, MODEL KP834-32D

MILLS, MODEL FT6519, SUPPLIED BY WASHROOM ACCESSORIESVENDOR, MOUNT

T.O. HOOK AT 47 1/2"

TYP. METAL

SERVICE DOOR

SERVICE ENTRANCE

SERVICE DOOR

CUSTOM WOOD PULL

1 1/16"

5"

SS SET SCREW

CONCEALED

VERTICAL ROD

ZINC PLATED CONE

HEAD SCREW

SS WASHER

CUSTOM WOOD PULL

SS CUSTOM BRACKET

WIDE STILE ALUMINUM DOOR

GLAZING STOP

DOOR GLAZING

SS CUSTOM BRACKET

CUSTOM WOOD PULL

2 5/8"

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

5.

6.

3.

4.

2.

7.

8.

1.

DOOR NOTES

9.

10.

ALL EGRESS DOORS SHALL BE READILY OPENABLE FROM THE EGRESS SIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR SPECIAL

KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT.

LATCHES, HANDLES, PANIC BARS AND ALL DOOR HARDWARE WILL COMPLY WITH SECTION 7.2 OF NFPA 101 PER THE

SPECIFICATIONS.

THE MANAGER HAS A KEY TO UNLOCK RESTROOM DOORS, FROM THE OUTSIDE IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY.

ALL DOORS TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS.

SEE THIS SHEET FOR EXTERIOR DOOR SIGNAGE INFO.

ALL FRAMES, DOORS AND HARDWARE TO BE FURNISHED BY TENANT HARDWARE SUPPLIER AND INSTALLED BY TENANT

G.C. CALL PETE KLIMEK WITH TWIN CITY HARDWARE AT 763-535-4660 TO ARRANGE DELIVERY. STOREFRONT DOORS

ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY GC, STOREFRONT HARDWARE PROVIDED BY TENANT HARDWARE SUPPLIER.

MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR DOORS WITH CLOSERS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 POUNDS. THIS

MAY BE INCREASED TO 15 POUNDS FOR FIRE-RATED DOORS.

THE BOTTOM 10 INCHES OF ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH, UNINTERRUPTED SURFACE TO ALLOW THE DOOR TO

BE OPENED BY A WHEELCHAIR FOOTREST WITHOUT CREATING A TRAP OR HAZARDOUS CONDITION.

ALL SUPPORT SIGNAGE PROVIDED BY TENANT'S SUPPORT SIGNAGE SUPPLIER.

ALL SUPPORT SIGNAGE INSTALLED BY G.C.

DOOR CLOSER

STOREFRONT

INSTALL CLOSER ONTO HEAD

JAMB AS SHOWN - INSTALL W/

OPTIONAL BACK PLATE WHERE

HEAD JAMB DIMENSION IS LESS

THAN 3"

DOOR CLOSER

DOOR - REFER TO SCHEDULE

TOP JAMB MOUNT INSTALLATION. (NOTE THAT BACKPLATE IS MISSING IN THIS INSTALLATION BECAUSE HEAD

JAMB IS OF ADEQUATE HEIGHT TO RECEIVE ALL MOUNTING SCREWS WITHOUT IT.) WHEN IN DOUBT ABOUT

THE HEAD JAMB DIMENSION OR STABILITY, ORDER THE BACKPLATE.

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Door & Hardware

Schedule

A117

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

FINISH LEGEND

FLOOR FINISHES

LGD. #

F1

F2

F3

F4

POLISHED CONCRETE

POLY-CRETE RESIN

NOT USED

EXTERIOR CONCRETE

WALL BASE FINISHES

LGD. #

B1

B2

B3

BLACK RUBBER, COVELESS

NOT USED

POLY-CRETE BASE

WALL FINISHES

P4

P5

P6

P7

LGD. #

P1

P2

P3

P8

P9

P10

GYP BD; PAINT MOONLIT SNOW

NOT USED

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

AC PLYWOOD PANEL

CERAMIC TILE - HORIZONTAL STACK BOND

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

DIAMOND PLATE TO 48" AFF

NOT USED

GYP BD; PAINT TO MATCH DECK

STOREFRONT

CEILING/DECK FINISHES

LGD. #

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

OPEN TO STRUCTURE

NOT USED

GYP BD; PAINT MOONLIT SNOW

2X4 VINYL-FACED LAY-IN

AC PLYWOOD PANEL

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

-

CODED NOTES

1

2

3

4

5

6

1-1/2" X 1-1/2" STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS

SCHLUTER-QUADEC METAL CORNER, REFER TO 11 & 12/A126

ALUMINUM ENDCAP, REFER TO 9/A126

PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL ON WALL TO 24" ABOVE TOP OF MOP SINK. FLASH BOTTOM EDGE

OVER MOP SINK RIM. BEND STAINLESS STEEL AT INSIDE CORNER SO THERE IS NO JOINT.

AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE THE 4-COMP SINK IS AGAINST ANY WALL, PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL

ON WALL TO 4" ABOVE TOP OF 4-COMP SINK BACKSPLASH. FLASH BOTTOM EDGE OVER 4-COMP

SINK BACKSPLASH EDGE, BEND STAINLESS STEEL AT INSIDE CORNER SO THERE IS NO JOINT

COOLER WALL PANELS AS PROVIDED BY THE COOLER MANUFACTURER

HAVE A 26-GAUGE COATED AND EMBOSSED STEEL FINISH.

7 G.C. TO PROVIDE 18 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL SHROUD AROUND EXPOSED LINES AT THE ICE MAKER.

-

AC PLYWOOD FINISH SCHEDULE

CLASS A

CLASS C

-

GENERAL NOTES

1.

WAINSCOTS PROVIDED BY TMS, INSTALL BY GC.

2.

PLYWOOD BOX AND PERFORATED PLYWOOD WALL PROVIDED BY TMS, INSTALLED BY GC.

3.

GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SEQUENCING OF PREWIRING WITH COMPLETION OF INTERIOR FINISHES (GYP. BD. FINISHES).

EXTENT OF POLYCRETE

FROM KITCHEN

10

A125

17

A125

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

15

A125

EXTENT OF POLYCRETE

FROM RESTROOM

2

A125

16

A125

1

5

KITCHEN

108

3

F2

P6

B3

P6

B3

P5

B3

P6

B3

9E

A125

B3

P6

P6

B3

1

11

A125

P7

B3

1

P7

B3

ABOVE

P6

2

4

PROVIDE TOP CORNER AT

TRANSITION FROM GYP BD

CEILING TO FRP WALL

REFER TO 9/A141

3

P7

B3

B3

F2

6

COOLER

110

B3

B3

7

B3

P6

3" CONCRETE CURB

FOR ELECTRICAL

STUBS. APPLY

POLY-CRETE TO

TOP AND SIDES OF

CURBS

3

1

9C

A125

F2

P6

B3

7

A125

COOKING

107

OFFICE

F2

109

P6

B3

9A

A125

P5

B3

P6

B3

7

A125

P5

B3

4" CONCRETE CURB FOR EQUIPMENT,

WITH POLYCRETE BASE AT EXPOSED EDGES

9

A126

LINE OF MENU

BOARD ABOVE

2' - 2 3/4" 1' - 8"

SERVING

106

POS

104

3

B3 P5

B1 P3 P1

P4

B1

10

A125

POLYCRETE TOP OF

CURB FOR SMART SAFE

EXTENT OF POLYCRETE

FROM KITCHEN

9B

A125

SIM.

P9

ABOVE

P1

ABOVE

2

ORDERING

105

13

A125

P1

P3

B1

P5

B3

F2

MEN

111

P5

B3

10

A125

P4

B1

P4

B1

PASSAGE

103

P4

B1

P4

B1

P4

B1

P4

B1

ABOVE

P4

P4

B1

6

A125

10

A125

P5

B3

F2

WOMEN

112

P4

B1

P5

B3

P4

B1

P4

B1

P4

B1

UTENSIL

4

A125

102

ABOVE

P4

P4

B1

P4

B1

P4

B1

3

A125

DINING

101

F1

ABOVE

P1

14

A125

BELOW

P3

P3

P10

P1

P3

B1

P1

P3

B1

ABOVE

P1

B1 P3 P1

1

A125

P1

P3

B1

ABOVE

P1 P10

18

A125

P1

P3

B1

P1

P3

B1

MAIN ENTRY

100

ABOVE

P1

P10

P1

P3

B1

P10

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

4" CONCRETE CURB

FOR WATER HEATER

APPLY POLY-CRETE TO

THE TOP OF THE CURB.

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Finish Plan

Checked:

EH, EW

A120

19

A125

PATIO

113

1

A120

FINISH PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

F4

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

5/16"

1/16" OVERLAP SIDE PANELS

OVER FRONT PANELS

1" TYP

FRAMING

24 GAUGE GALVANIZED

METAL; REFER TO 1/A125

5/16" "BLACK DIAMOND" RICHLITE

PAINT PLYWOOD SHEATHING

BLACK IN ALL POSSIBLE EXPOSED

AREAS

PREDRILLED HOLES AND SCREWS

BY MILLWORK VENDOR. SCREW

HEADS ARE TO BE FLUSH WITH

PANEL FACES

19

A125

PLAN DETAIL - TYP. WAINSCOT INSIDE CORNER

3" = 1'-0"

FRAMING

WALL SUBSTRATE

CONCSTRUCTION

VARIES - REFER A115

24 GAUGE GALVANIZED

METAL; REFER TO 1/A125

5/16" "BLACK

DIAMOND" RICHLITE

PAINT BLOCKING BLACK IN

ALL POSSIBLE EXPOSED

AREAS

PREDRILLED HOLES

AND SCREWS BY

MILLWORK VENDOR.

SCREW HEADS ARE TO

BE FLUSH WITH PANEL

FACES

1"

TYP.

1/16"

OVERLAP SIDE PANELS

OVER FRONT PANELS

5/16"

18

A125

PLAN DETAIL - TYP. WAINSCOT CORNER

3" = 1'-0"

FRAMING

5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING

3/4" 'AC' PLYWOOD

PREDRILLED HOLES AND SCREWS BY

MILLWORK VENDOR. SCREW HEADS

ARE TO BE FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES

4" BLACK FLAT RUBBER BASE,

COVELESS

LINE OF FINISHED FLOOR

6

A125

BASE DETAIL @ WOOD PANEL/BOX

3" = 1'-0"

FRAMING

5/8" GYP BD

24 GAUGE GALVANIZED METAL:

REFER TO 1/A125

5/16" "BLACK DIAMOND" RICHLITE

PREDRILLED HOLES AND SCREWS BY

MILLWORK VENDOR. SCREW HEADS

ARE TO BE FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES

PAINT SHEATHING BLACK AT ALL

POSSIBLE EXPOSED AREAS

LINE OF END WALL

17

A125

PLAN DETAIL - TYP. WAINSCOT END CONDITION

3" = 1'-0"

PASSAGE

3/4" AC

PLYWOOD

PAINT PLYWOOD

SHEATHING BLACK

IN ALL POSSIBLE

EXPOSED AREAS

ADJUSTABLE

ANCHOR PLATE

HOLLOW METAL

DOOR AND FRAME

RESTROOM

FRAMING

CEMENT BOARD

CERAMIC TILE, SEAL

TILE TO DOOR FRAME

16

A125

DOOR JAMB - PLAN DETAIL

3" = 1'-0"

1/16" OVERLAP SIDE PANELS

OVER FRONT PANELS

3/4" 1"

TYP.

FRAMING

5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING

3/4" 'AC' PLYWOOD

PAINT PLYWOOD SHEATHING

BLACK IN ALL POSSIBLE

EXPOSED AREAS

PREDRILLED HOLES AND

SCREWS BY MILLWORK

VENDOR. SCREW HEADS ARE TO

BE FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES

4

A125

PLAN DETAIL - TYP. BOX INSIDE CORNER

3" = 1'-0"

PASSAGE

AC PLYWOOD

5/8" PLYWOOD

5/8" PLYWOOD, PAINT WHITE

ADJUSTABLE ANCHOR PLATE

HOLLOW METAL DOOR

AND FRAME

FRAMING

5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING

3/4" 'AC' PLYWOOD

PAINT PLYWOOD SHEATHING

BLACK IN ALL POSSIBLE

EXPOSED AREAS

PREDRILLED HOLES AND SCREWS

BY MILLWORK VENDOR. SCREW HEADS

ARE TO BE FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES.

1"

1/16" OVERLAP SIDE PANELS

3/4"

OVER FRONT PANELS

3

A125

PLAN DETAIL - TYP. BOX CORNER

3" = 1'-0"

NOTE: ALL CONCEALED WOOD TO BE FRT RATED

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

1/8"

V.I.F.

STOREFRONT,

REFER TO A117

RICHLITE SILLCAP TO

MATCH WAINSCOT

RESTROOM

FRAMING

3/4" HAT CHANNEL

CERAMIC TILE

CEMENT BOARD

EXISTING DEMISING

WALL

15

A125

DOOR JAMB - PLAN DETAIL

3" = 1'-0"

13

A125

9D

A125

1/8"

1/8"

EXIST. WALL CONST. - V.I.F.

STOREFRONT, REFER TO A117

SILICONE SEALANT PER

SPECS @ ALL TOP JOINTS

RICHLITE SILL/JAMB TO

MATCH WAINSCOT;

OVERHANG WAINSCOT 1/8"

MECHANICALLY FASTENED

5/16" "BLACK DIAMOND"

RICHLITE WAINSCOT PROVIDED

BY VENDOR, INSTALLED BY

TENANT G.C. - REFER TO 1/A125

BASE - REFER TO SHEET A120

SECTION @ WAINSCOT SILL / JAMB

1" = 1'-0"

NOT USED

N.T.S.

NOTE:

WALK - OFF MAT BY IMPACT

SPECIALTIES. PROVIDE HELIX

Z1 ENTRY MAT (BLACK) AND

LB LEVEL RECESSED BASE

FRAME IN 6063-T6

ALUMINUM (MILL FINISH).

12

A125

WALK-OFF MAT DETAIL

6" = 1'-0"

TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR

HELIX Z1 ENTRY MAT (BLACK FINISH)

LB LEVEL RECESSED BASE FRAME IN 6063-T6

ALUMINUM WITH MILL FINISH. MILL FINISH

FRAMES IN CONTACT WITH CONCRETE TO BE

PRIMER COATED. INSTALLER SHALL USE

RECOMMENDED LATEX SCREED TO ENSURE LEVEL

BASE

FRP PANEL - EXTEND TO 1"

BELOW TOP OF SCHLUTER STRIP

WALL SUBSTRATE, REFER TO A115

PROVIDE CONTINUOUS BEAD SEALANT

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT

ALUMINUM EDGE PROTECTION

STRIP INSTALLED BY G.C.

1/8"

1/4" HARDIEBOARD, TYPICAL

BOTH SIDES, BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR.

POLY-CRETE WR 3/4" RADIUS

COVE, TYP. BOTH SIDES

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS

FLOORING SYSTEM

9C

A125

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE KEYWAY AS CLOSE

TO WALL AS SAW GUARD WILL ALLOW

POLYCRETE BASE DETAIL @ FRP

3" = 1'-0"

9B

A125

INTERIOR

CERAMIC WALL TILE

FRAMING

WALL SUBSTRATE

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT

ALUMINUM EDGE PROTECTION STRIP,

TO BE INSTALLED BY G.C.

COORDINATE WITH SIZE OF TILE

1/8"

IN EVENT OF EXCESSIVE SPACE

BETWEEN WALL AND FACE OF

CERAMIC TILE, A 1/4" THICK STRIP

OF HARDIEBOARD BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR MAY BE REQUIRED

TO FILL SPACE.

POLY-CRETE WR 3/4" RADIUS COVE

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS

FLOORING SYSTEM

4" THICK COOLER PANEL

CONTINUOUS BEAD SEALANT

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT

ALUMINUM EDGE PROTECTION

STRIP INSTALLED BY G.C.

NSF LISTED VINYL FLOOR SEALER SET

IN BED OF CONTINUOUS SEALANT

COOLER WALL TRACK

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS

FLOORING SYSTEM

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY BY

FLOORING CONTRACTOR.

PROVIDE KEYWAY AS

CLOSE TO WALL AS SAW

GUARD WILL ALLOW

CONCRETE SLAB

11

A125

COOLER WALL @ POLYCRETE

3" = 1'-0"

1/8"

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY BY

FLOORING CONTRACTOR

POLYCRETE BASE DETAIL @ TILE TO CONCRETE

3" = 1'-0"

1/8"

EXTERIOR

DIAMOND PLATE PANEL

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT

ALUMINUM EDGE PROTECTION

STRIP INSTALLED BY G.C.

PROVIDE CONTINUOUS BEAD SEALANT

1/4" HARDIBOARD, TYPICAL BOTH

SIDES, BY FLOORING CONTRACTOR

POLY-CRETE WR 3/4" RADIUS

COVE, TYP. BOTH SIDES

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS FLOORING SYSTEM

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY

BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE

KEYWAY AS CLOSE TO

WALL AS SAW GUARD

WILL ALLOW

CERAMIC WALL TILE

WALL SUBSTRATE REFER TO A115

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT ALUMINUM

EDGE PROTECTION STRIP TO BE

INSTALLED BY G.C. COORDINATE WITH

SIZE OF TILE

IN EVENT OF EXCESSIVE SPACE BETWEEN

WALL AND FACE OF CERAMIC TILE, A

1/4" THICK STRIP OF HARDIEBOARD BY

FLOORING CONTRACTOR MAY BE

REQUIRED TO FILL SPACE.

POLY-CRETE WR 3/4" RADIUS COVE

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS

FLOORING SYSTEM

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR . PROVIDE KEYWAY AS CLOSE

TO WALL AS SAW GUARD WILL ALLOW

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS

FLOORING SYSTEM

TYPICAL 1/4" X 1/4"

KEYWAY AND GRINDING

AT FLOOR TRANSITION BY

FLOORING CONTRACTOR

CONCRETE FLOOR

SLAB

9A

A125

POLYCRETE BASE DETAIL @ TILE TO POLYCRETE

3" = 1'-0"

POLISHED CONC

10

A125

8

A125

NOT USED

3" = 1'-0"

1' - 0" MIN.

FEATHERED TO EXISTING LEVEL

UNFINISHED CONC. W/ POLY-CRETE

SMOOTH FLOOR TRANSITION

3" = 1'-0"

5

A125

NOT USED

3" = 1'-0"

FRAMING

5/8" PLYWOOD SHEATHING

3/4" THICK 'AC' PLYWOOD

PAINT PLYWOOD SHEATHING

WHITE AT ALL END CONDITIONS

PREDRILLED HOLES AND SCREWS

BY MILLWORK VENDOR. SCREW HEADS

ARE TO BE FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES

LINE OF END WALL

2

A125

PLAN DETAIL - BOX END CONDITION

3" = 1'-0"

1/8"

14

A125

SECTION @ WAINSCOT SILL/JAMB

3" = 1'-0"

SILICONE SEALANT PER

SPECS @ ALL JOINTS

24 GAUGE GALVANIZED

METAL UNDER WAINSCOT

WALL SUBSTRATE

CONSTRUCTION VARIES

- REFER TO A115

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

REFER TO 1A/A125

TERRAZZO MOP SINK

PROVIDE CONTINUOUS BEAD SEALANT

1/8"

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' A100-AT

ALUMINUM EDGE PROTECTION

STRIP INSTALLED BY G.C.

1/4" HARDIEBOARD, BY

FLOORING CONTRACTOR.

POLY-CRETE WR 3/4" RADIUS COVE,

TYP. BOTH SIDES

POLY-CRETE SEAMLESS FLOORING SYSTEM

1/4"W X 1/4"D KEYWAY

BY FLOORING

CONTRACTOR. PROVIDE

KEYWAY AS CLOSE TO

MOP SINK AS SAW

GUARD WILL ALLOW

9E

A125

POLYCRETE BASE DETAIL @ MOP SINK

3" = 1'-0"

8"

RECEPTACLE, REFER TO

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR

POWER REQUIREMENTS

WRAP POLY-CRETE OVER

CURB, SLOPE AWAY FROM

CENTER OF THE CURB

CONCRETE CURB

REFER TO A110

POLY-CRETE WR

3/4" RADIUS COVE

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

7

A125

CURB DETAIL UNDER PREP/CUTTING TABLES

3" = 1'-0"

SCHEDULED PAINT FINISH

SEE SPEC. SECTION 9900

SILICONE SEALANT PER

SPECS @ TOP JOINT

TOP OF WAINSCOT

ELEV. 3'-6" AFF

- V.I.F.

24 GAUGE GALVANIZED

METAL UNDER WAINSCOT;

HOLD TOP OF METAL 1/2"

BELOW TOP OF WAINSCOT

WALL SUBSTRATE

CONSTRUCTION VARIES -

REFER TO A115

MECHANICALLY FASTENED

5/16" "BLACK DIAMOND"

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

PROVIDED BY VENDOR,

INSTALLED BY TENANT G.C.

PAINT SHEATHING BLACK IN

ALL POSSIBLE EXPOSED AREAS

4" BLACK FLAT RUBBER

BASE, COVELESS

FINISHED FLOOR

0'-0" AFF

1

A125

SECTION @ WAINSCOT

3" = 1'-0"

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Finish Details

Date of Last Print:

Checked:

EH, EW

A125

11/02/15

WIRE HANGERS HUNG AT

48" O.C. MIN. FASTEN TO

STRUCTURE ABOVE

SUSPENDED CEILING

GRID SYSTEM

5/8" GYP BOARD CEILING

CHANNEL MOLDING

PROVIDE 1/8" SPACER AT TOP

FOR CAULK JOINT AT CEILING

CERAMIC TILE FINISH, FULL TILE

REFER TO A115 FOR

WALL CONSTRUCTION

8

A126

TILE DETAIL @ GYP BD CEILING

3" = 1'-0"

4

A126

NOT USED

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

CERAMIC TILE

WALL SUBSTRATE, RE: A115

FULL HEIGHT METAL STUDS

SCHLUTER-QUADEC Q100EB

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER

GUARD, 27/64" X 27/64"

(ENTIRE HEIGHT OF

CERAMIC TILE)

12

A126

TILE TO TILE OUTSIDE CORNER

6" = 1'-0"

WIRE HANGERS HUNG AT

48" O.C. MIN. FASTEN TO

STRUCTURE ABOVE

ACOUSTICAL CEILING

GRID SYSTEM

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

HEMMED ANGLE MOLDING

PROVIDE 1/8" SPACER AT TOP

FOR CAULK JOINT AT CEILING

CERAMIC TILE FINISH, FULL TILE

REFER TO A115 FOR

WALL CONSTRUCTION

7

A126

TILE DETAIL @ SUSPENDED CEILING

3" = 1'-0"

*NOTE: ±9'-0" BOTTOM OF GYP. BD.

CEILING IS TO BE TAKEN FROM THE

HIGHEST POINT OF CONCRETE SLAB.

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

± 9'-0"" AFF

GYP. BD. CEILING

PROVIDE 1/8" SPACER FOR

CAULK JOINT AT CEILING

PROVIDE 1/8"SPACER

FOR CAULK JOINT

1/4" THICK MILL FINISH

ALUMINUM JAMB PLATE.

RUN FROM TOP OF

POLYCRETE BASE (JOLLY)

TO UNDERSIDE OF

CEILING REFER TO 9/A126

2 1/8" X 8 1/2”

HORIZONTAL STACK

CERAMIC TILE

SCHLUTER 'JOLLY' EDGE

PROTECTION STRIP, SEE

DETAIL 9A/A125

± 4" POLY-CRETE BASE

3

A126

KITCHEN WALL ENDCAP TILE LAYOUT

1/2" = 1'-0"

CERAMIC TILE

WALL SUBSTRATE, RE: A115

FULL HEIGHT METAL STUDS

SCHLUTER-QUADEC Q100EB

STAINLESS STEEL CORNER

GUARD, 27/64" X 27/64"

(ENTIRE HEIGHT OF

CERAMIC TILE)

SEALANT

FRP EDGE TRIM MOULDING

FRP PANEL

11

A126

TILE TO FRP OUTSIDE CORNER

6" = 1'-0"

B.O. LIGHT COVE

VARIES AFF

FLUORESCENT

FIXTURE, REFER TO

E100

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

VARIES AFF

HORIZONTAL TILE GROUT

JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH

BOTTOM OF GYP. BD. CEILING

2 1/8" X 8 1/2" CERAMIC

TILE, HORIZONTAL STACK

BOND (TYP.)

CEMENT BOARD

METAL STUDS,

REFER TO A115

SOUND BATT INSULATION,

REFER TO A115

CERAMIC TILE

WALL SUBSTRATE, RE:A115

FULL HEIGHT METAL STUDS

RAKE OUT GROUT AND

PROVIDE CAULK PER

SPECIFICATIONS

10

A126

TILE TO TILE INSIDE CORNER

6" = 1'-0"

3"

GENERAL NOTES

1.

TILE INSTALLER SHALL COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND PROVIDE LAYOUT OF ALL WALL TILE PRIOR TO

INSTALLATION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE WALLS AS TO NOT HAVE ANY CUT TILES IN EITHER DIRECTION

(HORIZONTALLY OR VERTICALLY) ON ANY WALLS. LAYOUT SHALL BE APPROVED BY CHIPOTLE CM PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IN DIMENSIONS FOR DIRECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

FAILURE TO ADHERE TO THESE REQUIREMENTS RESULTING IN ANY REMEDIATION REQUIRED TO MEET DESIGN INTENT WILL BE

AT CONTRACTOR'S COST.

2.

IF REQUIRED TO CUT TILES, CONTRACTOR TO MEASURE OVERALL WALL WIDTH AND DETERMINE WHICH SOLUTION WILL

ALLOW FOR THE GREATER THAN 50% TILE WIDTH AT WALL TERMINATIONS.

3.

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL WALL TILES SHOULD BE CENTERED ON THE WIDTH OF THE WALL PER DETAIL 1A OR 1B.

4.

THERE SHOULD NEVER BE ANY CUT TILES VERTICALLY BETWEEN THE BASE AND THE CEILING. REFER TO A120 AND A140.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

SUBSTRATE VARIES

REFER TO A115

FINISH VARIES

REFER TO A120

CEMENT BOARD

METAL STUDS

COUNTERSUNK

S.S. SCREWS

EQUALLY SPACED

3/4" PLYWOOD,

PAINT ENDS WHITE

1/8" REVEAL WITH

BACKER ROD AND

CAULKING, EACH SIDE

1/4" THICK ALUMINUM

PLATE TO UNDERSIDE

OF SOFFIT ABOVE

1 1/2" 1 1/2"

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

9

A126

ALUMINUM PLATE @ JAMB/HEAD/SILL

3" = 1'-0"

GYP BOARD, PAINT WHITE

REFER TO MECH. DRAWINGS

FOR NEW DUCT WORK

METAL STUDS, REFER TO A115

GYP BOARD, PAINT WHITE

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

1' - 0"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

6

A126

RESTROOM/KITCHEN COVE DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

5

A126

NOT USED

N.T.S.

Revisions:

T.O. COVE

± 8'-7 1/4" AFF

B.O. CEILING

± 7'-7 1/4" AFF

PROVIDE 1/8" SPACER FOR

CAULK JOINT AT CEILING

2 1/8" X 8 1/2" CERAMIC

WALL TILE HORIZONTAL

STACK BOND (TYP.)

EDGE TILES TO BE

GREATER THAN 50% OF

THE TILE WIDTH; SEE

DETAILS 1A & 1B/A126

SCHLUTER ' JOLLY' EDGE

PROTECTION STRIP, SEE

DETAIL 9A/A125

± 5" POLY-CRETE BASE

EQ

NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A230

FOR FURTHER INFORMATION

VARIES, SEE PLAN

6

A126

EQ

2

A126

WALL WIDTH

RESTROOM SIDE WALL TILE LAYOUT

1/2" = 1'-0"

EQ

VARIES. SEE PLAN

EQ

EDGE TILES TO BE

GREATER THAN

50% OF THE

WIDTH

2 1/8" X 8 1/2"

CERAMIC WALL

TILE. HORIZONTAL

STACK BOND (TYP.)

EQ

VARIES. SEE PLAN

EQ

EDGE TILES TO BE

GREATER THAN

50% OF THE

WIDTH

2 1/8" X 8 1/2"

CERAMIC WALL

TILE. HORIZONTAL

STACK BOND (TYP.)

WALL WIDTH

1B

A126

TILE CENTERED LAYOUT

1/2" = 1'-0"

BASE AS

SCHEDULED

WALL WIDTH

1A

A126

JOINT CENTERED LAYOUT

1/2" = 1'-0"

BASE AS

SCHEDULED

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Tile Details

Checked:

EH, EW

A126

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

ADA TABLE LEG

PLACEMENT

9 1/2" 2' - 8 1/2"

TABLE TOP

3

A130

DETAIL

1/2" = 1'-0"

3' - 6"

14

13B

15

13B

12

TYP.

PATIO

113

16

2

A130

FURNITURE, FIXTURE & EQUIPMENT PATIO PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

15

16

PATIO RAILING, SEE SHEET

A101 FOR DIMENSIONS

INVERTER REFER TO

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

CO2 REMOTE FILLER VERIFY

LOCATION WITH CHIPOTLE C.M.

BYPASS DISTRIBUTION

PANEL, SEE ELEC PLANS

30

31.1

35.3

14

29

29.2

ELEC. PANEL LOCATION,

SEE ELEC PLANS

22

45

BELOW

35.1

OFFICE

109

11

4

20

29.1

16.1

BELOW

2' - 10"

2

41.1

41.2

39

24.3

11

10

KITCHEN

108

33

34

COOLER

110

POS

104

37.1

37

9 38

35.1

10

11

12

24.3

7 32 6

7

32

32.2

7.3

8.2

8.1

49

9

23

8

47

22

PREP SINK

HOOD ABOVE

22.1

22.2

24

3' - 0"

26

BELOW

10 25

16

19

17

18

COOKING

107

14

3' - 0 3/4"

31

ABOVE

11

12

BELOW

13.1

15

BELOW

3' - 0 7/8"

SERVING

106

13

24.1

17

2

3

40

BELOW

1

2

3

6

BELOW

33

1

1.1

2

ORDERING

105

4a

SOFFIT ABOVE

4

1B 1B

MEN

111

DINING

101

13

WOMEN

112

5' - 6 5/8"

17 17

HOLD TRASH SURROUND 4"

OFF ADJACENT WALL, TYP.

10

PASSAGE

103

6

5

1A 1B 1B

SOFFIT

ABOVE

UTENSIL

102

6" PVC SYRUP

LINE BELOW

43

42

BELOW

2' - 3 3/8"

1' - 7 1/2"

2

1' - 9 7/8"

8

2' - 3 3/8"

TYP.

5

1B 1B 1A

1C

3B

TYP.

14

1B 1B

4

4a

17

MAIN ENTRY

100

10' - 4"

17

3A

TYP.

1

A130

FURNITURE, FIXTURE & EQUIPMENT PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

MENU ASSEMBLY ABOVE

GENERAL NOTES

1.

2.

REFER TO SHEET A131 FOR EQUIPMENT LIST AND FURNITURE SCHEDULE.

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FRAMING, OR CENTERLINE OF EQUIPMENT

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

TELEPHONE BOARD

ABOVE, REFER TO 2B/A225

6" PVC SYRUP LINE BELOW

WATER FILTER ABOVE, REFER

TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Fixtures, Furniture &

Equipment Plan

A130

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY GAS WATER SEWER

● Installed On Concrete Curb

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

● Provide Plywood Blocking To Mount To Wall

● Provide Plywood Blocking To Mount To Wall

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Remote 2nd Make Line 109in - Right - W/POS & Cash Drawer - On Curb Delfield

MISC. EQUIPMENT LIST

ELEC GAS WATER SEWER

● Drain to Floor Sink, Tenant Millwork Supplier to Provide (2) Adjustable Legs to Support Dispenser From Under The Utensil Counter

● Drain Water Heater To Floor Drain, RE: Mech.

● See Plumbing Drawings

● See MEP Sheets For Details

● Refer To Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings; Refrigeration By Tenant; Remote Exterior Compressor Unit To Be Secured To Roof Per Code By GC

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

ELEC GAS WATER SEWER

● Coordinate Floor Drain Installation

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Fixtures, Furniture &

Equipment Schedules

A131

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

24.

1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

10.

11.

12.

RCP SCHEDULE

ITEM # MOUNT DESCRIPTION

A1

B1

Lay-In

Ceiling

2x2 Lensed Troffer

Recessed 6in Can light

C1

C2

E1

E2

E4

F1

H1

J1

J3

Surface

Surface

Various

Various

VARIOUS

Low Profile Fluorescent 2ft

Low Profile Fluorescent 3ft

Emergency Light

Emergency Light - Single Head

WHITE EXIT LIGHT - STANDARD RED

LETTERS

Surface

SURFACE

2' T8 Fluorescent Fixture

HOOD LIGHT

Ceiling

Ceiling

Pendant Light - Adjustable Height -

PAR20

Pendant Dome Light - Adjustable

Height - PAR20

Concealed Down Light K1

L1-10 SUSPENDED LONG LIGHT - 10 TOP - PAR 20

L2-10 SUSPENDED LONG LIGHT - 10 TOP - PAR 20 - W/

EM BALLAST

N1-3 Floor

P1 Wall

P3 WALL

Chevron Light 3ft - PAR 20

Swivel Spot Light - Single Head

ACCENT LIGHT - ARTWORK LIGHT

FIXTURE

1

QTY REMARKS

7 See Sheet E100

26 See Sheet E100

9 See Sheet E100

19 See Sheet E100

5 See Sheet E100

3 See Sheet E100

3 SEE SHEET E100

12 See Sheet E100

9 SEE SHEET E100

4 See Sheet E100

2 See Sheet E100

9 See Sheet E100

2 SEE SHEET E100

1 SEE SHEET E100

2

6 See Sheet E100

1 SEE SHEET E100

GENERAL NOTES

ALL INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS PROVIDED BY TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER.

ALL INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS INSTALLED BY GC. CAREFULLY REVIEW LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET

E100.

KITCHEN EXHAUST HOOD PROVIDED BY HS AND INSTALLED BY GC. GC TO COORDINATE PRESSURE TEST AND VIRO GUARD

WITH ENVIROMATIC, INC.

ANSUL BOX & FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PROVIDED BY AND INSTALLED BY HS. HOOD INTERLOCK BY GC. ELECTRICAL

CONNECTION BY GC, RE: ELEC.

MENU BOARD ASSEMBLY PROVIDED BY TMB, INSTALLED BY G.C.

PROVIDE BLOCKING ABOVE MENU BOARD ASSEMBLY FOR INSTALLATION.

REFER TO "09900 PAINTING - GENERAL" IN SPECIFICATIONS FOR FINISHES AT EXPOSED CEILING AREAS IN ADDITION TO NOTES

LISTED ON THIS SHEET.

SOUND SYSTEM: REFER TO 'CHIPOTLE STEREO GUIDE'.

UNISTRUT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH STRUCTURE. PROVIDE MATCHING CLOSER STRIPS AND END CAPS. CLOSER STRIP TO BE

APPLIED TO THE UNDERSIDE OF THE UNISTRUT.

ALL HEIGHTS ARE TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

LIGHT DETAILS ARE LOCATED ON SHEET A141. FIXTURE AND LAMP SPECIFICATIONS ARE LOCATED ON E100.

ALL UNISTRUT SUPPORTING CEILING ELEMENTS AND/ OR DUCT WORK SHALL NOT CONTAIN ANY ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. ALL

ELECTRICAL CONDUIT MUST RUN IN SEPARATE UNISTRUT.

ALL UNISTRUT, CONDUIT, SPRINKLER & WATER LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE DECK & PAINTED TO

MATCH THE DECK

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FRAMING, OR CENTERLINE OF FIXTURE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR SHATTER RESISTANT LAMP LOCATIONS.

ALL EMERGENCY FIXTURES, LIGHTS AND STROBES SHALL BE ALIGNED OR CENTERED ON WALLS.

FULL CERAMIC TILE COURSING SHALL TAKE PRECEDENT OVER ANY CEILING/HEADER DIMENSION INDICATED IN THE PLAN,

REFER TO A120.

ALL CONDUIT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS OF THE SERVING LINE SOFFIT ARE TO BE HELD TIGHT TO THE DECK, WITHIN THE JOIST

SHELF SPACE. PLEASE CONSULT WITH THE CHIPOTLE CM SHOULD ANY CONFLICTS ARISE.

BATT INSULATION TO BE INSTALLED ABOVE THE RESTROOM CEILING.

ALL LAY-IN CEILING PENETRATIONS TO BE HELD TIGHT TO WALLS. REFER TO 12/A141 AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR

DETAILS.

REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR HOOD SUSPENSION DETAILS.

ALL EXTERIOR BUILDING MOUNTED AND PATIO LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS PROVIDED BY TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER.

ALL EXTERIOR PARKING LOT LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS PROVIDED BY AND INSTALLED BY G.C. CAREFULLY REVIEW LIGHTING

FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET E100.

ALL EXTERIOR BUILDING MOUNTED AND PATIO LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS INSTALLED BY G.C. CAREFULLY REVIEW LIGHTING

FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET E100.

SECURITY SYSTEM

SUPPLIED

BY DESCRIPTION Count

Closed Circuit T.V. Cameras SSS

Security Monitor

72 HR Secuirty DVR

Security Alarm & Motion

Detectors

1

1

1

SSS

SSS

T.B.D.

INSTALLED

BY

SSS

SSS

SSS

T.B.D.

UTILITIES

ELEC GAS SEWER WATER

REMARKS

GC Responsible For Coordinating

Sequencing Of Prewiring With Completion

Of Interior Finishes (Gyp. Bd. Finishes)

● TVSS/UPS Battery Back Up 1 UPS

CONDUIT GUIDELINES

GC

NO FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT IS ALLOWED IN ANY AREAS WHERE IT WOULD BE EXPOSED TO VIEW,

ONLY RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT (THICK-WALL OR THIN-WALL AS NEEDED) IS ALLOWED IN THESE AREAS.

57

TECTUM PANEL SCHEDULE

QTY.

THICKNESS WIDTH LENGTH EDGE FINISH

PAINTED TO MATCH DECK 1" 24" 48" BEVELED

EXISTING STEEL DECK &

JOIST; PAINT PER A140

INFILL GYPSUM BOARD

SOFFIT TIGHT TO JOIST

AS REQUIRED

GYP. BOARD OVER

METAL STUDS; PAINT

TO MATCH DECK

GYP. BOARD

OVER METAL

STUDS: PAINT

PER A120

2

A140

SOFFIT DETAIL @ ROOF JOIST

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

2' - 0"

J-BOX FOR WIRELESS

ROUTER, REFER TO

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10' - 0" AFF

TASK LIGHTING, REFER TO E100

SECURITY CAMERA LOCATION TYP.

LIGHTING COVE, REFER TO

A141 FOR DETAILS, TYP.

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

± 9' - 0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

± 8' - 7 1/4" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

± 7' - 7 1/4" AFF

B.O. PLYWOOD CEILING

7' - 6 5/8" AFF

SUB-CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE

FINAL SPRINKLER HEAD LOCATIONS

WITH ARCHITECT VIA SHOP DRAWINGS

B.O. PLYWOOD SOFFIT

8' - 6 5/8" AFF

B.O. PLYWOOD CEILING

7' - 6 5/8" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±

8' - 7 1/4" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

± 7' - 7 1/4" AFF

E2

E1

E4

A1 A1

A1

1

A1

1

A1

2' - 9"

C2

2' - 9"

C2

1

2' - 9"

C1 C2

A1

2' - 9"

C2

2' - 9" 2' - 7 3/8"

E1

C2 C2

9

A141

B1

B1 B1

6

A126

TYP

3' - 7 3/8"

B1 B1 B1

B1

1' - 11"

B1

A1

J3 72" AFF

E1

C2

C2

(2) C1

B1

B1

C2

C2

(2) C1

(2) C1

B1

2' - 1 1/2"

FLUORESCENT STRIP

LIGHTING FOR COOLER BY

COOLER MANUFACTURER,

G.C. TO PROVIDE ROUGH-IN

TYP

6

A126

C2 C2

C2

C2

B1

(2) C1

C2

E1

C2

4' - 4 1/2"

C2

B1

J3 72" AFF

B1

2' - 9"

B1

2' - 9"

B1

EQ EQ

2' - 9"

B1

2' - 9"

B1

EQ EQ

2' - 9"

B1

1' - 5 3/4"

2' - 9"

B1

EQ EQ

C2

3

A141

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

C2

2

A140

K1

F1 F1

6

A126

TYP

F1 F1

K1

SEAMS TO ALIGN

WITH VERTICAL

SEAMS ON FACE

OF BOX, TYP OF

FOUR (4)

K1

2' - 1 1/2"

4" DIA HOLES,

TYP OF FIVE (5)

J1 72" AFF

2' - 10 1/4"

J1 72" AFF

2' - 7 7/8"

L1-10 72" AFF

K1

EQ 2' - 9 1/2"

K1

EQ

TYP

6

A126

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

K1

K1

K1

K1

E1

F1

SEAMS TO ALIGN

WITH VERTICAL

SEAMS ON FACE

OF BOX, TYP OF

THREE (3)

4" DIA HOLES,

TYP OF FOUR (4)

1

A300

L2-10 72" AFF

L1-10 72" AFF

5' - 6 3/8"

P3 108" AFF

N1-3 72" AFF

1' - 2 3/4"

N1-3 84" AFF

SPEAKER, TYP. OF

2, REFER TO

6/A141 FOR DETAIL

J1 72" AFF J1 72" AFF

2' - 10 3/8" 2' - 7 7/8"

B.O. DECK

STRCUTURE

EQ EQ

P1 152"

E4

P1 152"

10' - 3"

P1 152"

E2

P1 152"

E4

P1 152"

P1 152"

E2

LIGHTS BY EXHAUST HOOD

MANUFACTURER (TYP. OF 9)

CENTER DIFFUSERS

WITH LIGHTS, TYP.

LINE OF SUSPENDED

MENU BOARD ABOVE

BACK OF JOIST SHELF

CENTER DIFFUSERS

IN GRID OF LIGHTS

TYP. REFER TO A210

FOR DETAILS TYP.

EDGE OF SOFFIT

CENTER LIGHT FIXTURE

OVER DOOR, REFER TO

A210 TYP.

EXISTING CANOPY

CENTER FIXTURES WITH

STOREFRONT, TYP.

EXISTING AWNING

INVERTER REFER TO

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

9' - 0" AFF

SECURITY CAMERA LOCATION,

CENTER IN CEILING TILE

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

LIGHTING COVE, REFER TO

A126 FOR DETAILS, TYP.

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

24" X 24" ACCESS PANEL -

INTEXFORMS AP24X24

J3 LIGHTS TO BE CENTERED

FRONT TO BACK OVER

ISLAND TABLES

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

11/02/15

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Reflected Ceiling Plan

A140

1

A140

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

EDGE OF WALL, TYP.

CEILING PENETRATION;

HOLD AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE

TO WALL; REFER TO

PLUMBING DRAWINGS

INSTALL LAY-IN CEILING TILE

GRID AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE

TO CEILING PENETRATION

LAY-IN CEILING TILE, TYP.

LAY-IN CEILING GRID TEE, TYP.

13

A141

LAY-IN CEILING PENETRATION - PLAN DETAIL

3/4" = 1'-0"

3/4" EMT CONDUIT (3/4" IMC IF

WITHING 1-1/2" OF ROOF DECK)

3/4" EMT CONDUIT CONNECTOR

UNISTRUT P2540A WIRING NUT

P1000KO UNISTRUT

P1280W-EG ENDCAP

UNISTRUT P3184PG WIRE

WAY COVER

SQUARE OR OCTAGON J-BOX

AS REQUIRED BY FIXTURE

(COORDINATE WITH FIXTURE

MANUFACTURER)

12

A141

UNISTRUT MOUNTING DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

7

A141

UNISTRUT DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

MENU LIGHT, SEE 2/A141

FOR MOUNTING DETAIL

BEAM CLAMP, UNISTRUT, JUNCTION

BOX, AND WIRING BY G.C.

WIRING RUN WITHIN UNISTRUT

CLOSURE STRIP

POWER CABLE FROM LIGHT

FIXTURE, CLIPPED TO DOWNROD

1' - 4"

3

A141

MENU BOARD DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

HOLD EXPOSED CONDUIT

CLOSE TO DECK

P1280W-EG ENDCAP

ROUTE ELECTRICAL

CONDUCTORS THROUGH

UNISTRUT, CLOSE WITH SNAP

ON WIRE WAY COVER

MENU BOARD, SEE

THIS SHEET FOR

MOUNTING DETAIL

NOTE:

CEILING ASSEMBLY MAY

VARY PER PROJECT.

RIGID CONDUIT TO NEAREST PERIMETER WALL

TECTUM PANEL MOUNTED TO METAL

STUDS ATTACHED TO BOTTOM OF

EXISTING DECK, REFER TO 5/A141

EXISTING ROOF JOIST

UNISTRUT, ELECTRICAL FITTINGS, JUNCTION

BOXES, BEAM CLAMPS AND ALL FASTENERS

AND FITTINGS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE

INSTALLATION SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY

THE TENANT G.C. - SEE ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS AND DETAILS THIS SHEET.

LAMP, FIXTURE, CORD, DOWNROD AND

MOUNTING PLATE SUPPLIED BY TLS AND

INSTALLED BY TENANT G.C. ANY COMPONENTS

THAT ARE REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE

INSTALLATION BUT ARE NOT INCLUDED WITH

THE LAMP SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY THE G.C.

COORDINATE WITH THE TLS FOR THE DOWNROD

LENGTH FOR EACH FIXTURE.

CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE SUFFICIENT

SLACK IN THE WIRE TO DRAPE AS SHOWN.

COORDINATE FINAL APPEARANCE WITH

CHIPOTLE'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

RIGID CONDUIT TO

NEAREST PERIMETER WALL

TECTUM PANEL MOUNTED TO METAL

STUDS ATTACHED TO BOTTOM OF

EXISTING DECK, REFER TO 5/A141

EXISTING ROOF JOIST

UNISTRUT, ELECTRICAL FITTINGS, JUNCTION

BOXES, BEAM CLAMPS AND ALL FASTENERS

AND FITTINGS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE

INSTALLATION SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED

BY THE TENANT G.C. - SEE ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS AND DETAILS THIS SHEET.

LAMP, FIXTURE, CORD, DOWNROD AND

MOUNTING PLATE SUPPLIED BY TLS

AND INSTALLED BY TENANT G.C. ANY

COMPONENTS THAT ARE REWIRED FOR

A COMPLETE INSTALLATION BUT ARE

NOT INCLUDED WITH THE LAMP SHALL

BE SUPPLIED BY THE G.C. COORDINATE

WITH THE TLS FOR THE DOWNROD

LENGTH FOR EACH FIXTURE.

CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE SUFFICIENT

SLACK IN THE WIRE TO DRAPE AS SHOWN.

COORDINATE FINAL APPEARANCE WITH

CHIPOTLE'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

9

A141

KITCHEN CEILING TRANSITION

3" = 1'-0"

B.O. CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

FRP

WHITE PVC OUTSIDE CORNER

GUARD CAULK AT EDGES

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

± 9'-0" AFF

GYP. BD. CEILING

REFER TO A140

WALL BEYOND

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

BEAM CLAMP, TYPE TO

BE DETERMINED BY G.C.

METAL ROOF DECK

TECTUM WHERE NOTED ON

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

1 5/8" UNISTRUT -

TYPICAL - MOUNT WITH

OPENING FACING DOWN.

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

11

A141

CUSTOM FABRICATED SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

10

A141

PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURE

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

FRONT ISOMETRIC VIEW

(SPEAKER PANEL INSTALLATION)

6

A141

SPEAKER INSTALLATION

3/4" = 1'-0"

SUBSTRATE ASSEMBLY

OF BOX ELEMENT TO BE

CUT TO 1/8" LARGER

THAN SPEAKER BOX

DIMENSION

FINISHED WALL PANEL TO

PROVIDE CUTOUTS FOR THE

THREE DRIVERS, BY PANEL

SUPPLIER

NOTES:

1.

SPEAKERS AND WIRING PROVIDED BY MUSIC

SYSTEMS SUPPLIER; INSTALLED BY G.C.

2.

CONDUIT FOR SOUND SYSTEM PROVIDED AND

INSTALLED BY G.C.

3.

SOUND SYSTEM EQUIPMENT PROVIDED AND

INSTALLED BY MUSIC SYSTEM SUPPLIER.

4.

G.C. TO FOLLOW SPEAKER LAYOUT FOR

ROUTING CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRES IF

REQUIRED BY CODE. REFER TO 'CHIPOTLE

STEREO GUIDE' FOR MORE INFORMATION.

1' - 3 1/2" 1' - 1 3/8"

2-1/2" LONG SCREW

FLUORESCENT FIXTURE,

REFER TO E100

MALE/FEMALE CONNECTOR

3 5/8"

2 1/8"

RUN HARDWIRE CONNECTION

TO J-BOX IN CEILING, NO

EXPOSED WIRING

PROVIDE PLYWOOD

BLOCKING

GYP. BOARD CEILING

HARDWIRE BOX

2-1/2" x 3" BENT ALUM.

PAINT "MOONLIT SNOW"

BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER

2 1/2" LONG SCREW PROVIDE PLYWOOD BLOCKING

FLUORESCENT FIXTURE,

REFER TO E100

2-1/2" X 3" BENT. ALUM.,

PAINT "MOONLIT SNOW"

BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER

GYP. BD. CEILING

2

A141

MENU BOARD / ACCENT LIGHT DETAILS

3" = 1'-0"

HARDWARE

BOX BEYOND

1

A141

SPEAKER BOX

MOUNTED TO

REAR SIDE OF

SUBSTRATE

W/ INVERTED

L-CLIPS

MENU - SCREW PATTERN PLAN

3/4" = 1'-0"

EQ

5

A141

TECTUM DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

3" 10 1/2"

4

A141

EXISTING ROOF DECK

10 1/2" 10 1/2"

8

A141

TYP. UNISTRUT MOUNTING DETAIL

1 1/2" = 1'-0"

10 1/2" 3"

1" THICK CEMENTITIOUS WOOD

FIBER ACOUSTICAL PANELS

5 ROWS OF 2 1/2" 18. GA. MIN. METAL STUDS WITH SOLID

TRACKS AT ENDS SPACED AS SHOWN - FASTEN TO BOTTOM

FLUTES OF METAL DECK WITH #10-16 TEK SCREWS AT 16"

O.C. MAX ONLY IN AREAS TO RECEIVE TECTUM PANELS.

OUTER ROWS OF STUDS MUST BE TURNED WITH OPENING

INWARD AS SHOWN. PAINT ALL METAL STUDS TO MATCH

CEILING, REFER TO A140 FOR COLOR

EXISTING ROOF JOISTS

4' - 0"

FIELD VERIFY JOIST SPACING

BLOCKING AS REQUIRED

GYPSUM BOARD CEILING

EQ

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

SPEAKER DIMENSIONS REAR ISOMETRIC VIEW

(SPEAKER ATTACHMENT TO PANEL)

ORDERING KITCHEN

#9 ROUND HEAD WOOD SCREW (VERIFY).

SCREW HEAD MUST BE LESS THAN 3/8"

DIAMETER. 1" MIN. EMBEDMENT INTO

BLOCKING. REFER TO 1/141 FOR DETAIL.

MENU BOARD PANELS AND ALUMINUM

EXTRUSION BY TENANT'S MENU BOARD

SUPPLIER

4

A141

MENU BOARD BLOCKING DETAIL

3" = 1'-0"

2" 1' - 1 1/2"

2' - 7"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 5"

1"

1' - 1 1/2"

2' - 7"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 5"

1"

1' - 1 1/2"

2' - 7"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 5"

1"

1' - 1 1/2"

2' - 7"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 5"

1"

1' - 1 1/2"

3' - 8 1/2"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 1' - 1 1/2" 5"

1"

1' - 1 1/2"

3' - 8 1/2"

PANEL

1' - 1 1/2" 1' - 1 1/2" 2"

10"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

EDGE OF WALL, TYP.

#8 X 1" PAN HEAD

METAL SCREWS,

SCREW HEAD MUST

BE LESS THAN 3/8"

DIAMETER, TYP.

MENU BOARD PANELS

AND ALUMINUM

EXTRUSION BY TENANT'S

MENU BOARD SUPPLIER

LENGTH OF MENU

BOARD LIGHTS TO

BE CENTERED ON

THE LENGTH OF

THE MENU BOARD

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Ceiling Details

Checked:

EH, EW

A141

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

SPIRAL DUCTWORK,

REFER TO MECHANICAL

DRAWINGS AND A210

FOR DETAILS

2

A142

UNISTRUT PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

ATTACH UNISTRUT TO

BOTTOM OF TOP CHORD

OF STRUCTURE REFER TO

A141 FOR DETAILS

PULL POWER FROM OVER

JOIST SHELF @ BOTTOM OF

TOP CHORD IN RIGID CONDUIT

TO FEED UNISTRUT. CONFIRM

WITH CM AND ARCHITECT.

1

A142

TECTUM PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

EQ 2 EQ 2

ATTACH TECTUM TO

BOTTOM OF METAL

STUDS

CENTER TECTUM PANELS

INBETWEEN EXISTING

ROOF JOISTS, TYP. REFER

TO 5/A141

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Unistrut and Tectum

Plans

A142

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

HVAC EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

Exhaust Fans & Curbs

Make Up Air Unit & Curbs

Roof Top Units & Curbs

Test & Balance System

SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY

RTU/HS GC

HS

RTU

TB

GC

GC

-

GENERAL NOTES

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

ELEC

SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZE OF STRUCTURAL ROOF REINFORCEMENTS.

SEE MECHANICAL PLANS FOR ROOF TOP EQUIPMENT.

COORDINATE ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS, FLASHING, AND REPAIR W/ CHIPOTLE CONSTRUCTION

MANAGER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.

DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE CENTER OF THE PENETRATION AND ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ROOFING

CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST AS NECESSARY IN FIELD. CONTACT ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS FOR ANY

MAJOR MODIFICATIONS TO LAYOUT.

JOISTS FOR SHELL BUILDING WERE DESIGNED FOR THE RTU WEIGHTS AND PLACEMENT EXHIBITED.

IF LOCATION OR ORIENTATION OF A UNIT MUST CHANGE, NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY.

SEE M300 FOR PENETRATION DETAILS AT RTUS AND THE EXHAUST FAN.

PROVIDE INSULATED CURBS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT IN EXPOSED DECK AREA ONLY.

GAS

UTILITY

WATER

SEWER

REMARKS

Curb provided by HS, installed by GC

Curb provided by Trane, installed by GC

Curb provided by Trane, installed by GC

Provide HVAC Test & Balance per Tenant's National Account Program.

NOTE: UTILITIES BY GC, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.

EPDM PIPE FLASHING

TPO POLYURETHANE

CAULK (BEADED)

EPDM SEALING

MASTIC

CLAMPING RING

EPDM LAP CAULK

(BEADED)

EPDM PRE-MOLDED

PIPE BOOT

ANCHOR DISC AND

ACCEPTABLE

FASTENER (NOTE 1)

ROOF INSULATION

ROUND ROOF

PROJECTION

EPDM LAP CEMENT

EPDM TAPE

PRIMER/WASH

EPDM BONDING

CEMENT (FOR

ADHERED SPEC. ONLY)

NOTE:

1.

WITH MECHANICALLY FASTENED OR BALLASTED SPECIFICATIONS, MEMBRANE MUST BE MECHANICALLY

ATTACHED WITH 2" (50 mm) ANCHOR DISC AND ACCEPTABLE FASTENERS (MINIMUM OF 4 PER PIPE).

2.

DO NOT OVERLAP THE FLANGES FROM ADJACENT PIPE FLASHINGS.

3.

ANY SEAM UNDER BOOT FLANGE TO BE TREATED AS T-JOINT.

4.

BOTH SURFACES TO BE MATED MUST BE CLEANED WITH TAPE PRIMER/WASH. EPDM TAPE

PRIMER/WASH MUST BE COMPLETELY DRY AND TACK FREE BEFORE APPLYING EPDM LAP CEMENT.

2

A150

BOOT DETAIL

1/2" = 1'-0"

HVAC

TREATED WOOD NAILER

ANGULAR RING SHANK NAIL 12" O.C.

24 GA COUNTER FLASHING

GROMMETED FASTENER 12" O.C.

VERTIBOND ADHESIVE

FASTENER AND PLATE 12" 0.C.

ADHESIVE

HOT AIR WELD

INSULATION*

SINGLE - PLY MEMBRANE

SUBSTRATE

NOTES:

1. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS.

2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS.

3. USE PREFABRICATED OUTSIDE CORNERS.

4. INSULATION MUST BE SECURELY FASTENED.

5. *GLASS - FACED POLYISO INSULATION IS OPTIONAL AND MAY NOT BE REQUIRED ON EVERY PROJECT.

IF INSULATION IS NOT REQUIRED, THE MEMBRANE MUST BE ADHERED TO AN APPROVED SURFACE.

3

A150

CURB FLASHING

1/2" = 1'-0"

CU-2

CU-1

TENANT LEASE

LINE

LINE OF DEMISING

WALL BELOW

SIGN BY SIGN

VENDOR BELOW

EXISTING

GUTTER AND

DOWNSPOUTS

VTR, SEE P110

ROOF HYDRANT,

SEE P100

22' - 2 1/2"

EXISTING METAL COPING

VTR, SEE M100

HOOD BELOW ROOF

RTU-1

26' - 5 3/4"

ICE MACHINE

REMOTE

CONDENSER

EF-1

26' - 6 5/8"

12' - 5 5/8"

11' - 8 1/2"

RTU-2

EF-2

MAU-1

21' - 10 1/2"

EXISTING FULLY ADHERED

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE

(PVC) ROOFING SYSTEM AND

MECHANICALLY FASTENED RIGID

INSULATION

26' - 9 1/4"

PROVIDE TAPERED

INSULATION

CRICKET AT ALL

EQUIPMENT CURBS

VTR, SEE P110

EXISTING CANOPY

BELOW

10'-0" RADIUS CLEARANCE

FOR FRESH AIR INTAKES

EXISTING METAL JOISTS BELOW,

REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

EXISTING CANOPY

BELOW

1

A150

ROOF PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

EXISTING METAL COPING

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Architectural Roof Plan

SIGNS BY SIGN

VENDOR, TYP.

A150

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

T.O. COPING

23'-0" AFF

EXISTING METAL

COPING

T.O. COPING

18'-10" AFF

EXISTING BRICK

SOLDIER COURSE

60" MEDALLION SIGN,

COORDINATE BLOCKING

FOR SIGN W/ SIGN VENDOR

NOTE: SIGNAGE IS SHOWN

ONLY FOR PLACEMENT

AND SCALE. ALL SIGNAGE

FOR REVIEW UNDER

SEPARATE PERMIT, NOT

PART OF THIS PERMIT SET.

EXISTING CANOPY

BEYOND

EXISTING BRICK

TENANT LEASE LINE

T.O. COPING

23'-0" AFF

T.O. COPING

19'-6" AFF

EXISTING BRICK

EXISTING CANOPY

6" VINYL ADDRESS LETTERS,

LOCATION AND COLOR TO BE

SPECIFIED BY THE FIRE MARSHAL

EXTERIOR LIGHT BY TENANT G.C.

EXISTING DARK BRONZE

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

FINISHED FLOOR

0'-0" AFF

T.O. COPING

23'-0" AFF

EXISTING BRICK

CW-3 SIGN, COORDINATE

BLOCKING FOR SIGN W/

SIGN VENDOR

NOTE: SIGNAGE IS SHOWN

ONLY FOR PLACEMENT

AND SCALE. ALL SIGNAGE

FOR REVIEW UNDER

SEPARATE PERMIT, NOT

PART OF THIS PERMIT SET.

EXISTING CANOPY

EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHT

EXISTING DARK BRONZE

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

EXISTING CMU

RAILING , SEE A101

FOR DETAILS

FINISHED FLOOR

0'-0" AFF

9' - 6"

3

A200

EXT ELEV - NORTH

1/4" = 1'-0"

2

A200

EXT ELEV - EAST

1/4" = 1'-0"

EXISTING CMU

FINISHED FLOOR

0'-0" AFF

1

A200

EXT ELEV - SOUTH

1/4" = 1'-0"

655

EQ EQ

EQ

EXISTING DARK BRONZE ALUMINUM

SIDE ENTRY DOORS, WOOD HANDLES

BY CHIPOTLE MILLWORK SUPPLIER

EQ

TENANT LEASE LINE

T.O. COPING

17'-0" AFF

EXISTING DOWNSPOUT,

AND GUTTER

EXISTING CMU

EXTERIOR LIGHT

BY TENANT G.C.

EXISTING 3'-6"

HOLLOW METAL

SERVICE DOOR

DOOR BUZZER BY TENANT G.C.

REMOTE CO2 FILLER, VERIFY

LOCATION WITH CHIPOTLE CM

EXTERIOR LIGHT BY TENANT G.C.

EXISTING METAL COPING

CW-3 SIGN, COORDINATE

BLOCKING FOR SIGN WITH SIGN

VENDOR

NOTE: SIGNAGE IS SHOWN

ONLY FOR PLACEMENT

AND SCALE. ALL SIGNAGE

FOR REVIEW UNDER

SEPARATE PERMIT, NOT

PART OF THIS PERMIT SET.

EXISTING BRICK SOLDIER COURSE

EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHT

EXISTING DARK BRONZE ALUMINUM

MAIN ENTRY DOORS, WOOD HANDLES

BY CHIPOTLE MILLWORK SUPPLIER

EXISTING DARK BRONZE ALUMINUM

STOREFRONT WINDOWS

GENERAL NOTES

1.

REFER TO EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS THIS SHEET FOR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE LOCATIONS,

SIZES & DESCRIPTIONS.

2.

EXTERIOR SIGNAGE PROVIDED BY TSV AND INSTALLED BY TSV. GC TO MAKE FINAL

CONNECTION.

3.

METAL CANOPY AND ROOF SCREEN ARE AVAILABLE FROM AMERICAN PRODUCTS,

INC. (API), PHONE: (813) 925-0144, E-MAIL: [email protected]

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

EXISTING METAL

COPING

T.O. COPING

18'-10" AFF

EXISTING BRICK

SOLDIER COURSE

EXISTING BRICK INFILL

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Exterior Elevations

A200

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

B.O. PLYWOOD CEILING

7'-6 5/8" AFF

AC PLYWOOD

RESTROOM DOOR

BLACK RUBBER BASE

10

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. PLYWOOD CEILING

7'-6 5/8" AFF

AC PLYWOOD

CHILD HIGH CHAIR

RESTROOM DOOR BEYOND

BLACK RUBBER BASE

9

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. DECK

VARIES

TECTUM PANELS,

REFER TO A142 FOR

MOUNTING DETAILS

LIGHT FIXTURE

SUSPENDED LAB

LIGHT, TYP.

PENDANT LIGHT, TYP.

BAR HEIGHT TABLE WITH

MUSHROOM STOOLS

TABLES AND CHAIRS

TECTUM PANELS, REFER

TO A142 FOR MOUNTING

DETAILS, TYP.

SPIRAL DUCT,

SEE MECHANICAL

DRAWINGS

C.O. SPIRAL DUCT

13'-0" AFF

T.O. PLYWOOD BOX

12'-0" AFF

ARTWORK

LIGHT FIXTURE

ARTWORK

A/C PLYWOOD

BEYOND

CHEVRON TABLE

WITH MOUNTED

GOOSENECK LIGHTS

AND MARSHMALLOW

STOOLS

BLACK RUBBER BASE

8

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

JOIST SHELF REFER TO

2/A140 FOR DETAIL

DIFFUSER, SEE MECH

DRAWINGS

MENU BOARD LIGHT

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

MENU BOARD

BANQUETTE

SEATING, TABLES

AND CHAIRS, TYP.

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

6

A210

2

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. DECK

VARIES

TECTUM PANELS, REFER

TO A142 FOR

MOUNTING DETAILS,

TYP.

T.O. PLYWOOD BOX

12'-0" AFF

PENDANT LIGHT,

TYP.

BANQUETTE SEATING

TABLE AND CHAIRS

4

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

C.O. SPIRAL DUCT

13'-0" AFF

SPIRAL DUCT, SEE

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

A/C PLYWOOD

BLACK RUBBER BASE

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

JOIST SHELF REFER TO

2/A140 FOR DETAIL

DIFFUSER, SEE MECH

DRAWINGS

MENU BOARD LIGHT

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

MENU BOARD

BANQUETTE SEATING,

TABLES AND CHAIRS

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

TECTUM PANELS,

REFER TO A142 FOR

MOUNTING DETAILS

JOIST SHELF REFER TO

2/A140 FOR DETAIL

DIFFUSER, REFER TO

MECH DRAWINGS

MENU HOLDER

MENU BOARD LIGHT

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

MENU BOARD

CERAMIC TILE REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

POLYCRETE BASE

B.O. DECK

VARIES

TECTUM PANELS, REFER TO

A142 FOR MOUNTING SETAILS

LIGHT FIXTURE

SUSPENDED LAB

LIGHT, TYP.

PENDANT LIGHT, TYP.

BAR HEIGHT TABLE WITH

MUSHROOM STOOLS

TABLES AND

CHAIRS, TYP.

TRASH ENCLOSURE

5

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. DECK

VARIES

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

AC PLYWOOD

T.O. PLYWOOD BOX

12'-0" AFF

ARTWORK LIGHT

FIXTURE BEYOND

SPEAKER, TYP. OF 2,

REFER TO 6/A141

ARTWORK PANEL

BEYOND

UNTENSIL COUNTER

TRASH ENCLOSURE

CHEVRON TABLE WITH

MOUNTED GOOSENECK

LIGHTS AND

MARSHMALLOW STOOLS

BLACK RUBBER BASE

3

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

TECTUM PANELS, REFER

TO A142 FOR MOUNTING

DETAILS, TYP.

C.O. SPIRAL DUCT

13'-0" AFF

SPIRAL DUCT, SEE

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

GYP. BD.

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

MENU ASSEMBLY

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

POLY-CRETE BASE

1

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. DECK

VARIES

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

PENDANT LIGHT, TYP.

BANQUETTE TABLES

AND CHAIRS

B.O. DECK

VARIES

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE, REFER

TO A140

EXISTING CLEAR

ANODIZED

ALUMINUM

STOREFRONT

GYP BD

EXISTING COLUMN,

PAINT TO MATCH DECK

EXISTING CLEAR

ANODIZED

ALUMINUM MAIN

ENTRY DOORS, WOOD

HANDLES BY TENANT

MILLWORK SUPPLIER

7

A210

INT ELEV - DINING

1/4" = 1'-0"

31

B.O. DECK

VARIES

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE,

REFER TO A140

JOIST SHELF,

REFER TO 2/A140

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

REFER TO A225

FOR DETAILS

POS COUNTER

RICHLITE PANELS

POLY-CRETE BASE

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

TECTUM PANELS, REFER

TO A142 FOR MOUNTING

DETAILS, TYP.

LIGHT FIXTURE

GYP. BD.

EXISTING CLEAR

ANODIZED ALUMINUM

STOREFRONT

TRASH

ENCLOSURE

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

BLACK RUBBER BASE

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

B.O. DECK

VARIES

PAINT EXISTING

STRUCTURE, REFER TO A140

LIGHT FIXTURE

EXISTING COLUMN, PAINT

TO MATCH DECK, TYP.

EXISTING CLEAR ANODIZED

ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

GYP BD

EXISTING CLEAR ANODIZED

ALUMINUM SIDE ENTRY DOORS,

WOOD HANDLES BY TENANT

MILLWORK SUPPLIER

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

BLACK RUBBER BASE

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

TECTUM PANELS,

REFER TO A142 FOR

MOUNTING DETAILS

SPIRAL DUCT, SEE

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

JOIST SHELF REFER

TO 2/A140 FOR

DETAIL

C.O. SPIRAL DUCT

13'-0" AFF

ALUM. PLATE ENDCAP

REFER TO A120 FOR DETAIL

CERAMIC TILE REFER

TO A120 FOR DETAIL

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

MENU BOARD

MENU BOARD LIGHT

GYP. BD. BEYOND

LICENSE AND PERMIT

FRAME BEYOND

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

BEYOND

BLACK RUBBER BASE BEYOND

POLY-CRETE BASE

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

Revisions:

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Elevations - Interior

Dining

A210

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

3/4" WHITE MEL. SHELVES

WITH 16" STANDARDS AND

36" BRACKETS, SECURE OFFICE

SHELVING THROUGH STUD

WITH 2 1/2" WOOD SCREWS

PROVIDE BLOCKING BEHIND

ALL SHELVING, SEE SHEET

A115, GENERAL NOTE 13

(1) UNDERCOUNTER WIRE

SHELVES FOR DSL

EQUIPMENT BY TENANT

15" MONITOR AND SERVER

INSTALLED BY TENANT

NOTE: REFER TO

ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR

POS OUTLET LOCATIONS

WALL BASE, REFER TO A120

INVERTER

ABOVE, SEE

ELECTRICAL

PLANS

FRP

POLYCRETE

BASE

FRP

POLYCRETE

BASE

HAND SINK, REFER

TO 15/A220 FOR

DETAILS

45

22

17

A220

TYP ELEV - OFFICE SHELVING

1/2" = 1'-0"

OPEN

BEYOND

6

13

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

9

A220

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

OPEN BEYOND

35.1

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

31.1

FRP

OPEN BEYOND

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

6

A126

OPEN BEYOND

12

11

10

24.3

B.O. CEILING TILE

REFER TO A140

STEREO: HI/FI

RECEIVER BY TENANT

COLOR LCD SECURITY

MONITOR BY TENANT W/

VMP LCD-1 MOUNTING ARM

SAFE

PRINTER/FAX/COPIER

PROVIDED BY TENANT

1 1/2" PLAN COUNTERTOP

WITH WHITE METAL BRACKETS

NOTE:

COUNTERTOP AND SHELVING

PROVIDED BY TEM, INSTALLED BY G.C..

2 DRAWER LOCKABLE FILE

CABINET BY TENANT

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

ALUM. PLATE JAMB

AT OPENING, REFER

TO 3/A126

FRP

STAILESS STEEL

SHROUD, REFER TO

FINISH PLAN

POLYCRETE BASE

OPEN BEYOND

37.1

37

9

12

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

PROVIDE TOP CORNER AT TRANSITION

FROM GYP BD CEILING TO FRP WALL

12

11

10

24.3

6

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

EXISTING STRUCTURE, REFER TO

STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

JOIST SHELF, REFER

TO 2/A140

DIFFUSER, REFER TO

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

MENU ASSEMBLY

35.1

47

33

22.3

23

22.2

22

6

A126

DIAMOND PLATE PANELS ON

COOLER WALL UP TO 48" AFF

POLYCRETE BASE

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

POLYCRETE BASE

16

A220

TYP. ELEV - POS

3/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

WATER FILTER ABOVE,

REFER TO PLUMBING

DRAWINGS

FRP

STAILESS STEEL

SHROUD, REFER TO

FINISH PLAN

POLYCRETE BASE

11

A220

8

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

35.3

31.1

PANIC BUTTON, CONFIRM LOCATION WITH

CHIPOTLE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

CUP DISPENSER SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED

BY DELFIELD, MOUNT CENTERED LEFT TO

RIGHT IN THIS COMPARTMENT

PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR CASH DRAWER

NOTE: REFER TO

ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR

POS OUTLET LOCATIONS

CASH DROP BOXES

ALUM. PLATE JAMB AT

OPENING, REFER TO 3/A126

6

35.1

7

32

38

16.1

JOIST SHELF, REFER

TO 2/A140

8

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

EXISTING STRUCTURE, REFER TO STRUCTURAL

DRAWINGS

STAINLESS STEEL SHROUD,

REFER TO FINISH PLAN

DIFFUSER, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

FRP

MENU ASSEMBLY

ALUM. PLATE JAMB

AND HEADER AT

OPENING, REFER TO

3/A126

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

POLYCRETE BASE

1.1

1

1

2

3

7

9

8.2

8.1

49

5

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

7.3

30

37.1

37

9

29.1

29.4

29.2

29

32

32.2

WALL FINISH VARIES,

REFER TO A120

FIRST AID KIT, CONFIRM

LOCATION WITH CHIPOTLE

CM PRIOR TO INSTALLATION

PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER

TANK SOAP DISPENSER

HAND SINK, INSTALL TWO (2)

SCREWS WITH FINISH

GROMMETS INTO BACKSPLASH.

SCREWS TO BE 1/4" x 3 1/2"

STAINLESS STEEL LAG BOLT WITH

OVAL HEAD AND STAINLESS

STEEL TRIM WASHER. PROVIDE

BLOCKING AS REQUIRED AT EACH

SCREW LOCATION

NOTE: REFER TO SHEET

A002 FOR ALL REQUIRED

ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING

HEIGHTS. CONTACT

ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY

WITH ANY DISCREPANCIES

15

A220

EQ

6"

11 1/2"

EQ

TYP ELEV - HAND SINK

1/2" = 1'-0"

6

A126

41.1

41.2

39

2

40

2

3

14

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

SEE ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS FOR

DETAILS

POLYCRETE BASE

INVERTER ABOVE, SEE

ELECTRICAL PLANS

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

OPEN BEYOND

30

29.1

29

REAR ENTRY DOOR

ELECTRICAL PANEL

LOCATION, SEE

ELECTRICAL PLANS

29

30

29.2

22

FRP

OFFICE DOOR

POLYCRETE BASE

45

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

FRP

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

HOOD ABOVE

LIGHT FIXTURE

10

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

PROVIDE TOP CORNER AT TRANSITION

FROM GYP BD CEILING TO FRP WALL

17

16

OPEN BEYOND

10

26

25

32

32.2

POLYCRETE BASE

6

A126

OPEN BEYOND

12

11

10

24.3

33

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

7

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

6

A126

EXISTING STRUCTURE, REFER TO STRUCTURAL

DRAWINGS

LAUNCHPORT WALLSTATION, REFER TO 13/A126 AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS

DIFFUSER, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

HOOD ABOVE

23

22.2

24

22

16

17

BEHIND

18

19

14

13.1

17

BEHIND

13

15

11

10

24.1

2

1.1

1

POLYCRETE BASE

4

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. LAY-IN CEILING TILE

10'-0" AFF

OPEN BEYOND

35.3

ALUM. PLATE JAMB AT

OPENING, REFER TO 3/A126

DIAMOND PLATE PANELS ON

COOLER WALL UP TO 48" AFF

POLYCRETE BASE

GYP BD

JOIST SHELF, REFER

TO 2/A140

MENU ASSEMBLY

HAND SINK, REFER

TO 15/A220 FOR

DETAIL

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

RICHLITE WAINSCOT

BEYOND

BLACK RUBBER BASE

BEYOND

6

A126

DELFIELD SERVING

LINE UNIT

1.1

1

11

12

OPEN BEYOND

25

10

26

47

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

REFER TO ELECTRICAL

DRAWINGS FOR

DETAILS

POLYCRETE BASE

39

41.1

41.2

2

7

9

8.2

8.1

49

OPEN BEYOND

11

13

13.1

15

HOOD ABOVE

11

10

LIGHT FIXTURE

24.1

17

2

1.1

31

ORDERING BEYOND

1

6

1

2

3

40

41.1

2

3

39

41.2

6

A126

B.O. GYP. BD. SOFFIT

±10'-0" AFF

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±9'-0" AFF

CERAMIC TILE, REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

ALUM. PLATE JAMB

AND HEADER AT

OPENING, REFER TO

3/A126

REFER TO 15/A220

FOR DETAILS

POLYCRETE BASE

33

3

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

2

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

1

A220

INT ELEV - KITCHEN

1/4" = 1'-0"

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Elevations - Interior

Kitchen

A220

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

ADJACENT

TENANT

(N.I.C.)

10" 1' - 5"

5

1' - 7"

3

9

14

MEN

111

3

2 A230 4

1

2' - 0"

MIN.

1' - 6 5/8"

1' - 0"

MIN.

1A

1B

7

1C

RESTROOM ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

ITEM # DESCRIPTION

1A Grab Bar - 36in

1B Grab Bar - 42in

1C Grab Bar - 18in

3 Mirror

5 Tank Type Soap Dispenser

7 Recessed Toilet Paper Dispenser

ASI

MANUF

ASI

ASI

ASI

ASI

ASI

MODEL

3501-36

3501-42

3501-18

0600B 18x36

O345

0031

QTY

2

2

2

2

2

2

PROVIDED

BY

INSTALLED

BY

WA

WA

WA

WA

WA

WA

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

8 Utility Shelf

9 Recessed Convertible Paper Towel

Dispenser and Waste Receptacle,

Recess Mounted in Wall

12 Napkin Disposal - Recessed

14 Restroom Hand Sink

14.1

Restroom Hand Sink Faucet

ASI

Bobrick

ASI

Kohler

T&S

0692

B-3944

0473

K-2084

EC-3102-TMV-LF-05

1

2

1

2

2

WA

WA

WA

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

UTILITY

ELEC GAS WATER SEWER MOUNTING HEIGHT

36" AFF to Top of Grasping Surface

36" AFF to Top of Grasping Surface

40" AFF to Centerline of Bottom Return

REMARKS

Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall

Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall

Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall

Bottom Edge of Reflecting Surface at 40" AFF Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall

42" AFF to Bottom of Unit

29" AFF to Top of Unit

48" AFF To Top Of Shelf

Bottom of Unit at Top of Base, Bottom of

Dispenser to be at 40" AFF, Recess Mounting In

Wall

Top of Rough Opening @ 29" AFF

Recess Mounted in Wall - Rough Opening: 6

1/4"W X 12 1/4"H X 3 3/8"D

Top of Rough Opening: 29 1/4" AFF

Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall -

Provide in Women's Only

Rough Opening: 16"W x 54 3/4"H x 4" D.

Provide Plywood Blocking to Mount to Wall

Recess Mounted in Wall - Rough Opening: 11

1/4"W X 15 3/4"H X 4"D

● To Be Furnished With .5 GPM Aerator

Installed. Thermostatic mixing valve is also included.

GENERAL NOTES

1.

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF STUD UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTES.

2.

REFER TO A126 FOR TILE NOTES.

3.

ALL ACCESSORIES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY AMERICAN SPECIALTIES

INC OR TENANT APPROVED EQUIVALENT UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE.

PROVIDE SOLID FRT WOOD BLOCKING AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION PER

MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SEE SHEET A002 FOR ACCESSIBILITY

GUIDELINES & MOUNTING HEIGHT REQUIREMENTS.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

NOTE: ALL

DIMENSIONS TO

FACE OF STUD

9

11"

8

5

6

A230

8

7

WOMEN

112

1A

14

3

5

1C

7

12

1B

2' - 0"

MIN.

1' - 0"

MIN.

1' - 6 5/8"

9

A230

ENLARGED PLAN

1/2" = 1'-0"

1/4" ALUMINUM RAISED

BORDER, SATIN

HORIZONTAL FINISH

RAISED SYMBOL, SATIN

HORIZONTAL FINISH

FIELD, COLOR BY TENANT

DOOR FRAME

RAISED FONT: GOTHAM,

SATIN HORIZONTAL FINISH

CLEAR, RASTER STYLE BRAIL

10

A230

TYP WASHROOM SIGN

3" = 1'-0"

(FOR BOTH MEN AND WOMEN)

AS REQUIRED PER THE LOCAL JURISDICTION

6

A126

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

5

POLYCRETE BASE

9

3

14

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

1C

1A

12

8

A230

WOMEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

7

6

A126

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE

1C

1B

1A

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

1B

7

POLYCRETE BASE

4

A230

MEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE

1C

1A

1B

7

12

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

8

POLYCRETE BASE

7

A230

WOMEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

3

5

14

3

A230

MEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

9

1A

1B

7

POLYCRETE BASE

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

8

1A

POLYCRETE BASE

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

POLYCRETE BASE

6

A230

WOMEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

6

A126

14

3

5

9

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE

2

A230

MEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

1C

1B

7

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±7'-7 1/4" AFF

CERAMIC TILE; REFER

TO FINISH PLAN

6

A126

B.O. GYP. BD. CEILING

±8'-7 1/4" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE

14

5

9

POLYCRETE BASE

5

A230

WOMEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

1

A230

MEN'S ROOM - ELEV

1/4" = 1'-0"

POLYCRETE BASE

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Restroom Details

A230

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

#12 X 1-1/2" STAINLESS

PHILLIPS HEAD #3 SCREWS.

SCREW HEADS ARE TO BE

FLUSH WITH PANEL FACES.

INSTALLED 1" FROM EDGE OF

PANEL IN ALL DIRECTIONS, TYP.

T.O. PLYWOOD BOX

12'-0" AFF

PLYWOOD SHEATHING

'AC' PLYWOOD BY

MILLWORK PROVIDER

B.O. PLYWOOD SOFFIT

8'-6 5/8" AFF

B.O. SOFFIT FRAMING

7'-8" AFF

B.O. PLYWOOD SOFFIT

7'-6 5/8" AFF

LIGHT FIXTURE, TYP.

LIGHT FIXTURE ALIGN WITH

PLYWOOD SOFFIT LIP, TYP.

'AC' PLYWOOD PANELS

BY MILLWORK PROVIDER

'AC' PLYWOOD PANELS BEYOND

SODA SYSTEM DISPENSER

DINING

1' - 8 3/4"

FRAMING

HOLD SUBSTRATE 1/2" MIN.

BELOW THE TOP OF THE

FINISH 'AC' PLYWOOD

FRAMING

1' - 0"

FINISH

BLACK RUBBER BASE

1

A300

TYP UTENSIL SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Checked:

EH, EW

Contents:

Building Sections

A300

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

BP, BC,

NB

Project No.

CMG457

Contents:

Perspectives

Checked:

EH, EW

A400

Date of Last Print:

11/02/15

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2014

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

FLOOR DRAIN

2

S100

MOP SINK, SEE ARCH.

FLOOR DRAIN

3

S100

FLOOR SINK LOCATION

COORDINATE W/ FLOOR

PLAN & PLUMBING PLAN

(TYP.)

FLOOR DRAIN

3

S100

FLOOR SINK LOCATION

COORDINATE W/ FLOOR

PLAN & PLUMBING PLAN

(TYP.)

FLOOR DRAIN

4" CONC. SLAB ON GRADE

W/ 6x6 - W2.1/2.1 WWF.

TOP OF SLAB EL. 100'-0"

FLOOR DRAIN

TYP. CONTROL/

CONSTRUCTION JT.

SEE 1/S100

FLOOR SINK LOCATION

COORDINATE W/ FLOOR

PLAN & PLUMBING PLAN

(TYP.)

SEE FLOOR

SLAB NOTE #5

SLAB PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

ENTRY SLAB

DEPRESSION,

SEE ARCH.

4" HIGH CONC.

CURB W/ 4x4

W1.4/1.4 W.W.F.

W/ CHAMFER OR

ROUNDED EDGE

3/4"

EL. SEE PLAN t

1

2

6" 6" t

TYPICAL FLOOR CONSTRUCTION JOINT

SAWED JOINT TO

BE FILLED WITH

JOINT FILLER

1/8" t/4

CUT EVERY OTHER WIRE

IN MESH AT JOINT

EL. SEE PLAN

TYPICAL FLOOR CONTROL JOINT

EXIST. SLAB

ON GRADE

SECTION

TRENCH DRAIN BY

PLUMBING

CONTRACTOR

SL. DN.

(2) #5 CONT.

SEE PLUMBING

DETAIL

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

SEE PLAN

1' - 2"

1

1

3/4" = 1'-0"

3/4" = 1'-0"

1

2

3

EXIST. CONC.

SLAB

ROUGHEN EXISTING

SLAB ON GRADE OR

USE SIKA DUR 32 LPL

EPOXY BONDING AGENT

BELOW CURB.

SECTION 033000 - CAST_IN_PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1

DESCRIPTION

A. Basic specification: Perform work of this Section according to ACI 301_05, "Specifications for Structural

Concrete for Buildings", except as specifically modified herein. Numbers in parentheses (0.00) indicate a related paragraph of ACI 301.

B. Work included: All cast_in_place concrete work shown on the Drawings and required by these

Specifications. Allow for the installation of cast_in items furnished under other Sections. Install anchor bolts and embeds for structural steel. Provide and install grout under steel column base plates and beam bearing areas.

C. Provide concrete pads, piers, curbs, and bases required for equipment of all trades. Coordinate dimensions and details with requirements of equipment being supplied, prior to placing concrete.

D. Cooperate with other trades who will provide and install items of work (sleeves, piping, conduit, inserts, etc.) to be cast in the concrete. Place no concrete until all such items are in place.

E. Inspection and testing services required by this Section to establish mix designs are to be performed by an agency retained by the Owner (1.6.4).

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference standards:

1.

ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

2.

"Placing Reinforcing Bars", CRSI & WCRSI Recommended Practices.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval the name of the agency proposed for the required inspection and testing services.

B. Submit a mix design for each class of concrete required (1.6.3). Concrete proportions shall be established on the basis of previous field experience or trial mixtures (4.2.3).

C. Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing. Indicate strength, size, and details of all bar reinforcing, and style and specification of all welded wire fabric (3.1.1).

D. Submit test data for aggregates proposed for use, indicating source and compliance with specification requirements. Date of test to be no more than 90 days prior to submittal. Resubmit in advance of any

E.

proposed change in source.

Submit product literature for admixtures and curing compounds proposed for use.

F. Submit reports of all required testing and inspection.

1.4

FIELD REFERENCE MANUALS

A. Provide at least one copy of the ACI Field Reference Manual, SP_15 (1.3.3), and one copy of CRSI’s “Placing

Reinforcing Bars”, in the field office at all times.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1

MATERIALS

A. Cement (4.2.1.1): Portland Cement, ASTM C150, Type I. Type II or III (high early strength) may be used with written approval and at the Contractor's expense. All cement for concrete exposed to view to be from the same mill.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Aggregates: ASTM C33, (4.2.1.2). Use size no. 57. Conform to ODOT Material Specifications 703.02.

D. Admixtures (where required or permitted):

1.

Water_reducing: ASTM C494, Type A or D (4.2.1.4).

2.

Mid-range water-reducing admixture: ASTM C494, Type A (4.2.1.4).

3.

Air_entraining: ASTM C260 (4.2.1.4).

4.

High-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G (4.2.1.4).

5.

Non_chloride, non_corrosive accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E (4.2.1.4).

6.

Fly ash: ASTM C618, Type C or F (4.2.1.1.c).

7.

Ground granulated blast-furnace slag: ASTM C989 (4.2.1.1.d).

8.

Calcium chloride is NOT permitted (4.2.2.6).

9.

Use of admixtures other than those listed will be permitted only when approved prior to bid.

E. Reinforcing (3.2.1):

1.

Deformed bars: ASTM A615, A616, A617, or A706. Minimum yield strength to be 60 ksi

1.1.

Lap splices for reinforcing bars shall be a minimum of 36 bar diameters unless noted otherwise.

2.

Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in sheet form for all uses.

F.

Premolded expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751, (2.2.1.4).

G. Curing compound and sealer: ASTM C309 moisture retention. The compound shall be a water -based membrane forming liquid, 15% solids content minimum , and shall meet all specifications of the floor finish products that are to be used.

H. Vapor Retarder:

1.

Conform to ASTM E1745 “Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs”.

2.

Minimum thickness of vapor retarder shall be 10 mils if placed below granular fill, 20 mils when placed above granular fill.

I.

Granular Fill below slabs on grade: 4" of ODOT 304 or approved equal.

J.

Structural Bonding Compound: Epoxy adhesive, 100% solids, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface. The following are acceptable:

1.

Euco Epoxy #352 by The Euclid Chemical Co.

2.

Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Chemical Co.

3.

Epoxtite 2390 by A. C. Horn, Inc.

K. Patching Compound, Epoxy Type: 100% solids, suitable for use on dry or damp surface. The following are acceptable:

1.

Euco Epoxy #456 mortar by The Euclid Chemical Co.

2.

Sikadur Lo-Mod Mortar by Sika Chemical Co.

3.

Epoxitite 2390 Mortarby A. C. Horn, Inc.

2.2

MIXES

The following classes of concrete are required (4.2.2.8):

Type F'c(28 day) Min. Cement Max. W/C ratio Air Content

Class I

All Interior Concrete 4,000 PSI 540 0.45

Class II

All exterior concrete

4,000 PSI 540 0.45 5 to 7%

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Verify that excavations are free of water and ice, are of the required dimensions, and have been approved by the Soils Engineer, prior to placing concrete (5.3.1).

B. Determine field conditions by actual measurement.

C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours in advance of placing concrete. Place concrete only when Architect is present, unless this requirement is specifically waived.

3.2

DELIVERY AND PLACEMENT

A. Preparation before placement:

B.

1.

Do not use additives or salts to remove ice. Non-chloride deicers may be used.

2.

In cold weather, maintain temperature of forms and reinforcing within a range of 55 - 90 degrees F.

Delivery:

1.

Conform to ASTM C94.

2.

Delivery tickets to contain the following, in addition to the information required by C94: a. Reading of revolution counter at first addition of water.

b. Type and brand of cement.

c. Amount of cement.

d. Total water content by producer.

e. Maximum size of aggregate.

3.

Water may be added at the site only with the Architect or Engineer’s prior approval. Secure approver’s signature on the delivery ticket that indicates the quantity of water added.

4.

ASTM C94 requires discharge within 1-1/2 hours or 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of water to cement and aggregates, or the introduction of cement to the aggregates. Architect may require an earlier discharge during hot weather, or when high-early strength cement is being used.

C. Conveying: Keep delivery carts and buggies on runways; do not allow them to bear on reinforcing or uncured concrete.

D. Placement:

1.

Place within 6 feet of final position. Spreading with vibrators is prohibited.

2.

In walls and columns, deposit concrete in uniform horizontal layers, with a maximum depth of 4 feet (18 inches for architectural concrete).

3.

Maximum free fall without chutes or elephant trunks to be 5 feet (3 feet for architectural concrete).

4.

Place architectural concrete continuously to a designed joint.

E. Records: Keep a complete log of pours, including date, location, quantity, weather, and identification of test cylinders for each pour.

3.3

VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor retarders are required under all slabs on grade that are to receive moisture-sensitive floor covering, and in humidity controlled areas. Vapor retarders are not required under industrial slabs on grade nor under those in non-humidity controlled area.

B. Vapor retarder shall be installed in accordance with ASTM E1645 “Standard Practice for Installation of Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs”.

C. Where required, thickness of vapor retarder and placement shall conform to the following:

1.

The vapor retarder shall be a minimum of 10 mils thick and placed on the prepared subgrade, below the granular fill. Granular fill shall be a minimum of 4" of well-graded granular material, equivalent to ODOT 304.

3.4

JOINTING

A. Interior slabs on grade:

1.

Locate control (contraction) joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of information on Drawings, locate at openings, walls, columns, grid lines, inside corners. For reinforced or unreinforced slabs, maximum joint spacing to be 2 1/2 times slab thickness (ie., for 4" slabs, at 10'-0" on center). Schedule slab pours and sawcutting operations such that sawing is completed prior to onset of shrinkage cracking (5.3.5).

2.

Provide isolation joints at columns (1/2 inch thick) and at walls (1/8 inch thick). Where isolation joint will be exposed to view, set top of joint filler below top of slab a distance equal to the filler thickness, to receive sealant. Where not exposed to view, set top of filler flush with top of slab.

B. Exterior slabs on grade: Locate joints as shown on Drawings. In the absence of information on Drawings, provide the following (for sidewalks only):

1.

Expansion joints: Full depth, with 1/2 inch joint filler, where slabs abut vertical surfaces at intersections of sidewalks, at abrupt changes in width, and at a spacing not exceeding 30 feet.

2.

Control joints: Tooled, 1 inch deep, 4'_0" to 6'_0" on center between expansion joints.

3.5

FINISHES

A. Schedule of finishes on flatwork is as follows:

1.

Typical interior floor areas to receive carpet, resilient floor covering, or to remain exposed: troweled finish

(5.3.4.2.c).

2.

Interior floor areas to receive quarry tile, or ceramic tile: floated finish (5.3.4.2.b).

3.

Exterior slabs and garage ramps: broom finish (5.3.4.2.d).

B. Surfaces of floor slabs shall be finished to the following tolerances, per ACI 117 (5.3.4.3):

1.

Minimum flatness of F (f) 30 and a minimum levelness of F (l) 25, are required for typical slabs on grade.

Preceding values are average values to be obtained over a given area. Minimum local values (one-half bay) of F (f) 25 and F (l) 20 shall be obtained.

C. Any bay not conforming to the above flatness and levelness requirements is subject to repair or removal and replacement. All repair and retesting shall be performed at no expense to the Owner (1.7.1).

D. "F Numbers" shall be submitted to the Owner, Engineer and Architect immediately after the testing laboratory determines them.

3.6

CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Temperature:

1.

When air temperature during placement is less than 40 degrees, or will be within 24 hours, temperature of concrete as placed is to be between 50 and 90 degrees (55 and 90 degrees for sections less than 12 inches thick) and a non-chloride accelerator shall be used. Maintain concrete temperature within these limits for the full curing period of 7 days. (4.2.2.7 and 5.3.1.6).

2.

When air temperature during placement is greater than 80 degrees, a water-reducing retarder shall be used.

B. Curing:

1.

All other slab areas may be either moist-cured or receive an application of curing compound (5.3.6.4.e), except that when concrete above grade is placed in the open, and the air temperature exceeds 75 degrees, the concrete is to be moist-cured for the first 24 hours.

2.

Curing is to commence immediately after placement (5.3.6.1). Do not allow curing to be delayed overnight.

3.7

CLEANING AND PATCHING

A. Repair any slabs that do not meet the finish requirements. The Architect will determine whether grinding, filling of cracks, or patching and leveling procedures are required.

B. For slabs that are dusting, or showing other signs of improper curing, any corrective measures attempted will be subject to prior approval of the Architect, and will be performed at Contractor's expense. These may include additional applications of sealer or hardener, or grinding, or covering with a topping.

C. Immediately prior to final acceptance, remove from all interior and exterior surfaces which are exposed to view, any stain-producing elements, such as pyrites, nail, wire, reinforcing steel, and form ties.

D. Remove all stains completely. Use of weak acids or patented cleaners is acceptable, but surface is to be completely neutralized after use.

3.8

ACCEPTANCE

A. When observations or tests indicate that the Contract requirements have not been met, the Contractor is to bear the costs of any additional testing and analysis to determine acceptability, and also the cost of removal and replacement, if such is required (1.6.5.1, 1.7.1.5, 1.7.4, and 1.7.5).

3.9

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Obtain concrete for required tests at point of placement. If concrete is pumped, obtain concrete for tests at discharge end (1.6.4.3).

B. For each concrete class other than lean concrete, perform one strength test for each 50 yards or fraction thereof, for one-day placement of up to 300 yards (1.6.4.2.d). Perform one strength test for each 100 yards or fraction thereof, for one-day placements of greater than 300 yards.

C. Determine slump for each strength test (1.6.4.2.f).

D. Air Content:

1.

Determine air content for each strength test of Class III concrete (1.6.4.2.h). At first strength test of Class III concrete in the project, determine air content by the pressure method or the volumetric method (1.6.4.2.h).

2.

At each subsequent strength test of Class II concrete, and at least twice each day when class II is being placed, monitor the air content.

E. Determine concrete temperature for each strength test (1.6.4.2.g).

F. Testing Laboratory shall provide inspection of all reinforcing steel, post-tensioning tendons, and shear stud rail assemblies in place. Verify that the reinforcing and stud rails have been placed in strict accordance with approved shop drawings, to include verification of:

1.

Bar size and spacing.

2.

Bar clearances. Bar placement within listed tolerances.

3.

Adequate support and tying of bars to prevent dislodging during concrete placement.

G. Do not place concrete when slump, air content, or temperature vary from allowable (1.6.8).

H. Testing laboratory shall determine the flatness and levelness of all concrete slabs with flatness requirements of F(f) 30 or greater. Tests shall be made on the day following placement of the first concrete pour. Tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM E1155.

I.

Maintain records of all tests, indicating exact location of the structure represented by each test.

J. Test cylinders shall be stored at the jobsite for the first 20 hours, plus or minus 4 hours, in a protected location, with the temperature maintained between 60 and 80 degrees, or the results of the strength tests shall be considered unacceptable.

K. All field-testing and inspections shall be performed by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1, or equivalent (16.2).

END OF SECTION 033000

SLAB ON GRADE NOTES:

1. REFERENCE ELEVATION = TOP OF SLAB ELEVATION = 100'-0".

2. DRAWINGS INDICATE SLAB ON GRADE IS THE ONLY NEW CONSTRUCTION SHOWN. ALL OTHER STRUCTURE

SHOWN IS EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN RELATION TO THE SLAB ON GRADE. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL

EXISTING COLUMNS OR WALL LOCATIONS, MECHANICAL PLUMBING DRAINS & LOCATIONS.

3. G.C.TO REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL EXTERIOR PADS AND

DOOR STOOPS.

4. DEVIATIONS FROM SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINT/CONTROL JOINT PATTERN SHOWN MUST BE APPROVED BY

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.

5. REFERENCE DETAIL 1 FOR SLAB CONTROL AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. PROVIDE (2 #4 x 4'-0" LONG, SET

1-1/2" FROM TOP OF SLAB, AND CENTERED ON ALL RE-ENTRANTSLAB CORNERS.

6. PROVIDE #4 x 16" LG. DOWELS TO ADJACENT EXISTING SLAB @ 24" O.C. DRILL & EPOXY 4 1/2" INTO EXISTING

SLAB W/ HILTI HIT-HY200 ADHESIVE.

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2016

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE:  (303) 595‐4000

FAX:  (303) 595‐4014

INTERNET:  WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

Author

Project No.

Contents:

SLAB PLAN

Checked:

Checker

S100

Date of Last Print:

1/11/16

1800#

CHANNEL PER

2/S300

CHANNEL PER

2/S300

100#

FRAME PER

10/S300

260#

FRAME PER

10/S300

1800#

300#

FRAME PER

10/S300

650#

[32G]

HOOD SUPPORT

PER 7/S300

950#

100#

GOVERNING CODE: 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE

DESIGN LOADS:

ROOF LIVE LOADS: (IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1607.11)

- FLAT ROOFS 20 PSF

SNOW LOADS: (IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1608)

- GROUND SNOW LOAD (Pg) 30 PSF

- FLAT ROOF SNOW LOAD (Pf) 21 PSF

-SNOW EXPOSURE FACTOR (Ce) 1.0

- SNOW LOAD IMPORTANCE FACTOR (Is) 1.0

- THERMAL FACTOR (Ct) 1.0

WIND LOADS: (IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1609)

- BASIC WIND SPEED (V) 115 MPH (ULTIMATE)

- WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR (Iw) 1.0

- EXPOSURE CATEGORY EXPOSURE 'C'

- INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT (Gcpi) +/- 0.18

SEISMIC LOADS: NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS (IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 13 OF ASCE 7)

- COMPONENT IMPORTANCE FACTOR (Ip) 1.0

- Rp PER TABLE 13.5-1 OR 13.6-1 VARIES FROM 1.0 TO 12.0

- ap PER TABLE 13.5-1 OR 13.6-1 VARIES FROM 1.0 TO 2.5

- Sds 0.172

ROOF FRAMING NOTES:

1. INDICATES MECHANICAL LOADS SUPPORTED ON ROOF. COORDINATE THE SIZE, LOCATION, AND

CURBS SIMILAR TO SECTIONS 1/S300 AND 2/S300, AND REINFORCE JOISTS AT CONCENTRATED

LOAD SUPPORT LOCATIONS PER SECTION 4/S300. PROVIDE RTU CURB TO MATCH SLOPE OF

ROOF STRUCTURE (FIELD VERIFY ROOF SLOPE) TOP SURFACE SHALL BE LEVEL FOR MOUNTING

OF EQUIPMENT TO ENSURE PROPER DRAINAGE OF EQUIPMENT.

2. INDICATES ROOF OPENING. DETERMINE EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION FROM ARCHITECTURAL AND

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE A FRAME PER SECTION 6/S300, AT ALL OPENINGS GREATER

THAN 6" PERPENDICULAR TO THE DECK SPAN.

3. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY AND STABILITY OF EXISTING STRUCTURE

DURING DEMOLITION AND NEW CONSTRUCTION.

4. EXISTING PORTIONS OF PLANS ARE FROM ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS, FIELD INSPECTIONS, OR

ENGINEERING ASSUMPTIONS. ALL EXISTING MATERIAL, DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS, AND GENERAL

CONDITIONS OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE VERIFIED BEFORE PURCHASE OF MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION.

IF ANY DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND BETWEEN WHAT IS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND WHAT EXISTS IN THE

FIELD, CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND ARCHITECT TO DETERMINE WHAT

SHOULD BE DONE TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS AS REQUIRED. BEGINNING OF STEEL FABRICATION

MEANS ACCEPTANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS.

CONSTRUCTION FIRE PROTECTION NOTE

DURING WELDING OR ANY OTHER CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY THAT GENERATES SPARKS OR INTENSE HEAT, THE

GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE FIRE PROTECTION TO THE EXISTING STRUCTURE AND

CONTENTS.

AS A MINIMUM: 1. REMOVE COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS FROM AREAS OF WELDING SPARKS

2. PROVIDE FIRE PROOF BLANKETS AND SHIELDS TO CONTAIN SPARKS WHERE COMBUSTIBLE

MATERIALS CANNOT BE REMOVED.

3. PROVIDE A FIRE SAFETY OBSERVER WITH A FIRE EXTINGUISHER ON BOTH THE ROOF AND

BELOW THE ROOF DURING WELDING NEAR THE ROOF STRUCTURE.

[W16x36]

EXIST. ROOF FRAMING PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

Drawn:

Author

Project No.

Checked:

Checker

Contents:

Exist. Roof Framing Plan

S110

Date of Last Print:

1/11/16

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2016

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE:  (303) 595‐4000

FAX:  (303) 595‐4014

INTERNET:  WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

ROOF TOP UNIT SUPPORT NOTES:

1. INSTALL C6x8.2's OVER DECK.

2. POSITION CURB OVER CHANNELS AND LOCATE REQUIRED DUCT PENETRATIONS THRU

ROOF. REFERENCE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT SIZES..

3. REMOVE DECK AT DUCT PENETRATION LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED. FIELD WELD NEW DECK

SUPPORT ANGLES BETWEEN CHANNELS. DECK SUPPORT ANGLE MAY BE OMITTED IF

EDGE OF PENETRATION IS WITHIN 6" OF AN EDGE OF JOIST.

4. SCREW EXISTING DECK EDGE TO DECK SUPPORT ANGLES AS SHOWN.

3"

MIN.

ROOF JOISTS

3

S300

TYP.

ROOF JOISTS

C6 x 8.2 CURB

SUPPORT CHANNELS.

IF LOCATION VARIES

FROM THE LOCATIONS

SHOWN ON THE ROOF

FRAMING PLAN,

CONTACT STRUCTURAL

ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY.

ROOF DECK

3"

MIN.

THRU

DECK

TYP.

1/8" 1

5

S300

TYP.

TYP.

3/16" [email protected]

EXISTING DECK

L2x2x3/16

L3x3x1/4

SCREW DECK TO

ANGLE W/ #10 TEK

SCREWS @ 12" O.C.

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

5

REMOVE DECK AT DUCT

PENETRATIONS ONLY.

TYP.

3

S300

LONG DIMENSION OF UNIT PERPENDICULAR TO JOISTS

RTU FRAMING PLAN

1/2" = 1'-0"

1

EXISTING

STEEL JOIST

L3x3x1/4‚ BETWEEN

CHANNELS. COPE

VERTICAL LEG AT

CHANNEL.

ROOF DECK

REMOVE DECK AT DUCT

PENETRATIONS ONLY.

MECHANICAL UNIT

CURB

CONT. C6 x 8.2

EXTEND CHANNEL 3"

BEYOND ADJACENT

JOIST

1/8" 1

EXISTING

MTL. DECK

@ EA.

JOIST

LONG DIMENSION OF UNIT PARALLEL TO JOISTS

RTU FRAMING PLAN

1/2" = 1'-0"

2

1/8" 1

THRU

DECK

TYP.

NOTE: REINFORCE JOIST PER

DETAIL 4/S300 AS REQ'D

(TYP. @ ALL MECH. UNITS)

EXISTING JOIST

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

3

EXISTING

STEEL JOIST

EXISTING DECK

ROOF LOAD ROOF LOAD

ROUND BAR NOT ACCEPTABLE

(REINFORCE W/ ANGLE AS SHOWN

AT LEFT)

HANGER

LOAD

TYP.

HANGER

LOAD

MODIFICATION IS TYP. FOR ALL JOISTS

SUPPORTING LOAD FROM TOP OR BOTTOM

CHORD BETWEEN PANEL PTS. VERIFY LOC.

& NO. OF LOADS W/ ARCH., MECH., PLUMB.,

& ELEC. DWGS.

FIELD WELD ANGLE FROM LOAD

LOCATION TO NEAREST TOP OR BOTTOM

CHORD PANEL POINT. USE

L2 x 2 x 3/16 FOR "K" SERIES JOIST

USE L3 x 3 x 1/4 FOR "LH" SERIES JOISTS.

JOIST REINF. DETAIL

3/4" = 1'-0"

4

ROOF OPENING

SEE MECHANICAL

CONTRACTOR

FOR SIZE AND

LOCATION

3/16"

FIELD VERIFY

NOTE: ALL WELDING TO JOISTS SHALL BE

DONE WITH CARE SO AS NOT TO

IMPAIR THE JOISTS.

L4 x 4 x 5/16"

(4 SIDES)

1/8

A

DETAIL A

REINFORCE JOISTS AS

REQUIRED PER DETAIL 4/S300.

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

6

8

S300

P1001 UNISTRUT.

1/2"Ø THREADED ROD

WITH DOUBLE NUT AND PL.

WASHERS EA. END. @ EA.

HOOD HANGING POINT

LOCATION

VENT HOOD, SEE MECH.

EL. SEE ARCH

LONG DIMENSION OF HOOD PARALLEL TO JOISTS

VENT HOOD SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

7

L3 1/2 x 3 1/2 x 1/4 x 24" LG.

MIN. UNISTRUT SUPPORT

ANGLE. FASTEN TO WALL

W/ 5/16" HILTI HLC SLEEVE

ANCHOR (1" EMBED)

EXISTING MASONRY

WALL

Consultant: r e d architecture + planning

855 GRANDVIEW AVENUE

SUITE 295

COLUMBUS,

PHONE:

FAX:

OHIO 43215

614.487.8770

614.487.8777

BID DOCUMENTS ONLY

NOT FOR

CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2016

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE:  (303) 595‐4000

FAX:  (303) 595‐4014

INTERNET:  WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Revisions:

EXISTING JOIST

& DECK.

NOTE: REINFORCE JOIST PER

DETAIL 4/S300 AS REQ'D

1/2"Ø A307 BOLT

WITH PL. WASHERS

THRU EA. JOIST

CHORD

P1000 UNISTRUT

OR P1001 UNISTRUT

AS NOTED.

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

8

NOT USED

3/4" = 1'-0"

9

EXISTING

STEEL JOIST

IF DECK OPENINGS ARE

REQUIRED FOR UNIT,

COORD. PER DETAIL 6/S300

1/8

A

DETAIL A

L5 x 3 1/2 x 5/16

LLV (2 SIDES).

LOCATE DIRECTLY

UNDER EQUIPMENT

CURB.

FIELD VERIFY

NOTE: ALL WELDING TO JOISTS SHALL BE

DONE WITH CARE SO AS NOT TO

IMPAIR THE JOISTS.

SECTION

3/4" = 1'-0"

10

REINFORCE JOISTS AS

REQUIRED PER DETAIL 4/S300.

Drawn:

CMS

Project No.

Checked:

ARK

Contents:

ROOF FRAMING DETAILS

S300

Date of Last Print:

1/11/16

Consultant:

108

KITCHEN

109

OFFICE

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

CATEGORY APPLICATION ALLOWABLE MATERIAL

SPRINKLER

HEAD

EXPOSED STRUCTURE CEILING

PLYWOOD CEILING

GYPSUM BOARD CEILING

LAY-IN CEILING

WALK-IN COOLER

CHROME UPRIGHT

BRONZE CONCEALED

PENDENT WITH

BRASS COVER PLATE

CHROME RECESSED

PENDENT WITH

CHROME

ESCUTCHEON

CHROME RECESSED

PENDENT WITH

CHROME ESCUTCHEON

FREEZE-PROOF

PENDENT

FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULE

ROOM NUM. DESCRIPTION

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

100

101

102

103

104

105

MAIN ENTRY

DINING

UTENSIL

PASSAGE

POS

ORDERING

SERVING

COOKING

KITCHEN

OFFICE

COOLER

MENS

WOMENS

CEILING

EXPOSED STRUCTURE

EXPOSED STRUCTURE

PLYWOOD

PLYWOOD

GYPSUM BOARD

EXPOSED STRUCTURE

GYPSUM BOARD

GYPSUM BOARD

LAY-IN

LAY-IN

INTEGRAL

GYPSUM BOARD

GYPSUM BOARD

HEIGHT

VARIES

VARIES

7'-6"

7'-6"

9'-0"

VARIES

9'-0"

9'-0"

10'-0"

9'-0"

9'-4"

7'-7"

7'-7"

HAZARD

LIGHT

LIGHT

LIGHT

LIGHT

ORD. HAZ. 1

LIGHT

ORD. HAZ. 1

ORD. HAZ. 1

ORD. HAZ. 1

ORD. HAZ. 1

ORD. HAZ. 1

LIGHT

LIGHT

A

FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULE NOTES

CEILING HEIGHT SHOWN IS APPROXIMATE. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

FOR EXACT CEILING HEIGHT.

FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES

A FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE, NFPA, LOCAL

FIRE DEPARTMENT STANDARDS, AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. SEE SHEET A000 FOR

THE PREVAILING CODES.

B

C

MODIFY THE EXISTING HEAD LAYOUT AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IN THE SPACES SHOWN TO SUIT THE

NEW FLOOR PLAN. PROVIDE NEW HEADS AND DEVICES AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM.

PROVIDE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS FOR REVISED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM.

COORDINATE HEAD LAYOUT WITH EXPOSED DUCTWORK, LIGHT FIXTURES, HVAC EQUIPMENT, AND

ARCHITECTURAL CEILING ELEMENTS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LOCATIONS.

PROVIDE HEADS IN LAY-IN CEILINGS AT QUARTER POINTS ALONG LONG AXIS OF CEILING TILES.

SUBMIT HEAD LAYOUT SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FOR PERMIT

APPROVAL.

D OBTAIN PERMITS, APPROVALS, AND INSPECTIONS FOR REVISED FIRE PROTECTION AND ALARM

SYSTEMS.

E CEILING HEIGHTS AND CEILING FIXTURE PLACEMENTS SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE. SEE

ARCHITECTURAL RCP FOR EXACT CEILING HEIGHTS AND CEILING FIXTURE DIMENSIONS.

F THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR UNLOADING,

UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "INSTALL" DESCRIBES

THE OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL UNLOADING, UNPACKING,

ASSEMBLY, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING,

CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "PROVIDE" MEANS TO

FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE.

FOR REFERENCE ONLY:

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS TO BE

DESIGNED BY THE GENERAL

CONTRACTOR

110

COOLER

107

COOKING

104

POS

106

SERVING

111

MENS

103

PASSAGE

101

DINING

112

WOMENS

102

UTENSIL

HOLD VERTICAL SPRINKLER PIPE ABOVE THE PLYWOOD

DINING ROOM ELEMENT THAT'S VISIBLE FROM THE

DINING ROOM TIGHT TO THE DEMISING WALL

105

ORDERING

1

F100

FIRE PROTECTION PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

100

MAIN ENTRY

APPROXIMATELY 2,413 SF

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Fire Protection Plan

F100

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

B.

Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE INSULATION

A.

Preformed Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, with factory applied, all purpose, vapor retarder jacket.

B.

Polyolefin Pipe Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534,

Type I, except for density.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F.

B.

Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.

C.

Seal vapor barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.

D.

Coat glass fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating.

E.

Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof flashing.

F.

Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal.

G.

Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire rated walls and partitions.

H.

Fire Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire rated walls and partitions. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems.

I.

Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at the underside of the floor assembly and at the floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems.

J.

Glass Fiber Insulation Installation: Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.

K.

Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems:

1.

Domestic hot and cold water.

2.

Exposed sanitary drains of fixtures for the disabled.

L.

3.

Refrigerant piping.

Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1.

Flexible connectors.

2.

Fire protection piping systems.

3.

Sanitary drainage and vent piping.

4.

Chrome plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.

5.

Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

M.

Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials and thicknesses:

1.

Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 1/2-inch preformed glass fiber pipe insulation.

2.

Sanitary Drains: 1/2-inch polyolefin pipe insulation.

END OF SECTION 15080

SECTION 15554 - FLUES AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS VENTS

A.

Vent/air intake for high efficiency domestic water heater. Size per manufacturer's recommendation.

B.

Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestopping spacers, and fasteners; fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install vents according to stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.

B.

Seal between sections of positive pressure vents using only sealants recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Support vents at intervals to support the weight of the vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.

END OF SECTION 15554

SECTION 15732 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.

B.

Comply with ASHRAE 15.

C.

EER: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Building, except Low Rise Residential Buildings."

D.

Warranties: Submit a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to the repair or replacement of components that fail within 5 years of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED UNITS, 5 TO 20 TONS

A.

Factory assembled and tested, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

1.

Refer to Rooftop Heating/Cooling Unit Schedule on drawing M200 for capacities, and manufacturers.

2.

Evaporator Fans: Belt driven, forward curved centrifugal.

3.

Exhaust/Relief Fans: Direct drive, forward curved centrifugal or propeller.

4.

Condenser Fans: Direct drive propeller.

5.

Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum fins and copper coil.

6.

Compressors: Serviceable hermetic or fully hermetic, with safety controls, hot gas bypass, and timed off controls.

7.

Heat Exchangers: Gas fired, with gas controls, electronic ignition, high limit cutout, and forced draft proving switch.

8.

Economizer controls (Comparative Enthalpy, 100% capacity).

9.

Low ambient controls.

10. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric.

11. Operating Controls: Two stage heating and two stage cooling on units 8-1/2 tons and over.

12. Roof curb.

13. Control Wiring from T-stat to rooftop unit: Shall be 18ga / 7 conductor, rated for plenum applications.

14. Control Wiring from T-stat to remote sensor: Shall be a separate 18ga / 2 conductor shielded, rated for plenum applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install units level and plumb and firmly anchored.

B.

Connect gas piping to burner with pipe same size as gas train inlet, and provide union with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C.

Connect to supply and return hydronic piping with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

D.

Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Terminate return air duct through roof structure.

E.

Connect units to wiring systems and to ground.

END OF SECTION 15732

SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

B.

C.

D.

Submittals: Product Data for fire and smoke dampers.

Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25,000 cu. ft. in volume or building Types

II, IV, and V construction more than 3 stories in height.

Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces in 1 or 2 family dwellings or serving spaces less than 25,000 cu. ft..

Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations,"

E.

F.

Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, except single family residential usage, unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Qualifications: AABC certified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

DUCTS

A.

Spiral Duct: Spiral Lock Seam, without insulation, G90 galvanized finish, ASTM A-653/924

1.

Basis of Design Manufacturers: Lindab SPIROsafe, alternates to the basis of design must be

B.

C.

submitted for review.

2.

Fittings: Factory produced standing seam construction with internal sealing. Fittings with a major axis of 36" or smaller shall be 20 gauge. Fittings with a major axis of 37"-48" shall be 18 gauge.

Galvanized Steel Sheet: Forming steel, ASTM A 653/653M, G90 coating designation.

Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with an airstream surface coated with a temperature resistant coating. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. R-value : 6.3.

1.

Adhesive: ASTM C 916, Type I.

D.

E.

F.

2.

Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin, length as required to penetrate liner plus a 1/8 inch projection maximum into the airstream.

Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181A.

Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181A.

Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standard" for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A.

Volume-Control Dampers: Factory fabricated volume control dampers, complete with required

B.

C.

D.

glass fiber insulation, R-value: 6.0, around a continuous inner liner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

A.

INSTALLATION

Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system with 2 inch positive and negative

B.

C.

D.

duct pressure classifications.

Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces. Except where noted as exposed.

Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standard".

E.

hardware and accessories. Single blade and multiple opposed blade, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

Fire Dampers: Factory-fabricated fire dampers, complete with required hardware and accessories. UL labeled according to UL 555, "Fire Dampers".

Flexible Connectors: Flame retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

Flexible Ducts: Factory fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 2 inch thick,

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

3.2

A.

Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.

Install liner on all supply and return duct.

Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.

Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL approved written instructions.

Install fusible links in fire dampers.

Provide saddle taps at tees for exposed ductwork.

B.

C.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

The owner will supply an independent balance agent to to balance and adjust the HVAC installation.

The balance agent will be responsible for any pulley or belt changes required.

The general contactor is to have trained staffed available during the balancing to correct issues noted by the balance agent.

The balance agent is to balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to indicated quantities +/- 10%. The hood exhaust system shall be balanced to a tolerance of

D.

-0+10% and the make-up air system to a tolerance of -10+0%.

The balance agent is to supply a copy of the balance report to the owner, engineer and general contractor for review.

END OF SECTION 15810

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLETS AND INLETS

A.

Diffusers:

1.

Refer to Grills, Registers, and Diffusers Schedule for equipment schedule

2.

Manufacturer: As scheduled (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)

3.

Material: As scheduled.

4.

Finish: As scheduled.

5.

Mounting: As scheduled.

B.

Wall and Ceiling Registers:

1.

Refer to Grills, Registers, and Diffusers Schedule for equipment schedule

2.

Manufacturer: As scheduled (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)

3.

Material: As scheduled.

4.

Finish: As Scheduled.

5.

Mounting: Countersunk screw.

C.

Wall and Ceiling Grilles:

6.

Refer to Grills, Registers, and Diffusers Schedule for equipment schedule

7.

Manufacturer: As scheduled (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)

8.

Material: As scheduled.

9.

Finish: As Scheduled.

10. Mounting: Countersunk screw or lay in depending location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling and wall mounted items.

B.

Locate ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "reflected ceiling plans." Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

END OF SECTION 15855

SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Summary: Electric/electronic control sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.

B.

Submittals: Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of HVAC equipment and system and Product Data for controllers, sensors, operators, control panels, thermostats, humidistats, actuators, control valves and dampers.

C.

System Description: Control systems consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, and other apparatus, accessories, required to operate mechanical systems according to sequences of operation indicated and specified.

D.

Operation Sequence:

1.

Unoccupied Cycle: During unoccupied hours as set by a programmable thermostat the outside air and return dampers for the HVAC unit close, and the thermostat set point resets to 65° F (user adjustable).

Upon a call for heating, the HVAC unit energizes.

2.

Occupied Cycle: During occupied hours, as set by a programmable thermostat the outside air and return dampers open to a minimum set point. The furnace and exhaust fans run continuously. Upon a call for heating, the furnace heating energizes. Upon a call for cooling, the condensing unit energizes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install control wiring concealed, except in mechanical rooms, and according to requirements specified in

Division 16 Sections.

END OF SECTION 15900

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Contents:

Mechanical

Specifications

Checked:

MPC

M010

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

2

M100

4/8

ER1 75 CFM

RESTROOM HVAC SOFFIT SECTION

1/4" = 1'-0"

3

M100

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

CATEGORY

DUCT

APPLICATION

EXPOSED SUPPLY

EXPOSED RETURN

HVAC BOX SECTION

1/4" = 1'-0"

CD3

ER1

RG1

RG2

SR1

CD1

Tag

CD2

Furnished

By

GC

Installed

By

GC

Manufacturer

Nailor

Model

4320A Type L

GC GC Nailor 4320A Type S

GRILLS, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE

Description

Perforated Ceiling Diffuser

Perforated Ceiling Diffuser

Size

Face: 24" x 24"

Neck: Varies

Face: 12" x 12"

Neck: 8"Ø

Material

Aluminum

Aluminum

Finish

White

White

GC GC Nailor 4320A Type S Perforated Ceiling Diffuser White

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

Nailor

Nailor

Nailor

Seiho

51FH

4330R Type S

51FH

NT16

0° Fixed Blade Return Grill

Perforated Ceiling Return

0° Fixed Blade Return Grill

Adjustable Turbo Nozzle

Face: 20" x 20"

Neck: Varies

Neck: 8" x 4"

Aluminum

Aluminum

Face: 24" x 24"

Neck 22" x 22"

Aluminum

Neck: 40" x 14" Aluminum

Neck: 16"Ø Aluminum

White

White

White

White

Mounting

Lay-in

Ceilings

Ceiling

Ceiling

Wall

Notes

Provide integral

OBD

Provide integral

OBD, Remove

4-way deflector

Provide integral

OBD

Provide integral

OBD

Ceilings

Wall

Wall Provide with face-accessible

OBD

HVAC SYMBOLS

EXPOSED GEN. EXHAUST

CONCEALED, SUPPLY

CONCEALED, RETURN

CONCEALED, GEN. EXHAUST

CONCEALED, TYPE I

HOOD EXHAUST

EF-2

ON ROOF

ALLOWABLE MATERIAL

RECT. LINED OR

ROUND AS SHOWN,

PAINTED TO MATCH

ROOF DECK

RECTANGULAR,

PAINTED TO MATCH

ROOF DECK

RECTANGULAR,

PAINTED TO MATCH

ROOF DECK

RECT. OR ROUND AS

SHOWN,

LINED OR INSULATED

RECT. OR ROUND AS

SHOWN,

LINED OR INSULATED

RECT. OR ROUND AS

SHOWN

RECTANGULAR 16

GA. BLACK IRON

W/ WRAP OR UL 1978

FACTORY-MANUFACTURED

DUCT W/ WRAP (SUBMIT

SHOP DRAWINGS FOR

FACTORY-MANUFACTURED

DUCT PRIOR TO ORDERING

FOR APPROVAL)

RG2 2750 CFM

SR1 1250 CFM

16ø

REMOTE

TEMPERATURE

SENSOR

CEILING DIFFUSER

CEILING-MOUNTED RETURN

OR EXHAUST REGISTER

SUPPLY REGISTER

RETURN GRILLE

FLEXIBLE DUCT

T

S

#

XX-#

A

V

S

M

MITERED CORNER WITH TURNING VANES

DUCTWORK INTERNAL FREE

DIMENSIONS (WIDTH/HEIGHT)

RECTANGULAR TO ROUND DUCT TRANSITION

DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR

MOTOR-OPERATED DAMPER

MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER

GREASE DUCT CLEANOUT

MITERED CORNER WITHOUT TURNING VANES

THERMOSTAT

REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON

THE SAME SHEET FOR NOTE MEANING

CONNECT TO EXISTING

EQUIPMENT TAG: SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

ON SHEET M200 FOR EQUIPMENT INFORMATION

AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE SMOKE DETECTOR

ANNUNCIATOR WITH REMOTE KEY

OPERATED RESET

ABBREVIATIONS

MUA

OBD

RG

RTU

SR

VSC

AFF

AFG

CD

CU

EF

ER

EXT'G

HD

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

ABOVE FINISHED GRADE

CEILING DIFFUSER

CONDENSING UNIT

EXHAUST FAN

EXHAUST REGISTER

EXISTING

HOOD

MAKEUP AIR UNIT

BLADE DAMPER

RETURN GRILLE

ROOFTOP UNIT

SUPPLY REGISTER

VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL

CO2AS TENANT'S CO2 ALARM SUPPLIER

GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR

HES

TAB

TENANT'S HVAC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S TEST AND BALANCE VENDOR

TCC

TES

THS

TLS

TMB

TMS

TP

TRS

TSV

WCS

TENANT'S CABLING CONTRACTOR

TENANT'S KITCHEN EQUIPEMNT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S HOOD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MENU BOARD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MILLWORK SUPPLIER

TENANT'S PHONE SUPPLIER

TENANT'S RAILING SUPPLIER

TENANT'S SIGN VENDOR

TENANT'S WALK-IN COOLER SUPPLIER

HVAC GENERAL NOTES

A GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO HVAC SHEETS.

B WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH STATE AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS AS APPROVED AND

AMENDED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING APPLICABLE SECTIONS OF NFPA,

THE MECHANICAL CODE, AND ANY INTERIM AMENDMENTS AT THE TIME OF THE PROPOSAL.

PURCHASE PERMITS ASSOCIATED WITH THE WORK. OBTAIN INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY CODE. SEE

SHEET A000 FOR THE PREVAILING CODES.

C CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW A COMPLETE SET OF THE CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTS.

D COORDINATE WORK WITH THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES, EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS,

REQUIREMENTS OF THE OWNER, AND OF THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE.

E DRAWINGS FOR THE MECHANICAL WORK ARE DIAGRAMMATIC, SHOWING THE GENERAL

LOCATION, TYPE, LAYOUT, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED. THE DRAWING SHALL NOT BE SCALED FOR

EXACT MEASUREMENTS, REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONS. REFER TO

MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD INSTALLATION DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE DUCTWORK, CONNECTIONS, OFFSETS, ACCESSORIES,

AND MATERIALS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM.

F DUCT DIMENSIONS ON PLANS INDICATE DIMENSIONS OF INTERNAL FREE AREA.

G PERFORATED CEILING DIFFUSERS SHALL BE 4-WAY UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

I

H COORDINATE ROOF WORK WITH THE OWNER'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO

CONSTRUCTION.

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE RECTANGULAR DUCT ELBOWS GREATER THAN 45° SHALL BE MITERED

ELBOWS WITH DOUBLE-THICKNESS TURNING VANES AND RECTANGULAR DUCT ELBOWS 45° OR

LESS SHALL BE RADIUSED ELBOWS WITH AN INSIDE RADIUS OF AT LEAST 1/2 THE WIDTH OF THE

DUCT.

J REPLACE AIR FILTERS WITH NEW, CLEAN MERV 8 AIR FILTERS AT TURNOVER.

K THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR

UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM

"INSTALL" DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL

UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, WORKING TO

DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM

"PROVIDE" MEANS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE.

1

2

3

4

#

5

6

10

11

12

7

8

9

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

PLAN NOTES

SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT LOCATION.

TYPICAL.

PAINT DUCTWORK VISIBLE THROUGH DINING ROOM SUPPLY REGISTERS BLACK. TYPICAL.

REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR SUPPLY REGISTER ELEVATIONS AND LOCATIONS.

22/16 DUCT UP FOR TRANSITION TO RTU-1 RETURN CONNECTION IN ROOF CURB. RTU-1 SHALL HAVE

AN INTEGRAL SMOKE DETECTOR MOUNTED IN THE RETURN AIR STREAM. INTERLOCK SMOKE

DETECTOR TO RTU-1 OPERATION.

26/18 DUCT UP FOR TRANSITION TO RTU-2 RETURN CONNECTION IN ROOF CURB. RTU-2 SHALL HAVE

AN INTEGRAL SMOKE DETECTOR MOUNTED IN THE RETURN AIR STREAM. INTERLOCK SMOKE

DETECTOR TO RTU-2 OPERATION.

22/16 DUCT UP FROM BUILDING SUPPLY THROUGH ROOF. TRANSITION TO RTU-1 SUPPLY CONNECTION

IN ROOF CURB.

26/18 DUCT UP FROM BUILDING SUPPLY TO RTU-2 SUPPLY CONNECTION. TRANSITION IN ROOF CURB.

16/16 DUCT UP THROUGH ROOF. TRANSITION TO MAU-1 SUPPLY CONNECTION IN ROOF CURB.

10/14 DUCTS UP FROM HOOD TO 20/14 DUCT THROUGH ROOF TO EF-1. PROVIDE RADIUSED ELBOWS

WITH AN INSIDE RADIUS OF 0.5W AT ELBOWS IN GREASE DUCT.

8/6 DUCT UP THROUGH ROOF TO EF-2.

16/10 DUCT DOWN TO MAKEUP AIR PSP DUCT CONNECTION. TRANSITION TO SUPPLY PLENUM

OPENING SIZE. TYPICAL FOR 4.

8" DIA. DUCT DOWN TO AC PSP DUCT CONNECTION. TRANSITION TO SUPPLY PLENUM OPENING SIZE.

TYPICAL. CAP UNUSED DUCT CONNECTIONS.

INSTALL REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR RTU-1 AT THIS LOCATION @ 5'-0" AFF. COORDINATE

LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT.

INSTALL REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR RTU-2 AT THIS LOCATION @ 5'-0" AFF. COORDINATE

LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT AND WALL MOUNTED ARTWORK.

INSTALL REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR HOOD HD-1 AT THIS LOCATION @ 5'-0" AFF.

COORDINATE LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE (2) #18 G. THERMISTOR CABLE FROM

TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO HOOD CONTROL PANEL.

INSTALL "LIGHTSTAT" THERMOSTATS FOR RTU-1 AND RTU-2 AT THIS LOCATION AT 48" AFF.

COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL SWITCHING IN THIS AREA AND EXTEND WIRING TO REMOTE

TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND ROOFTOP UNITS. LABEL EACH THERMOSTAT ACCORDINGLY.

COORDINATE THERMOSTAT LOCATION WITH WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SO THAT THERMOSTATS

ARE NOT BLOCKED BY SHELVING, COAT RACKS, OR DOORS.

INSTALL KITCHEN HOOD, HD-1. SUPPORT HOOD PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

INSTALL HOOD ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ITS LISTING, IN COMPLIANCE WITH NFPA 96,

THE BUILDING CODE, AND AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. HOOD SHALL HAVE AN INTEGRAL DUCT

COLLAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO AUTOMATICALLY ENERGIZE THE EXHAUST AND MAKEUP AIR FANS

IF COOKING TEMPERATURES ARE DETECTED. EXHAUST DUCT SYSTEM TO BE WELDED OR

FACTORY-MANUFACTURED WATER AND AIR TIGHT. INSTALL CLEANOUTS PER CODE AND AS SHOWN.

INSTALL HOOD PER DETAILS 4, AND 5/M300. CHIPOTLE WILL PROVIDE AN INDEPENDENT TESTING

AGENCY FOR TESTING THE INTEGRITY OF THE GREASE DUCT SYSTEM.

INSTALL REMOTE CONDENSING UNIT FOR WALK-IN COOLER ON ROOF. INSTALL REFRIGERANT LINE SET,

THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE, SOLENOID VALVE, TEMPERATURE CONTROL, SIGHT GLASS, FILTER

DRIER, PRESSURE CONTROL, LOW AMBIENT CONTROLS, AND WEATHERPROOF HOUSING. TRAP AND

SLOPE REFRIGERANT LINES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SEAL PIPING PENETRATIONS

THROUGH COOLER ROOF. INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ASHRAE/ANSI STANDARD 15. INSTALL

THE REFRIGERANT LINE SET UNDER THE ROOF DECK TO WITHIN 3' OF THE CONDENSING UNIT. CUT

2-1/2" HOLE IN WALK-IN COOLER ROOF FOR REFRIGERANT LINE SET AND SEAL PER THE COOLER

MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AFTER LINE SET IS INSTALLED.

INSTALL REMOTE CONDENSER FOR ICE MACHINE ON ROOF. INSTALL REFRIGERANT LINE SET,

THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE, SOLENOID VALVE, TEMPERATURE CONTROL, SIGHT GLASS, FILTER

DRIER, PRESSURE CONTROL, LOW AMBIENT CONTROLS, AND WEATHERPROOF HOUSING. TRAP AND

SLOPE REFRIGERANT LINES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. SEAL PIPING PENETRATIONS

THROUGH ROOF. INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ASHRAE/ANSI STANDARD 15. INSTALL THE

REFRIGERANT LINE SET UNDER THE ROOF DECK TO WITHIN 3' OF THE REMOTE CONDENSER. IF

REFRIGERANT PIPING TO ICE MAKER IS EXPOSED TO PUBLIC VIEW CONCEAL WITHIN A STAINLESS STEEL

SHROUD AS SHOWN IN THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS.

INSTALL ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

PROVIDE WATER HEATER COMBUSTION AIR AND FLUE VENTS THROUGH THE ROOF PER DETAIL 1/P300.

MAINTAIN 10' MINIMUM SEPARATION BETWEEN FLUE VENT AND VENTILATION AIR INTAKES.

TERMINATE PER THE WATER HEATER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

INSTALL EXHAUST FAN EF-1 PER DETAIL 6/M300. INSTALL GREASE VIROGUARD SYSTEM FURNISHED BY

CHIPOTLE ON EXHAUST FAN, EF-1.

PROVIDE SUPPLY DIFFUSER CONNECTION TO SUPPLY SYSTEM PER DETAIL 1/M300. TYPICAL.

PROVIDE AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE SMOKE DETECTOR ANNUNCIATOR WITH REMOTE KEY OPERATED

RESET. WIRE A UNIT BACK TO EACH SMOKE DETECTOR. MOUNT UNIT 60" AFF. TYPICAL.

INSTALL RETURN GRILL IN TOP OF JOIST SHELF, FACING THE DECK SO CONCEALED FROM VIEW FROM

THE DINING ROOM.

PROVIDE EXHAUST REGISTER CONCEALED IN RESTROOM COVE AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2/M100.

2

M100

14Ø CD1 450 CFM

8Ø CD1 150 CFM

16

T T

24

V

A

A

V

15

13

RG1 1900 CFM

S

S

21

CU-2

ON ROOF

CU-1

ON ROOF

RTU-1

ON ROOF

20

19

18

RTU-2

ON ROOF

20

5

22/16

4 6

22

EF-1

ON ROOF

7

8Ø CD3 300 CFM

12/10

1

8Ø CD3 300 CFM

23

8

26/18 20/18

12

14

25

RG2 2750 CFM

ER1

8/4

10

EF-2

ON ROOF

75 CFM

26

11

HD-1

20/14

10/10

17

9

8Ø CD2 250 CFM

8Ø CD2

250 CFM

12/18

8

M300

SR1 1250 CFM SR1 1250 CFM

MAU-1

ON ROOF

20

2

3

SR1 1250 CFM

3

M300

26

ER1 75 CFM

1

M100

3

M100

HVAC FLOOR PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

788 Morrison Road

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Contents:

HVAC Plan

Checked:

MPC

M100

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Tag

EF-1

EF-2

Drive Type Exhaust Flow

Belt 2925 CFM

Direct 150 CFM

E.S.P.

1.20 in-wg

0.60 in-wg

Weight

300

100

Electrical

Motor Power V/P/H

2 HP

0.18 HP

208/3/60

120/1/60

FAN SCHEDULE

Furnished

By

THS

THS

Installed

By

GC

GC

Basis for Design

Manufacturer Model

Captive-Aire

Captive-Aire

NCA24HPFA

DR12HFA

Remarks

WITH DISCONNECT AND VENTED ROOF CURB

WITH DISCONNECT, VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLER,

BACKDRAFT DAMPER AND ROOF CURB

Tag

MAU-1

Description

Makeup Air Unit

Airflow

Supply Flow

[CFM]

E.S.P.

[IN. W.C.] Input [MBH]

1775 0.80

225

Heating Capacity

Output

[MBH]

Maximum

Turndown

220 12.5:1

EAT

14 °F

MAKEUP AIR UNIT SCHEDULE

Electrical

Approximate

Weight [LBS]

650

Motor Power

2 HP

V/P/H

208/3/60

Furnished

By

THS

Installed

By

GC

Basis for Design

Manufacturer

Captive-Aire

Model

A1-D.250-G10

Remarks

FURNISHED WITH DISCONNECT, ROOF CURB, SCREEN

INTAKE, AND WASHABLE ALUMINUM FILTERS

Tag

CU-1

CU-2

Description

Walk-in Cooler Remote

Condensing Unit

Ice Maker - Remote

Condenser

Nominal

Capacity

[Tons]

--

No. of

Compressors

1

-0

No. of

Circuits

1

1

Refrigerant

Type

R-410A

Refrigerant

Charge

10.7 lbs

R-404A 4.0 lbs

Weight

260

CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE

Electrical

MOCP

20 A

FLA

16.2 A

100

V/P/H

208/3/60

Furnished

By

WCS

Installed

By

GC

Basis for Design

Manufacturer

Norlake

Model

NASD150RL3

120/1/60 TES KES Hoshizaki URC-14F

Remarks

FURNISHED WITH WALK-IN COOLER

FURNISHED WITH ICE MAKER

CONTROL FUNCTIONS

A. THE MAIN COOKING EXHAUST FAN AND MAKE-UP AIR UNIT

SHALL BE INTERLOCKED TO OPERATE TOGETHER. THIS

CONTROL CIRCUIT IS ACTIVATED BY A SWITCH AND

INCLUDES A FIRE PROTECTION OVERRIDE.

B. THE TEMPERATURE IN EACH ZONE IS CONTROLLED BY SPACE

TEMPERATURE SENSORS CONNECTED TO THE

THERMOSTATS LOCATED IN THE OFFICE. ALL ZONES SHALL

OPERATE WITH CONTINUOUS FAN OPERATION DURING

OCCUPIED TIMES AND INTERMITTENTLY AS NEEDED TO

MAINTAIN SET POINTS DURING UNOCCUPIED TIMES.

OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS SHALL BE OPEN CONTINUOUSLY

WHEN EITHER IN OCCUPIED MODE OR WHEN THE HOOD

SYSTEM IS ON AND SHALL BE CLOSED DURING UNOCCUPIED

PERIODS.

C. THE THERMOSTATS SHALL DETERMINE

OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED STATUS USING A BUILT-IN LIGHT

SENSOR, SUCH THAT WHEN THE AMBIENT LIGHT IS ABOVE

AN ADJUSTABLE SETPOINT THE SYSTEM SHALL BE IN

OCCUPIED MODE AND WHEN THE AMBIENT LIGHT IS BELOW

AN ADJUSTABLE SETPOINT THE SYSTEM SHALL BE IN

UNOCCUPIED MODE.

Tag

HD-1

Description

Type I Canopy Hood with

Perforated MAU and AC

Supply Plenums

Max Cooking

Temp.

450°F

Airflow

[CFM]

2925

Exhaust Plenum

Duct Collars

SP [in. w.c]

0.77

No.

Width Length

2 10" 14"

Length

13' - 0"

Width SP [in. w.c.]

4' - 3" 0.1

Supply

Plenum

Length

14' - 0"

Supply

Plenum

Width

22"

Perforated Supply Plenums

Airflow

[CFM]

1775

KITCHEN HOOD SCHEDULE

MAU Plenum

No.

4

Duct Collars

Width

10"

Length

16"

Airflow

[CFM]

700

AC Plenum

Duct Collars

No.

7

Diameter

8"

Basis for Design

No. of Light

Fixtures

9

Approximate

Weight [lbs]

950

Furnished

By

THS

Installed

By

GC

Manufacturer

Captive-Aire

Model

5424

ND-2-ACPSP-F

Remarks

MAT'L: 18 GA. TYPE 430 SS. PROVIDE WITH (1) 16"X16" AND (7) 20" X

16" HE SS FILTERS, INTEGRAL UTILITY CABINET, ANSUL SYSTEM, DUCT

COLLAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR & PREWIRE PACKAGE

Tag

RTU-1

RTU-2

Description

Kitchen

Rooftop Unit

Nominal Capacity

[Tons]

6

EER/SEER

12.6

Dining

Rooftop Unit

10 12.4

Total

[CFM]

2400

Airflow

OA

[CFM]

500

ESP

[in. w.c.]

1.0

Net Total

[MBH]

90

Net

Cooling Capacity

EAT [Deg. F]

Sensible

[MBH] DB WB

53 80 70

Cond. EAT

[Deg. F]

98

3750 1000 1.0

117 71 80 70 98

ROOFTOP UNIT SCHEDULE

Heating Capacity

Input

[MBH]

120

Output

[MBH]

96

EAT

[Deg. F]

58

Number of

Compressors

1

Number of

Circuits

1

Refrigerant

Type

R-410A

Refrigerant

Charge

7.5 LBS

Approximate

Weight [LBs]

1300

MOCP

50 A

Electrical Basis for Design

FLA V/P/H

32.3 A 208/3/60

Furnished

By

HES

Installed

By

GC

Manufacturer

Trane

Model

YHC072

200 160 55 2 2 R-410A 7.1/5.0 LBS 1800 60 A 48.9 A 208/3/60 HES GC Trane YHC120

Remarks

FURNISHED WITH LOW LEAK COMPARATIVE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZER W/ BAROMETRIC RELIEF,

HINGED PANELS, MERV 8 FILTERS, HAIL GUARD, CIRCUIT BREAKER,UNPOWERED CONVENIENCE

RECEPTACLE, RETURN AIR SMOKE DETECTOR, LIGHTSTAT WITH REMOTE SENSOR, AND ROOF CURB

FURNISHED WITH LOW LEAK COMPARATIVE ENTHALPY ECONOMIZER W/ BAROMETRIC RELIEF,

HINGED PANELS, MERV 8 FILTERS, HAIL GUARD, CIRCUIT BREAKER,UNPOWERED CONVENIENCE

RECEPTACLE, RETURN AIR SMOKE DETECTOR, LIGHTSTAT WITH REMOTE SENSOR, AND ROOF CURB

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

HVAC Schedules

M200

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

Consultant:

7

M300

EXPOSED DUCT SUPPORT

N.T.S.

DETECTION LINE

AGENT LINE

PLENUM PROTECTION NOZZLE

DUCT PROTECTION NOZZLE

DETECTORS

APPLIANCE PROTECTION NOZZLE

SYSTEM CONTROL AUTOMAN

WITH AGENT TANK ENCLOSED

REMOTE MANUAL PULL

STATION WITH WIRE GUARD

5

M300

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

N.T.S.

UL-LISTED HIGH TEMP INCANDESCENT

LIGHT FIXTURE ASSEMBLY INCLUDING

CLEAR THERMAL AND SHOCK RESISTANT

GLOBE

EXHAUST RISERS WITH DUCT

COLLAR TEMPERATURE SENSORS

HANGING ANGLE

(TYPICAL)

NOTE:

HOOD FIRE PROTECTION NOZZLES AND DETECTORS ARE

SCHEMATIC ONLY. HOOD SUPPLIER SHALL PREPARE HOOD

SHOP DRAWINGS SHOWING ACTUAL DEVICE LAYOUT AND

SHALL OBTAIN PERMITS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS WORK.

16"-TALL CAPTRATE SOLO FILTERS

WITH HOOK

1" LAYER OF FACTORY-INSTALLED

INSULATION IN 3" INTERNAL STANDOFF

TO MEET 0" CLEARANCE TO

COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE REQUIREMENTS

GREASE DRAIN WITH REMOVABLE

CUP

23" QUARTER END PANELS AT EACH

END

1'

1'-10"

COOKING

EQUIPMENT

4

M300

HOOD SECTION VIEW

N.T.S.

PROVIDE CONTINUOUS WELD

CONNECTION BETWEEN THE

VIROGUARD AND THE GREASE DUCT

EXHAUST FAN HINGE ON THIS SIDE

1-1/4" PVC GREASE DRAIN VALVE

1-1/2" HOSE BARB

PROVIDE FLASHING,

COUNTER-FLASHING, AND

CANT. STRIP AS REQUIRED

U.L. LISTED GREASE

UPBLAST EXHAUST FAN

VIROGUARD GREASE CONTROL DEVICE

SPIN-IN COLLAR WITH

MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER

RAIN SHIELD HINGE

TRANSITION TO 18" SQUARE

MIN. OF 3" BELOW TOP OF CURB

ROOF

DECKING

SHIM CURB AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN 18"

CLERANCE FROM BOTTOM OF VIROGUARD TO

ROOF SURFACE AND OTHER COMBUSTIBLE

MATERIALS. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR

ANY REQUIRED CONNECTION DETAILS.

INSTALL PREFABRICATED VENTED

ROOF CURB FURNISHED BY CHIPOTLE

GREASE DUCT

NOTE:

1. INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 96 REQUIREMENTS.

2. THE INSIDE DIMENSION OF THE GREASE DUCT AT THE CURB TERMINATION SHOULD BE 18"

SQUARE FINISHED SIZE FOR THE TOP 3".

3. HINGE FAN SO IT TIPS BACK TOWARD FAN DRAIN AND TOWARD VIROGUARD DRAIN.

6

M300

GREASE EXHAUST FAN

N.T.S.

1

M300

5' MAX

DIFFUSER CONNECTION

N.T.S.

SUPPORT WITH 1"-WIDE STRAP TO

STRUCTURE ABOVE

INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT 6'-0" MAX

METAL CLAMP AROUND FLEX DUCT &

COLLAR TO BE DRAWN TIGHT & TAPED

SUPPLY DUCT

REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL

DWGS. FOR CEILING TYPE

NOTE:

1. METHOD OF INSTALLATION FOR AIRTIGHT SEAL IS TYPICAL

FOR ALL FLEX CONNECTIONS TO AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES.

CEILING DIFFUSER PROVIDE SQUARE

TO ROUND ADAPTOR AS NEEDED

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

FIRE RATED ENCLOSURE - GREASE DUCTS

1.

THERMAL CERAMICS FIREMASTER FASTWRAP XL OR PYROSCAT XL HAS

BEEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E2336 TO PROVIDE ZERO

CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLES AND MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS FOR

ONE OR TWO HOUR ENCLOSURES. THROUGH PENETRATIONS

FIRESTOP SYSTEMS ARE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH EITHER ASTM

E 814 OR UL 1479. ICC-ES APPROVAL PER REPORT ESR 2213 OR ESR

2832. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES (UL) LISTINGS SHOW

COMPLIANCE TO UL 1479 FOR THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP

SYSTEMS.

2.

INSULATION APPLIED IN TWO LAYERS WITH TIGHT COMPRESSION

JOINT ON INSIDE LAYER AND 3 INCH MINIMUM OVERLAPS ON BOTH

PERIMETER AND LONGITUDINAL OVERLAPS ON OUTSIDE LAYER.

3.

GREASE EXHAUST DUCT RUNS FROM THE HOOD EXHAUST

CONNECTION UP TO THE EXHAUST FAN ON THE ROOF WITH MINIMAL

TURNS OR BENDS AND MAINTAINING MINIMUM 1/4 UNIT VERTICAL

RISE PER 12 UNITS HORIZONTAL RUN.

4.

INSTALL UL LISTED AND WATER TIGHT ACCESS DOORS AT ALL CHANGES

IN DIRECTION AND AT MINIMUM EVERY 20 FT ON HORIZONTAL RUNS.

SEE DETAIL 3/THIS SHEET FOR ACCESS DOOR SPECIFICATION.

5.

ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN IS MOUNTED ON A HINGED BASE

WHICH ALLOWS ACCESS TO THE DUCT FROM THE ROOF.

6.

SUPPORT HANGER SYSTEMS DO NOT NEED TO BE WRAPPED PROVIDED

THE HANGER RODS ARE AT LEAST A MINIMUM OF 3/8 IN. DIAMETER.

USE MINIMUM 2 X 2 X 1/8 IN. STEEL ANGLE OR SMACNA

EQUIVALENT SUPPORT SYSTEM.

7.

THERMAL CERAMICS DUCT ENCLOSURE SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED

IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.

8.

THERMAL CERAMICS DUCT WRAP SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE DUCT

FROM THE HOOD CONNECTION TO THE CONNECTION TO THE FAN.

3 IN. (76MM) MIN. PERIMETER

OVERLAP ON OUTSIDE LAYER

TIGHT COMPRESSION

JOINT ON INSIDE LAYER

2 x 2 x 1/8 IN. MIN. ANGLE

3 IN. (76 MM) MIN.

LONGITUDINAL OVERLAP ON

OUTSIDE LAYER

1/2 IN. (13MM) MIN. CARBON OR STAINLESS STEEL

BANDING - 0.015 IN. MIN. THICKNESS TYPICAL - PLACED

AT 10-1/2 IN. SPACING AND CENTERED OVER OVERLAPS

Thermal Ceramics

P.O. Box 923

Augusta, Georgia 30903-0923

Phone: (706) 560-4038

2

M300

FIREMASTER DUCT WRAP - UL HNKT-G18

N.T.S.

ENCLOSURE PANEL TO BE

APPROXIMATELY 2" ABOVE FINISHED

CEILING. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR

CEILING HEIGHT.

MUA PLENUM SUPPLY RISERS

WITH VOLUME DAMPERS

AC PLENUM SUPPLY RISERS WITH

VOLUME DAMPERS

EF-1

ON ROOF

6'-8"AFF

AC PERFORATED SUPPLY PLENUM

MUA PERFORATED SUPPLY PLENUM

14/1

0

HD-1

20/14

14/10

20/14

14/20

16/16

HD-1

PROVIDE FIRE RESISTANT INSULATION ON

TYPE I HOOD EXHAUST DUCT FROM

CONNECTION TO HOOD TO

CONNECTION TO EXHAUST FAN PER

DETAIL 2/M300

SLOPE HORIZONTAL GREASE DUCT A

MINIMUM OF 1/4" PER FOOT DOWN

TOWARD THE CONNECTION TO THE

HOOD.

MAINTAIN SYMMETRY IN GREASE

EXHAUST DUCT'S TRANSITION TO THE

EXHAUST RISER

GREASE DUCT CLEANOUTS SHALL BE

UL-LISTED DUCTMATE PREINSULATED

CLEANOUT DOORS MODEL

D128ULWSBI FOR DUCTS AT LEAST 17"

TALL AND DW128ULWSBI FOR DUCTS

LESS THAN 17" TALL. CLEANOUTS

SHALL BE FURNISHED BY OWNER.

COORDINATE NUMBER AND SIE

REQUIRED WITH ENVIROMATIC.

INSTALL AS SHOWN IN THE HVAC

FLOOR PLAN

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Contents:

HVAC Details

Checked:

MPC

M300

8

M300

DUCT SECTION AT HOOD

1/4" = 1'-0"

3

M300

DUCT SECTION AT HOOD

1/4" = 1'-0"

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A.

SECTION REQUIREMENTS

1.

Comply with the requirements of the Building Code and the local authority having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A.

Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing.

B.

Building Attachments: Powder actuated type, drive pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire protection systems.

C.

Mechanical Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and

FM approval for fire protection systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

B.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

C.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

D.

Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast iron pipes for wall sleeves.

E.

Fire Barrier Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations with through-penetration firestop systems.

F.

Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

G.

Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas piping.

H.

Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in water piping.

I.

Provide full ring escutcheons at plumbing penetrations through walls or ceilings. Tightly seal escutcheons to the adjacent surface.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A.

Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

B.

Install powder actuated drive pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C.

Install mechanical anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick.

D.

Support fire protection system piping independent of other piping.

E.

Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

END OF SECTION 15055

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

B.

Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE INSULATION

A.

Preformed Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, with factory applied, all purpose, vapor retarder jacket.

B.

Polyolefin Pipe Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534,

Type I, except for density.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F.

B.

Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.

C.

Seal vapor barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.

D.

Coat glass fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating.

E.

Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof flashing.

F.

Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal.

G.

Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire rated walls and partitions.

H.

Fire Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire rated walls and partitions. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems.

I.

Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at the underside of the floor assembly and at the floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems.

J.

Glass Fiber Insulation Installation: Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound.

K.

Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems:

1.

Domestic hot and cold water.

2.

Exposed sanitary drains of fixtures for the disabled.

L.

3.

Refrigerant piping.

Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1.

Flexible connectors.

2.

Fire protection piping systems.

3.

Sanitary drainage and vent piping.

4.

Chrome plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.

5.

Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.

M.

Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials and thicknesses:

1.

Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 1/2-inch preformed glass fiber pipe insulation.

2.

Sanitary Drains: 1/2-inch polyolefin pipe insulation.

END OF SECTION 15080

SECTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES

A.

End Connections: Threads shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Flanges shall comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall comply with ANSI

B16.18.

B.

Ball Valves: Rated for 150 psig saturated steam pressure, 400 psig WOG pressure; 2 piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl covered steel handle.

C.

Plug Valves: Rated at 150 psig WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern, square head, and threaded ends.

D.

Swing Check Valves: Class 125, cast bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc.

E.

Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam service.

F.

Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Use gate and ball valves for shutoff duty and ball for throttling duty.

B.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C.

Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment.

D.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E.

Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

F.

Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.

END OF SECTION 15110

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated minimum pressure requirements for water piping are as follows:

1.

Service Entrance Piping: 100 psig.

2.

Domestic Water Piping: 80 psig.

B.

Comply with NSF 14 "Plastic Piping Components and Materials."

C.

Comply with NSF 61 "Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A.

Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.

B.

PVC Plastic, Water Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80, plain ends.

2.2 FITTINGS

A.

Wrought Copper, Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.22.

B.

Cast Copper Alloy, Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18.

C.

Bronze Flanges: ASME B 16.24, Classes 150 and 300.

D.

Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast copper alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball and socket joint, metal to metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1.20.1.

E.

PVC Plastic, Schedule 80, Socket Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2467.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A.

Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, lead free.

B.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements.

C.

Solvent Cements: As recommended by manufacturer.

D.

Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A.

Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated.

B.

Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.

C.

Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system.

D.

Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated.

E.

Install ball valves in each hot water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A.

Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable plumbing code and as recommended by pipe manufacturer.

B.

Support vertical piping at each floor.

3.3 INSPECTING AND CLEANING

A.

Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 15140

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Minimum Pressure Requirement for Soil, Waste and Vent: 10 feet head.

B.

Comply with NSF 14 "Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A.

PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, plain ends.

2.2 FITTINGS

A.

PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311; socket type; drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A.

Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer.

B.

Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

3.2 INSPECTION

A.

Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 15150

SECTION 15198 - NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Quality Assurance: Comply with NFPA 54 and the Plumbing Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND SPECIALTIES

A.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S (Seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40, plain ends.

B.

Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150.

C.

Manual Valves: Comply with standards listed or, if appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15.

D.

Gas Stops: AGA certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze plug, for 2-psig

E.

or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or square head or lever handle, and threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.

F.

Gas Valves: 150-psig WOG, cast-iron or bronze body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type.

G.

Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion resistant pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated.

1.

Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure.

H.

Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.

I.

Strainers: Bronze body, Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with 3/64 inch perforations and a pressure rating of 125-psig- minimum, WOG working pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section.

B.

Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.

C.

Install gas stops for shutoff to appliances with NPS 2" or smaller low pressure gas supply.

D.

Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.

E.

Install gas piping at uniform slope of 0.1 percent upward toward risers.

F.

Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

G.

Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

H.

Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.

I.

Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain.

J.

Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas-pressure regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator.

K.

Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. nstall gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install union or flanged connection downstream from valve.

L.

Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4, "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and

Purging", and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION 15198

SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

B.

Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act", regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures.

C.

Comply with applicable standards below:

1.

Enameled, Cast Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2.

National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NFS2.

3.

Porcelain Enameled Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.

4.

Slip Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.

5.

Stainless Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.3M.

6.

Vitreous China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Refer to the fixture schedule on drawing P200

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install fitting insulation kits on fixtures for the disabled.

B.

Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.

C.

Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for the disabled to reach.

D.

Fasten wall hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

E.

Fasten floor mounted fixtures to substrate. With fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, fasten to reinforcement built into walls.

F.

Fasten wall mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.

G.

Fasten counter mounted plumbing fixtures to casework.

H.

Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.

I.

Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.

J.

Install individual supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with cleanouts at fixture.

K.

Install water supply stop valves in accessible locations.

L.

Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

M.

Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

N.

Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary type, one part, mildew resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

O.

Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of fixtures for the disabled.

P.

Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B.

END OF SECTION 15410

SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Minimum Working Pressure Rating for Products:

1.

Water Distribution Piping: 80 psig.

B.

Submittals: Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Refer to fixture schedule on drawing P200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.

C.

Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.

1.

Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.

2.

Install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes.

END OF SECTION 15425

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Plumbing Specifications

P010

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

PROVIDE WATER SHUTOFF VALVE

2"

EXT'G 2" PIPE

WATER INLET PORT

NOZZLE

AIR GAP EDUCTOR

VENTURI PROPORTIONER

PRODUCT FEED

PRODUCT PICK-UP INLET

DISCHARGE TUBE

4

P100

CHEMICAL DISPENSER DETAIL

N.T.S.

2"

2-1/2"

G

1-1/2"

G

THROUGH ROOF

G G

1-1/2"

GM

EXT'G GAS METER

DWH-1

FB-1 RC-1 RN-1 GR-1

3

P100

GAS DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

SOFTENER INSTALLATION NOTES

A.

B.

C.

DETAIL IS BASED ON CUNO

MODEL CFSM1254E.

CONNECT SOFT WATER FEED TO

WATER HEATER PRIOR TO

RECIRCULATION SYSTEM CHECK

VALVE.

SEE WATER HEATER DETAIL FOR

CONTINUATION

6.

7.

SOFTENER DETAIL NOTES

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

8.

RESIN TANK.

BRINE TANK.

1" BALL VALVE.

1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER. (74" AFF)

1" SOFT WATER FEED TO WATER

HEATER. (74" AFF)

3/4" SCH 80 PVC.

PLUG UNIT INTO GFCI PROTECTED

OUTLET

DUNNAGE RACK

4

1

6

8

FIXTURE

WATER HEATER

FRYER

GRIDDLE

MAKEUP AIR UNIT

RICE COOKER

RANGE

ROOFTOP UNIT

ROOFTOP UNIT

Grand total

NOTES:

CONNECTED GAS LOAD

TAG

DWH-1

FB-1

GR-1

MAU-1

RC-1

RN-1

RTU-1

RTU-2

1124

1.

PRESSURE REQUIRED AFTER METER: 7" W.C.

2.

DISTANCES ARE APPROXIMATE

MBH

150

95

107

225

35

192

120

200

EQUIVALENT LENGTH

FROM METER [FT]

90

100

115

95

105

110

80

105

MAX: 115

5

P100

WATER SOFTENER DETAIL

N.T.S.

BFP-2

3

2"

3/4"

1-1/2"

RTU-1

BFP-1

1-1/2"

G

FLOOR DRAIN

1/2"

MAU-1 RTU-2

G

1-1/2"

G

1-1/4"

G

1-1/4"

G

7

5

2

FINISHED FLOOR

1/2"

1/2"

TO BAG-

IN-BOX

TO ICE

MACHINE

1"

SK-2 HB-2

1-1/2"

2

P100

PLUMBING SUPPLY DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

WS-1

S

RH-1

THROUGH ROOF

1"

1"

1-1/2"

3/4"

S

1-1/4"

1"

1"

3/4"

S

1/2"

S

1"

1/2"

3/4"

3/4"

1/2"

1/2"

S

P-1

DWH-1

1/2"

3/4" 1/2"

HS-2

WH-1

SK-1

12

HB-1

15

SK-1

17

7

GM

G

HB-1

MB-1

17

G

6 12

HS-2

16

HS-2 MB-1 HB-1

SK-1 HB-1 SK-1

HS-1

WC-1

HS-1

WC-1

WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

9

10

RTU-1

ON ROOF

G

F

5

1

21

RH-1

G

S

WS-1

24

2

S

23

S

P-1

F

BFP-2

S

SK-2

13

BFP-1

G

4

17

HB-2

3

DWH-1

14

11

F

FB-1

25

RC-1

RN-1

8

PLUMBING SYMBOLS

F

S

G

G

X

WM

GM

XX-#

ABBREVIATIONS

AFF

AFG

CD

EXT'G

FCO

FD

FS

GCO

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

ABOVE FINISHED GRADE

CEILING DIFFUSER

EXISTING

FLOOR CLEANOUT

FLOOR DRAIN

FLOOR SINK

GRADE CLEANOUT

TMB

TMS

TP

TRS

TSV

WCS

CO2AS TENANT'S CO2 ALARM SUPPLIER

GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR

HES

TAB

TCC

TENANT'S HVAC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S TEST AND BALANCE VENDOR

TENANT'S CABLING CONTRACTOR

TES

THS

TLS

TENANT'S KITCHEN EQUIPEMNT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S HOOD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MENU BOARD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MILLWORK SUPPLIER

TENANT'S PHONE SUPPLIER

TENANT'S RAILING SUPPLIER

TENANT'S SIGN VENDOR

TENANT'S WALK-IN COOLER SUPPLIER

ELBOW UP

ELBOW DOWN

DOMESTIC COLD WATER

DOMESTIC FILTERED COLD WATER

DOMESTIC SOFTENED COLD WATER

DOMESTIC HOT WATER (110 DEGREES)

DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC.

GAS

GAS (ON ROOF)

PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON

THE SAME SHEET FOR NOTE MEANING

CONNECT TO EXISTING

REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKFLOW PREVENTER

WATER METER

GAS METER

EQUIPMENT TAG: SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

ON SHEET P200 FOR EQUIPMENT

INFORMATION

VALVE

SOLENOID-OPERATED VALVE

WALL HYDRANT/ROOF HYDRANT

CHECK VALVE

CIRCUIT-SETTER BALANCE VALVE RATED

FOR POTABLE WATER

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

CATEGORY

WATER

SUPPLY PIPE

NATURAL GAS

PIPE

APPLICATION

ABOVE GRADE

CONCEALED

EXPOSED

ALLOWABLE

MATERIAL

TYPE L

COPPER TUBE

SCH. 40 STEEL PIPE,

MALLEABLE IRON

THREADED FITTINGS

SCH. 40 STEEL PIPE,

MALLEABLE IRON THREADED

FITTINGS, PAINTED

PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES

D

E

A

B

F

G

H

C

GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO PLUMBING SHEETS.

PLUMBING WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLUMBING CODE, LOCAL HEALTH

DEPARTMENT STANDARDS, AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. SEE SHEET A000 FOR THE

PREVAILING CODES.

PIPING LAYOUTS ON DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. EXACT LOCATIONS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE

EXISTING CONDITIONS AND THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES.

CONCEAL PIPING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WATER SUPPLY PIPES SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL.

PROVIDE SHUT-OFF VALVES FOR ISOLATION OF FIXTURE GROUPS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS IN ADDITION TO

STOP VALVES AT EACH FIXTURE.

PROVIDE STOP VALVES AT FIXTURES.

PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS FOR FLOOR DRAINS.

WHERE THE WATER OR GAS SUPPLY LINE SIZE SHOWN IN THE PLUMBING DIAGRAMS DIFFERS FROM THE

FIXTURE OR EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SIZE, PROVIDE LINE SIZE PIPE TO WITHIN 6" OF THE FIXTURE OR

EQUIPMENT BEFORE TRANSITIONING TO THE CONNECTION SIZE.

I

J

PIPING IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE INSULATION AND THE INTERIOR WALL

FINISHING MATERIAL.

INSULATE THE HOT AND COLD WATER, CONDENSATE DRAINAGE, AND STORM PIPING PER THE

SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAIL 6/P300.

K PROVIDE GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES AT EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE DIRT LEG AT THE

BOTTOM OF VERTICAL SECTIONS OF GAS PIPE AND AT THE CONNECTION TO EACH PIECE OF EQUIPMENT.

PLUMBING FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, AND MATERIALS PROVIDED FOR DOMESTIC WATER SHALL BE LEAD FREE.

L

M PRIOR TO TURNOVER PERFORM A VIDEO INSPECTION OF THE SANITARY AND GREASE LINES FROM THE MAIN

LINES WITHIN THE TENANT SPACE TO THE MAIN SEWER TO VERIFY THAT THE SANITARY WASTE SYSTEM IS

CONNECTED, CLEAN, AND FREE OF SAGS, BELLIES, BREAKS, AND DEBRIS. DELIVER A REPORT AND COPY OF THE

VIDEO TO THE TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO TURNOVER.

N THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR UNLOADING,

UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "INSTALL" DESCRIBES THE

OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, ERECTING,

PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING,

AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "PROVIDE" MEANS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY

FOR THE INTENDED USE.

O PRIOR TO CONNECTION TO ANY EXISTING SEWER SYSTEM PERFORM A DIE TEST TO VERIFY THE TYPE OF

SYSTEM AND THE DIRECTION OF FLOW. REPORT ANY DEVIATION FROM THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TO

THE TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

P PROVIDE SANITARY AND GREASE WASTE PIPES AT A MINIMUM SLOPE OF 1/4" PER FOOT UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE.

#

PLAN NOTES

1

2

3

4

5

6

CONNECT TO THE EXISTING 2" DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE.

PROVIDE 1/2" FILTERED WATER TO THE BAG-IN-BOX SODA CARBONATOR AT 102" AFF. SODA CARBONATOR SHALL

HAVE AN INTEGRAL ASSE 1022-RATED CARBONATED BEVERAGE BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE.

PROVIDE WATER HEATER DWH-1 PER DETAIL 1/P300.

PROVIDE WATER FILTERS MOUNTED TO WALL PER DETAIL 11/P300. PROVIDE 1/2" SUPPLY PIPES FROM FILTERS TO ICE

MAKER AND SODA CARBONATOR AS SHOWN.

PROVIDE 1/2" FILTERED WATER TO THE ICE MAKER AT 56" AFF. FINAL CONNECTION TO ICE MAKER SHALL BE A

MINIMUM OF 1/2".

PROVIDE DOMESTIC WATER ROUGH-INS FOR THE MOP BASIN FAUCET AT 36" AFF. PROVIDE DOMESTIC WATER

ROUGH-INS FOR THE CHEMICAL DISPENSER FAUCET (HB-1) AT 64" AFF DIRECTLY ABOVE THE MOP BASIN FAUCET. SEE

ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION FOR DETAIL.

7

8

CONNECT TO THE EXISTING GAS METER.

PROVIDE GAS CONNECTIONS TO THE COOKING EQUIPMENT PER DETAIL 2/P300.

9 SUPPORT THE GAS PIPE ON THE ROOF PER DETAIL 5/P300. WOOD BLOCKING IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE METHOD OF

SUPPORTING THE GAS PIPE.

10 PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE LINE-SIZED GAS VALVE, DIRT LEG, AND UNION AT GAS CONNECTION TO THE EQUIPMENT.

11 PAINT INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR EXPOSED GAS PIPING WITH ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER AND ONE FINAL COAT OF

EXTERIOR ENAMEL. FINAL COLOR SHALL MATCH SURROUNDING FINISHES

12 PROVIDE DOMESTIC WATER ROUGH-INS FOR THE CHEMICAL DISPENSER FAUCET (HB-1) AT 52" AFF. SEE

ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION FOR DETAIL.

13 PROVIDE DOMESTIC WATER ROUGH-INS FOR THE VICTORY WASH DISPENSER FAUCET (HB-2) AT 52" AFF. SEE

ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION FOR DETAIL.

14 PROVIDE KITCHEN EQUIPMENT GAS SHUTOFF 6" BELOW THE CEILING PER DETAIL 10/P300.

15 CONNECT CHEMICAL DISPENSER TO HB-1. CHEMICAL DISPENSER HAS AN INTEGRAL AIR GAP AS IS SHOWN IN DETAIL

4/THIS SHEET.

16 PROVIDE ASSE 1016/1070 POINT-OF-USE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE, WATTS USG-B, ON WATER SUPPLY TO

KITCHEN HAND SINKS. PROVIDE ANGLE STOP BELOW SINK, FASTEN MIXING VALVE TO WALL, AND MAKE FINAL

CONNECTION FROM ANGLE STOPS TO MIXING VALVE AND FROM MIXING VALVE TO FAUCET USING BRAIDED

STAINLESS STEEL HOSE. ADJUST MIXING VALVE FOR A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE OF APPROXIMATELY 110° F.

17 PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE VALVE IN WATER SUPPLY TO FIXTURE AS SHOWN.

18 PROVIDE WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR ON WATER SUPPLY PIPE TO WATER CLOSET.

19 HOLD EXPOSED DOMESTIC WATER PIPES TIGHT TO THE DECK AND TIGHT TO THE DEMISING WALL AS SHOWN. PAINT

THE PIPE INSULATION TO MATCH THE ROOF DECK.

20 PROVIDE DOMESTIC WATER PIPES ABOVE THE RESTROOMS BELOW THE TOP OF THE PLYWOOD BOX ELEMENT UNLESS

NOTED OTHERWISE.

21 PROVIDE AN ACCESSIBLE MAIN DOMESTIC WATER SHUTOFF VALVE ABOVE LAY-IN CEILING AS SHOWN. VALVE SHALL

BE 12" ABOVE THE TOP OF THE LAY-IN CEILING. PERMANENTLY INSTALL THE "WATER SHUTOFF" SIGN TO THE CEILING

GRID BELOW THE VALVE.

23 PROVIDE WATER SERVICE ENTRY PER DETAIL 3/P300.

24 PROVIDE WATER SOFTENER AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 5/THIS SHEET.

25 PROVIDE GAS CONNECTION TO THE RICE COOKER PER DETAIL 9/P300.

26 PROVIDE ROUGH-INS TO RESTROOM HAND SINKS AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 13/SHEET P300.

19

9

RTU-2

ON ROOF

10

26

HS-1

18

20

26 HS-1

WC-1

18

WC-1

G

9

10

MAU-1

ON ROOF

GR-1

HS-2

16

WH-1

1

P100

PLUMBING SUPPLY PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Plumbing Plan Water &

Gas

P100

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

3"

EXISTING 4" SEWER

2"

FD-1

3"

4"

HS-1

WC-1

3"

FS-1

3"

4"

3"

2"

FD-1

3"

HS-1

WC-1

3"

4"

C.O.

PLUMBING SYMBOLS

GW

CD

#

XX-#

ELBOW UP

ELBOW DOWN

SANITARY WASTE

GREASE WASTE

SANITARY VENT

CONDENSATE DRAIN

PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON

THE SAME SHEET FOR NOTE MEANING

CONNECT TO EXISTING

FLOOR DRAIN

FLOOR SINK

CLEANOUT

EQUIPMENT TAG: SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

ON SHEET P200 FOR EQUIPMENT

INFORMATION

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

CATEGORY

SANITARY

WASTE &

VENT PIPE

APPLICATION

ABOVE GROUND,

CONCEALED

ABOVE GROUND PREP

SINK AND WARE

WASHING SINK DRAINS

ABOVE GROUND HAND

SINK DRAINS

BELOW GROUND

ALLOWABLE

MATERIAL

PVC PLASTIC DWV

PIPE AND FITTINGS

PVC PLASTIC DWV PIPE

AND FITTINGS

BRASS WITH CHROME

FINISH

PVC PLASTIC DWV

PIPE AND FITTINGS

#

PLAN NOTES

1 PROVIDE 3/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM THE WALK-IN COOLER EVAPORATOR TO THE FLOOR SINK BELOW THE

ICE MAKER AS SHOWN. SLOPE CONDENSATE DRAIN A MINIMUM OF 1" PER FOOT. HOLD EXPOSED CONDENSATE

DRAIN IN WALK-IN COOLER AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. CONCEAL DRAIN PIPING WITHIN FRAMED WALLS AS SHOWN.

DISCHARGE THROUGH AN AIR GAP.

2 PROVIDE DRAIN CONNECTIONS TO THE FOUR COMPARTMENT SINK PER DETAIL 4/P300.

3 PROVIDE A 6" SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDUIT SODA LINE SLEEVE UNDER THE SLAB FROM THE BAG-IN-BOX RACK TO

THE SODA FOUNTAIN PER DETAIL 7/P300. SEE THE ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLAN FOR THE LOCATIONS OF THESE

STUBS.

4 PROVIDE DRAINAGE PIPES FROM THE ICE MACHINE TO THE FLOOR SINK PER THE MANUFACTURER'S

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE A CODE-APPROVED AIR GAP AT THE DISCHARGE TO THE FLOOR SINK.

5 PROVIDE DRAIN LINES FROM THE FOOD PREP SINK TO THE FLOOR SINK. PROVIDE AN AIR GAP AT THE DISCHARGE

TO THE FLOOR SINK.

6 PROVIDE A 3" VENT THROUGH THE ROOF PER DETAIL 8/P300.

7 CONNECT TO EXISTING 4" GREASE WASTE LINE LEADING TO EXISTING 1000 GALLON INTERCEPTOR.

8 CONNECT TO EXISTING 4" SANITARY SEWER.

9 PROVIDE 3/4" VALVED DRAIN FROM HOT FOOD TABLE TO THE FLOOR SINK. DRAIN THROUGH AN AIR GAP.

10 PROVIDE INSULATED COPPER DRAIN LINES FROM THE TEA TRAY DRAIN AND THE SODA MACHINE DRAIN TO THE

FLOOR SINK. DRAIN THROUGH AN AIR GAP.

11 PROVIDE EXPOSED INDIRECT DRAIN FROM THE SALAD SPINNER DRAIN CONNECTION TO THE FLOOR SINK

BELOW. DRAIN THROUGH AN AIR GAP.

12 HOLD HORIZONTAL VENT PIPES ABOVE THE RESTROOM BELOW THE TOP OF THE PLYWOOD BOX ELEMENT.

PAINT EXPOSED VERTICAL VENT PIPES TO MATCH THE ROOF DECK.

13 DO NOT PROVIDE WALL CLEANOUTS OFF TILE AND PLYWOOD SURFACES. IF A WALL CLEANOUT IS REQUIRED IN

A TILE SURFACE COORDINATE THE EXACT LOCATION WITH CHIPOTLE'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

14 PROVIDE INDIRECT WASTE AND CONDENSATE DRAINS FROM FIXTURES OTHER THAN KITCHEN SINKS CONCEALED

IN THE WALL AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 12/P300.

15 PROVIDE DRAIN FROM WATER FILTER BFP TO FLOOR DRAIN CONCEALED IN THE WALL AS SHOWN IN DETAIL

12/P300.

16 TRIM TRENCH DRAIN ENDS PER THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION

SO THAT GRATE FITS WITHOUT GAPS. INSTALL TRENCH DRAIN WITH SLIGHT POSITIVE SLOPE TOWARD THE

DRAIN CONNECTION TO AVOID STANDING WATER IN TRENCH DRAIN.

8

SK-1

FS-1

14

2

16

TD-1

GW

7

FD-1

MB-1

1 1/2"ø

GW

2"ø

HS-2

2"ø

3" VTR

6

GW

11

FS-2 2 1/2"ø

2 1/2"ø

FS-1

SK-2

5

FD-1

15

FS-1

CD

4

GW

FD-1

1

CD

HS-1 FD-1

WC-1

2"ø

6

3" VTR

2 1/2"ø

HS-1

2"ø

FD-1

WC-1

12

3

10

FS-1

13

GW

FD-1

GW

GW

FS-1

HS-2

9

4"

EXISTING 4" GREASE WASTE

4"

TD-1

2"

4"

3"

FS-1

4"

GW

HS-2

4"

3"

GW

GW

FS-2

4"

2"

FD-1

GW

GW

GW

3"

FS-1

GW

4"

GW

GW

3"

FS-1

2"

FD-1

GW

GW

GW

HS-2

2"

FD-1

4"

C.O.

GW

GW

GW

3"

FS-1

FD-1

2"

4"

GW

C.O.

MB-1

3"

4"

C.O.

2

P110

SANITARY WASTE & VENT DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

1

P110

SANITARY WASTE & VENT PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

Consultant:

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Plumbing Plan Waste &

Vent

P110

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

TAG FIXTURE

BFP-1 RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER

BFP-2 RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER

ET-1 EXPANSION TANK

FD-1 FLOOR DRAIN

FS-1 FLOOR SINK

FS-2 FLOOR SINK

HB-1 HOSE BIBB

HB-2 HOSE BIBB

HS-1 RESTROOM HAND SINK

HS-2 KITCHEN HAND SINK

MB-1 MOP BASIN

P-1 RECIRCULATING PUMP

RH-1 FREEZE PROOF ROOF HYDRANT

SK-1 FOUR COMPARTMENT SINK

SK-2 PREP SINK

TD-1 TRENCH DRAIN

WC-1 WATER CLOSET

WH-1 FROST PROOF WALL HYDRANT

WS-1 WATER SOFTENER

MARK

DWH-1

FURNISHED

BY

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

TES

GC/TES

TES

GC/TES

GC

GC

TES

TES

GC

GC

GC

GC

PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

INSTALLED

BY

GC

MANUFACTURER

CONBRACO

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

CONBRACO

AMTROL

SIOUX CHIEF

SIOUX CHIEF

SIOUX CHIEF

T&S

T&S

KOHLER

FURNISHED BY TES

CREATIVE INDUSTRIES

TERRAZZO PRODUCTS

TACO

HOEPTNER

FURNISHED BY TES

FURNISHED BY TES

ZURN

AMERICAN STANDARD

WOODFORD

CUNO

MODEL DESCRIPTION

4ALF-203-T2F

4ALF-208

ST-12

842-2-PNR

861-3PU2

860-3P_3

B-2345-01-XX

B-0730

K-2084

--

LEAD FREE REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH AUTOMATIC

DIFFERENTIAL RELIEF VALVE

LEAD FREE REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH AUTOMATIC

DIFFERENTIAL RELIEF VALVE AND AIR GAP FITTING

4.4 GALLON CAPACITY

ADJUSTABLE FLOOR DRAIN, ROUND POLISHED METAL RING AND STRAINER

HEAVY DUTY PVC FLOOR SINK WITH ALUMINUM DOME BOTTOM STRAINER AND

OPEN HALF PVC GRATE

HIGH CAPACITY PVC FLOOR DRAIN WITH PVC OPEN-QUARTER STRAINER AND

ALUMINUM DOME BOTTOM STRAINER

COMMERCIAL QUALITY HOT & COLD MIXING WALL HYDRANT. SUPPLY ARMS SHALL

HAVE INTEGRAL SHUT-OFF STOP AND CHECK VALVE.

SILL FAUCET WITH 1/2" NPT FEMALE INLET AND 3/4" GARDEN HOSE THREADED

OUTLET.

ADA-ACCESSIBLE, WALL-MOUNTED, PORCELAIN LAVATORY. INSTALL PLUG-IN

AUTOMATIC FAUCET WITH 0.5 GPM AERATOR AND THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

FURNISHED BY KES. PROVIDE ZURN Z1231 (Z1231-D FOR BACK-TO-BACK

APPLICATIONS) CONCEALED ARM CARRIER IN WALL.

STAINLESS STEEL SINK WITH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET AND BACKSPLASH MOUNTED

FAUCET WITH SWIVEL GOOSENECK

MC3624-10

003-BC4-PNP

2131R

--

--

(2)Z883

PROVIDE TERRAZZO 36"x24"x10" HIGH MOP BASIN (COLOR: ICE) WITH STAINLESS

STEEL CAPS. CONTACT TERI GRENATO OR CAROLYN DEVIVO WITH CREATIVE

INDUSTRIES TERRAZZO PRODUCTS AT (773) 235-9088 TO ORDER. INSTALL SERVICE

SINK FAUCET WITH BUILT IN STOPS, VACUUM BREAKER LEVER HANDLES, AND WALL

BRACE FURNISHED BY TES.

DOMESTIC HOT WATER CARTRIDGE-TYPE CIRCULATOR WITH INTEGRAL TIMER.

PROVIDE WITH AQUASTAT SET AT APPROXIMATELY 100° F.

AUTOMATIC DRAINING, FREEZLESS WALL HYDRANT WITH ANTI-SIPHON VACUUM

BREAKER HOEPTNER PRODUCTS (408) 847-7615

FOUR-COMPARTMENT WARE-WASHING SINK FURNISHED WITH (1) PRE-RINSE UNIT

WITH ADD-ON FAUCET AND (1) MIXING FAUCET WITH 12" SWING NOZZLE

STAINLESS STEEL PREP TABLE WITH INTEGRAL PREP SINK. FURNISHED WITH "BIG FLO"

FAUCET

(2) 6" X 40" HDPE TRENCH DRAINS (80" OVERALL LENGTH) WITH (2) CLOSED END

CAPS, (1) 2" NO-HUB BOTTOM OUTLET, AND CLASS-A HEEL-PROOF POLYETHYLENE

GRATE

WC: 2257.001,

SEAT: 5901.100

ADA-COMPLIANT AFWALL ELONGATED WALL-MOUNT 1.6 GPF FLUSH VALVE TOILET.

INSTALL WITH SEAT HEIGHT SET AT 17" AFF. PROVIDE WITH SLOAN ECOS 8111-1.6/1.1

BATTERY-POWERED AUTOMATIC DUAL-FLUSH FLUSH VALVE AND ZURN ZN1203-N4

(ZURN ZN1203-ND4 FOR BACK-TO-BACK APPLICATIONS) SERIES WATER CLOSET

CARRIER. ADJUST FLUSH VALVE HEIGHT TO AVOID GRAB BARS PER THE

MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

MODEL 65

CFSM1245E

AUTOMATIC DRAINING, FREEZELESS WALL HYDRANT WITH ANTI-SIPHON VACUUM

BREAKER

POINT OF ENTRY HIGH CAPACITY WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

QUANTITY

1

1

1

6

5

1

2

1

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

32

CW

CONNECTION SIZES

HW WASTE

1/2"

2"

3/4"

1/2"

3/4"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1"

3/4"

1"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

2"

3"

3"

2"

2"

3"

2"

3"

GAS WATER HEATER

DESCRIPTION

CW

1

1.5

1.5

0

1.5

47.5

0

0

0

3

3

0

1

0

1.5

2.25

5

1

0

FIXTURE UNITS (EACH)

HW TOTAL

0

0

1.5

0

1.5

0

0

0

0

3

3

0

0

0

1.5

2.25

0

0

0

1

1.5

2

0

2

1

0

0

0

4

4

0

1

0

1

0

2

3

20

FURNISHED

BY

GC

INSTALLED

BY MANUFACTURER

GC A. O. Smith

MODEL

BTH-150

WATER HEATER SCHEDULE

STORAGE

100 gal

INPUT

150000 Btu/h

RECOVERY RATE [GPH] TEMP. RISE

255 70 °F

WATER CONN.

1 1/2"

WEIGHT

555

TANK DIAMETER

27 3/4"

SAN

0

0

1

5

0

0

0

2

5

6

1

3

0

0

4

0

0

0

2

3

3

0

1

0

10

1

0

79.25

0

0

17.25

NOTES

CW

1

1.5

3

0

3

47.5

0

0

0

FIXTURE UNITS (TOTAL)

HW TOTAL

0 1

0

3

0

3

0

0

0

0

1.5

4

0

4

1

0

0

0

SAN

0

0

2

5

0

0

0

12

25

3

2.25

3

2.25

4

3

2

3

3

3

0

0

0

0

4

4

0

1

0

40

1

0

68.5

0

0

67

4

0

0

0

2

12

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Plumbing Schedule

P200

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Consultant:

ET-1

8

6

7

SEE PLUMBING

DRAWINGS FOR PIPE SIZE

PROVIDE DECK PLATE

COMPATIBLE WITH THE

ROOFING SYSTEM

9

4

5

3

P-1

2

DWH-1

11

G

13

FLOOR DRAIN

WATER HEATER INSTALLATION NOTES

10

1X

P300

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

CLEAN INLET STRAINERS AFTER CONSTRUCTION HAS BEEN COMPLETED

AND PRIOR TO TURNOVER OF THE BUILDING TO THE OWNER.

INSTALL PIPING WITH AS FEW ELBOWS AS POSSIBLE.

MAINTAIN REQUIRED CLEARANCES TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS.

ADJUST WATER HEATER TO A SETPOINT OF 120° F.

ROTATE WATER HEATER SO THAT ACCESS PANELS, FLUE DRAIN TRAP, AND

CONTROL PANEL ARE READILY ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE.

WATER HEATER DETAIL

N.T.S.

12

DRAINAGE PORTS ON

THE SIDES OF THE

PIPE STAND BASE

1

ROOF DECK

COLD

RECIRC.

HOT

GAS

FINISHED CEILING

FINISHED FLOOR

PROVIDE PILLOW BLOCK

PIPE STAND OF

POLYCARBONATE RESIN

MATERIAL (MIRO

INDUSTRIES MODEL 1.5)

PILLOW BLOCK

PIPE STAND

DECK PLATE

ROOFING MATERIAL

PLAN

CENTER PIPE STAND

ON DECK PLATE

STRAP THE PIPE

TO THE PIPE STAND

STACK PIPE STANDS TO SECURELY

SUPPORT THE PIPE. WOOD BLOCKING

OR SHIMS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.

ELEVATION

PROVIDE PIPE STANDS AS SHOWN FOR STEEL PIPE FROM 1/2" TO 1-1/2" DIAMETER. SUPPORT SPACING FOR PIPE

SIZE: 1/2"=6'; 3/4"-1"=8'; 1 1/4" AND LARGER=10'; PROVIDE DECK PLATES ON ROOFING AND SET PIPE STAND

FREE ON DECK PLATES. STACK PIPE STAND WHERE REQUIRED TO ELEVATE PIPING. INSTALL GAS PIPE TO ALLOW FOR

EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION. PRIMER COAT AND PAINT EXTERIOR GAS PIPE. GAS PIPE ON THE ROOF SHALL BE

PAINTED YELLOW AND GAS PIPE INSTALLED EXPOSED ON EXTERIOR WALLS SHOULD BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE

WALL FINISH.

5

P300

ROOFTOP PIPING SUPPORT

N.T.S.

ROOF DECK

EXHAUST HOOD

OPEN STUDS

ABOVE CEILING

TO VENT THE

WALLCAVITY

CHROME

ONE-PIECE

ESCUTCHEON

(TYP.)

LAY-IN CEILING

THE ROUTING OF THE GAS

PIPE MUST COMPLY WITH

LOCAL CODES AND

AUTHORITIES HAVING

JURISDICTION

PROVIDE A LINE-SIZE MANUAL GAS

SHUTOFF VALVE BELOW THE CEILING

PROVIDE A LINE-SIZE

MECHANICAL-OPERATED GAS VALVE

BELOW THE CEILING. INTERCONNECT

TO THE HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM.

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS:

ROUTE MAIN GAS LINE FOR

UNDER HOOD EQUIPMENT IN

VENTED WALL SPACE

NORMAL MODE:

·

WHEN HOOD FAN IS ENERGIZED SOLENOID VALVE IS TO OPEN.

·

ON A LOSS OF POWER OR IF THE FAN IS DE-ENERGIZED THE

VALVE IS TO CLOSE.

EMERGENCY MODE:

·

UPON ACTUATION OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM OR A

SIGNAL FROM THE FIRE ALARM, THE SOLENOID VALVE IS TO CLOSE

10

P300

KITCHEN GAS SHUTOFF DETAIL

N.T.S.

WATER HEATER DETAIL NOTES

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

PROVIDE TWO 90° ELBOWS AND A SCREEN

FOR THE FLUE TERMINATION THROUGH ROOF.

PROVIDE RECIRCULATION PUMP P-1 AS SHOWN.

SUPPORT PUMP FROM WALL OR STRUCTURE ABOVE.

THE PUMP SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY A TIME

CLOCK SET FOR THE OCCUPIED HOURS OF THE

STORE AND AN AQUASTAT INSTALLED ON THE

RECIRC. PIPE UPSTREAM FROM THE PUMP.

PROVIDE LINE-SIZE CHECK VALVES IN COLD AND

RECIRCULATION WATER PIPES AS SHOWN.

PROVIDE EXPANSION TANK ET-1 AS SHOWN.

SUPPORT TANK FROM WALL OR STRUCTURE ABOVE.

PROVIDE A SCREENED AIR INTAKE WITH TWO 90°

ELBOWS ABOVE THE ROOF PER THE

MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

PROVIDE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. PIPE PRESSURE

RELIEF VALVE TO FLOOR DRAIN.

INSULATE EXPOSED AND CONCEALED HOT AND COLD

WATER PIPING TO WITHIN 3" OF THE WATER HEATER.

PROVIDE LINE-SIZE BALL VALVES IN COLD AND HOT

WATER PIPES AS SHOWN.

IF THE COLD, HOT, OR GAS PIPE LINE SIZE AS

SHOWN ON THE PLUMBING PLANS IS LARGER THAN

THE WATER HEATER CONNECTION SIZES, PROVIDE

REDUCERS WITHIN 6" OF THE WATER HEATER.

10.

PIPE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE AND

WATER HEATER CONDENSATE DRAIN TO THE FLOOR

DRAIN. DRAIN THROUGH AN AIR GAP.

11.

PROVIDE AN EXPOSED DRIP LEG AND LINE-SIZE GAS

VALVE ON THE GAS SERVICE TO THE WATER HEATER.

12.

PROVIDE A 4"Ø PVC FLUE FROM WATER HEATER TO

THE POINT OF DISCHARGE.

13.

PROVIDE A 4"Ø PVC INTAKE PIPE FROM THE WATER

HEATER TO THE POINT OF INTAKE.

1/2" SUPPLY

CONCEAL DRAIN PIPE IN WALL

FROM BFP TO POINT OF

DISCHARGE PER DETAIL 12/P300

MITER THE INSULATION AT TEES

AND ELBOWS SO THAT THERE

ARE NO GAPS AT JOINTS.

PROVIDE ONE-PIECE

PRE-MOULDED PVC FITTING

COVERS.

INSULATE VALVE BODIES. LEAVE

UNIONS FREE OF INSULATIONS.

PROVIDE INSULATION ON PIPES

WITHIN WALLS AND CHASES

6

P300

PIPE INSULATION DETAIL

N.T.S.

CONCEAL WATER SUPPLY

PIPE IN WALL AS SHOWN

BFP-1

3M HF90

WATER FILTER

90°

STREET

ELBOW

QUICK DISCONNECT

SWIVEL CONNECTION

KITCHEN

EQUIPMENT

ARRANGEMENT SHOWN IS SCHEMATIC. ADJUST TO SUIT ACTUAL CONDITIONS.

MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER.

PROVIDE WELDED FITTINGS/JOINTS IN ANY CONCEALED, UNSLEEVED LOCATION.

11

P300

2

P300

KITCHEN GAS EQUIPMENT DETAIL

N.T.S.

PROVIDE BYPASS VALVE

WITH RED HANDLE

1/2" FULL PORT BALL VALVE (TYP).

PROVIDE WITH GREEN HANDLE

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

CEILING

1/2" UNION (TYP)

3M HF8-S

SCALE INHIBITOR

WATER FILTRATION DETAIL

N.T.S.

90° STREET ELBOW

GAS STUBBED THRU

WALL AT 27"AFF

BALL VALVE

SWIVEL CONNECTION

6" DIRT LEG

FLEXIBLE GAS LINE

RESTRAINING CABLE

TAPE JOINTS OF

FIBERGLASS INSULATION

PROVIDE A ONE FOOT LENGTH

OF NONCOMPRESSIBLE

INSULATION AT HANGERS FOR

PIPE 2" AND LARGER

PROVIDE INSULATION ON INTERIOR COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING, CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE, AND STORM PIPE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION

REGARDING INSULATION. INSTALL ITEMS PER SPECIFICATIONS AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. MAINTAIN VAPOR BARRIER ON COLD WATER AND CONDENSATE PIPING BY

MEANS OF SEALANT AND TAPE. FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE-DEVELOPED INDEXES SHALL NOT EXCEED 25/50. SEAL EXPOSED ENDS OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ADHESIVE

MASTIC. PROVIDE PREFORMED GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION WITH PRE-MOLDED PVC JACKETS, SLEEVES, AND FITTING COVERS ON EXPOSED WATER PIPE SO THAT EXPOSED WATER

PIPE IS COVERED ENTIRELY WITH PVC INSULATION COVERS.

3/4" X 1/2"

REDUCER (TYP)

BFP-2

FINISHED FLOOR

PROVIDE FULL-SIZE

DRAIN FROM REDUCED

PRESSURE ZONE

BACKFLOW PREVENTER

TO FLOOR DRAIN.

DRAIN THROUGH AN

AIR GAP.

HOLD HORIZONTAL PIPES

TIGHT TO SINK BASINS

MAINTAIN AN AIR

GAP AT DISCHARGE

TO THE FLOOR SINK

NOTES:

3

P300

MAKE NECESSARY ARRANGEMENTS WITH WATER COMPANY TO INSTALL

NEW WATER SERVICE PER LOCAL CODES & WATER COMPANY

REGULATIONS AND PAY ALL CHARGES. SERVICE SHALL BE SIZED PER

THE PLUMBING PLAN & INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE OF WATER

COMPANY REGULATIONS. ANCHOR METER, BACKFLOW PREVENTER, AND

PIPING TO THE WALL OR THE FLOOR. CERTIFY THE BACKFLOW

PREVENTER PER THE WATER COMPANY'S REQUIREMENTS.

WATER SERVICE ENTRY DETAIL

N.T.S.

FLOOR DRAIN

12" MINIMUM

ABOVE ROOF AND

EXTENDED ABOVE THE

LEVEL OF THE PARAPET

4

P300

GREASE WASTE: SEE

SHEET P110 FOR

CONTINUATION

WARE-WASHING SINK DETAIL

N.T.S.

RICE COOKER

PROVIDE 1/2" GAS PIPE FROM RICE

COOKER GAS CONNECTION DOWN

THROUGH HOLE IN TABLE AS SHOWN

HOLE IN RICE

COOKER TABLE

2"

FLOOR SINK

ROOF INSULATION

INSTALL GAS QUICK DISCONNECT

FITTING BELOW TABLE AS SHOWN SO

RICE COOKER AND GAS PIPE CAN BE

REMOVED FROM TABLE WHEN QUICK

DISCONNECT IS DISCONNECTED. SEE

DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET FOR

CONTINUATION.

ROOF DECK

PROVIDE SLEEVE IF

REQUIRED BY ROOFING

SYSTEM

ANCHOR VENT PIPE TO

ROOF DECK OR JOIST

WITH U-BOLT AROUND

PIPE AND ANGLE IRON

SECURED TO THE DECK

OR A JOIST

REFER TO PLANS FOR VTR PIPE SIZES AND LOCATIONS. LOCATE VTR MINIMUM TEN FEET

HORIZONTAL OR THREE FEET VERTICAL ABOVE ANY BUILDING OPENING OR FRESH AIR

INTAKE, AND ONE FOOT FROM ANY VERTICAL SURFACE. PROVIDE 1" FIBERGLASS

INSULATION WITH ALL-SERVICE JACKET ON VENT PIPE INSIDE BUILDING WITHIN SIX FEET

OF VENT THRU ROOF LOCATION. FLASHING AND COUNTER FLASHING ARE TO BE

COMPATIBLE WITH THE ROOFING SYSTEM.

8

P300

VENT THROUGH ROOF

N.T.S.

STUB PIPE ABOVE FLOOR AT LOCATIONS

SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL FLOOR

PLAN. TRIM PIPE 6" AFF. TYPICAL FOR

BOTH ENDS.

SEAL FLOOR PENETRATION WITH

FLEXIBLE, WATERPROOF MATERIAL TO

COMPENSATE FOR PIPE EXPANSION.

TYPICAL FOR FLOOR PENETRATIONS.

9

P300

PVC CAP

FINISHED FLOOR

PROVIDE

CLEANOUTS IN

THE ENDS OF THE

PIPES

7 1/2"

RICE COOKER TABLE

RICE COOKER GAS CONNECTION DETAIL

N.T.S.

MIN.

12"

BFP-1

LENGTH AS

REQUIRED

PROVIDE SIX INCH SCHEDULE 40 PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT AND

FITTINGS WITH SOLVENT-WELDED JOINTS. USE MINIMUM QUANTITY OF

FITTINGS. PROVIDE LONG SWEEP ELBOWS AT BOTH ENDS, WITH

MINIMUM 16 INCH RADIUS. AVOID ELBOWS IN HORIZONTAL RUN. SEAL

ENDS OF CONDUIT WITH FOAM AFTER SYRUP LINE IS INSTALLED IN

CONDUIT. INSTALL PVC CAP WITH HOLE FOR SODA LINES ON EACH END

OF THE CONDUIT. SEAL HOLE IN PVC CAP AROUND SODA BUNDLE.

7

P300

SODA CONDUIT DETAIL

N.T.S.

DWH-1

BFP-2

1

P300

BFP AND WATER FILTER ELEVATION

1/4" = 1'-0"

1/2" TO BAG-N-BOX BACKFLOW

PREVENTER ON CARBONATOR

1/2" TO ICE MAKER BACKFLOW

PREVENTER

CONCEAL WATER SUPPLY

PIPES IN WALL AS SHOWN

PROVIDE BYPASS VALVE

WITH RED HANDLE

CONCEAL DRAIN

PIPE IN WALL AS

HIGH AS POSSIBLE

DRAIN PIPE

CONCEALED IN WALL

INDIRECT DRAIN PIPE

(TO BACKFLOW PREVENTER,

CONDENSATE DRAIN

CONNECTION, ETC.)

ESCUTCHEON (TYPICAL)

PLUG CONTROL MODULE IN TO RECEPTACLE.

SECURE CORD TIGHT TO WALL AND BOTTOM

OF SINK.

HOLD RECEPTACLE, WATER VALVES,

CONTROL MODULE, MIXING VALVE, AND

RELATED PIPING AND WIRES DIRECTLY

BELOW THE HAND SINK AS SHOWN

ROUGH-IN WATER STOP VALVES ON

LEFT SIDE OF HAND SINK AS SHOWN

SECURE WATER SUPPLY HOSES FROM

STOP VALVES TO MIXING VALVES TO WALL

MIN. (2) PIPE DIAMETERS

8"

2" 3" 3"

PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORT

ATTACHED TO THE FLOOR

OR WALL AS SHOWN

12

P300

INDIRECT WASTE RECEPTACLE

(FLOOR SINK, FLOOR DRAIN,

MOP SINK, ETC.)

INDIRECT WASTE PIPING DETAIL

N.T.S.

13

P300

RESTROOM HAND SINK DETAIL

N.T.S.

2

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

2 01/11/16 DB11

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Date of Last Print:

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Plumbing Details

P300

01/11/16

Consultant:

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 16011 TEMPORARY & PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SERVICE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A.

This section includes temporary lighting and power with luminaries, panelboards, circuit breakers. and enclosures.

B.

Related sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Grounding",

2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices"

3. Division 16 Section "Circuit Breakers"

4. Division 16 Section "Panel boards"

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A.

GFCI: Ground fault current interrupter.

B.

RMS: Root Mean Square

C.

SPDT: Single Pole, Double Throw

1.4 USE CHARGES

A.

General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner, Architect, or Engineer and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Owner's construction forces.

2. Occupants of Project.

3. Architect.

4. Engineer.

5. Testing agencies.

6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Permanent Service: Coordinate with building owner and utility company to establish permanent service upon completion of the project. Contractor shall pay for all permits, aid-to-construction charges, and related fees associated with the new service.

1.5 NOTIFICATION

A.

Coordinate with owner to provide 72 hour written notification to other tenants of any power interruptions. Notification shall state the estimated time and duration of the electrical outage.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's 'Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service.

Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

3. Comply with OSHA standards and regulations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A.

Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.

B.

Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 12S-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.

C.

Main panelboard with disconnect.

D.

Temporary lighting.

E.

120 volt receptacles with overcurrent protection.

F.

Enclosures. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, and overload-protected disconnecting means.

1. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.

B.

Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

2. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.

3. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.

4. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 1 DO-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

C.

Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas.

3. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, parking and traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.

4. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

END OF SECTION 16011

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this

Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the

International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.

Comply with UL 467.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A.

For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Wiring Methods."

B.

Material: Copper.

C.

Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D.

Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E.

Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1.

Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2.

Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2.2 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A.

Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A.

Use only copper conductors.

B.

In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C.

Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

D.

Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1.

Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2.

At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A.

Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A.

Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A.

General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

B.

Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No.

10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

C.

Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL

486A.

D.

Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

END OF SECTION 16060

SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Summary: Building wire and cable and associated splices, connectors, and terminations for wiring systems rated

600 V and less, and twisted-pair cable; and raceways and boxes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRES AND CABLES

A.

Connectors and Splices: Wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type and class for application and for service indicated.

2.2 RACEWAYS

A.

Wireways: Screwed cover type, with manufacturers standard finish.

B.

Outlet and Device Boxes: Sheet metal boxes, except use cast-metal boxes at exterior, interior exposed, and interior damp locations.

C.

Pull and Junction Boxes: Sheet metal boxes, except use nonmetallic boxes with gasketed covers at exterior and interior damp locations.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A.

Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

B.

Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install wires and cables according to the NECA's "Standard of Installation.

B.

Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.

C.

Conceal wiring, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

D.

Boxes and Enclosures: In damp or wet locations use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.

E.

Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1

-inch concrete cover.

G.

Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

H.

Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

I.

Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 18 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire.

J.

Install raceway sealing fittings where required by the NEC and at wiring entrances to refrigerated spaces. Locate at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

K.

Stub-up Connections for Equipment: Extend conductors to equipment with intermediate metal conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor.

L.

Install a separate green ground conductor in surface metal raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle and fixture ground terminals.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A.

Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B.

Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C.

Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:

1.

Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored encircling conduit, and place adjacent

2.

bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

Colors: As follows: 3.

a.

Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

D.

Color-code System secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

120/208V 277/480V

1.

2.

3.

4.

Phase A:

Phase B:

Phase C:

Neutral:

5.

Ground:

END OF SECTION 16100

Black

Red

Blue

White

Green

Brown

Orange

Yellow

Gray

Green

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: None.

B.

Comply with NEMA WD 1.

C.

Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DEVICES

A.

General: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Color: Per Material Schedule on sheet E100.

C.

Receptacles: Heavy- Duty grade, NEMA WD6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: integral duplex receptacle; for installation in box without an adapter.

Feed-through type, with a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet

E.

Isolated-Ground Receptacles: to the green grounding screw isolation from mounting strap. Equipment grounding contacts connected only terminal of the device with inherent electrical

F.

Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type.

G.

Wall Plate: Per Material Schedule on sheet E100.

H.

Floor Service Fittings: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.

B.

Mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, of receptacles on top unless otherwise indicated. under single, multigang wall plates.

C.

Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

D.

Install wall plates when painting is complete.

END OF SECTION 16140

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL (Not Applicable)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES

A.

Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.

2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

B.

Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with thermal-magnetic trip unless otherwise indicated.

1.

2.

Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated.

Interrupting Rating: PER DRAWINGS

3.

4.

5.

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers, 225 A and Larger: Trip units fixed

Current-Limiting Trips: Let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5.

Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING

C.

Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS.

END OF SECTION 16410

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Submittals: None.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS

A.

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide products by one of the following:

1.

Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a.

Square D Co.

b.

c.

Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.

d.

Siemens Energy & Automation.

B.

Recessed, NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Load Center Capacity: as shown on drawings.

Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps.

Doors: With concealed hinges, flush catches, and tumbler locks, all keyed alike.

Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.

C.

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, plug-in type, Single-handle for multipole circuit breakers. Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for repetitive switching lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

D.

Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination contactors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. Indicate installed circuit loads in English and

Spanish on a typed circuit directory after balancing panelboard loads.

B.

Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Future Circuit Provisions at Flush Panel boards: Stub four empty 3/4-inch conduits from panelboard into accessible or designated ceiling space.

D.

Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups, bundle and wrap with wire ties according to NEC guidelines.

E.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F.

Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated In NETA ATS.

END OF SECTION 16442

SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A.

Submittals: Product Data for each luminaire, including lamps.

B.

Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaires with ceiling construction, mechanical work, and security and fire-prevention features mounted In ceiling space and on ceiling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A.

Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

C.

Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

Set units level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure.

B.

Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Install ceiling support system rods or wires at a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.

C.

Support for Suspended Fixtures: Support according to manufacturers' recommendations.

D.

Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 16500

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Electrical Specifications

E010

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

1

R-9

R-10

R-11

R-12

R-13

R-14

R-15

R-16

R-1

R-2

R-3

R-4

R-5

R-6

R-7

R-8

RELAY

NUMBER

MASTER RELAY PANEL

LCD-G1416-DTC

LIGHTING

CONTROL MODULE

LCD DIGITAL

SWITCH

CONTROL

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

-

-

-

-

-

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

TIMECLOCK

PHOTO SENSOR ON

ROOF

DESCRIPTION

DINING

DINING

DINING

DINING

KITCHEN

KITCHEN

KITCHEN

KITCHEN

RR EXHAUST FAN 528 W

SIGNAGE 900 W

SIGNAGE 900 W

SPARE

SPARE

SPARE

SPARE

SPARE

364 W

368 W

133 W

133 W

512 W

502 W

111 W

148 W

1

J1

J3

K1

L1-10

L2-10

N1-3

P1

P3

E1

E2

E4

F1

H1

TAG QUANTITY

A1

B1

7

26

C1

C2

9

19

4

2

9

2

1

2

6

1

5

3

3

12

9

TYPE

2x2 LENSED TROFFER

RECESSED 6IN CAN LIGHT

LOW PROFILE FLUORESCENT 2FT

LOW PROFILE FLUORESCENT 3FT

EMERGENCY LIGHT - DUAL HEAD

EXTERIOR REMOTE EMERGENCY

LIGHT

WHITE EXIT LIGHT - STANDARD

RED LETTERS

2' T8 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE

HOOD LIGHT

PENDANT LIGHT - ADJUSTABLE

HEIGHT - PAR 20

PENDANT DOME LIGHT -

ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT - PAR20

KEYLESS DOWN LIGHT

LONG LIGHT - 10 TOP - PAR 20

LONG LIGHT - 10 TOP - PAR 20 -

W/ EM BALLAST

CHEVRON LIGHT 3FT - PAR 20

ACCENT LIGHT - SWIVEL SPOT

LIGHT - SINGLE HEAD

ACCENT LIGHT - ARTWORK LIGHT

FIXTURE

MOUNT

LAY-IN

CEILING

SURFACE

SURFACE

VARIOUS

VARIOUS

VARIOUS

SURFACE

SURFACE

CEILING

CEILING

CONCEALED

SUSPENDED

SUSPENDED

FLOOR

CEILING

WALL

FURNISHED

BY

TLS

TLS

TLS GC HERA

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

INSTALLED

BY

GC

GC

MANUFACTURER

COLUMBIA LIGHTING

NORA LIGHTING

MODEL

RLA22-30MLG-EU

NHIC-6G24ATFL with

NTM-57W/M1 Trim

ES22WW/BC

LAMP(S)

LED

(1) 17W ECOSTORY ECO-PAR38C-17-GU24-27K-25D LED

(25°-2700K) W/ GU 24 BASE

(1) FP14/830/ECO (INCLUDED)

TLS GC HERA ES34WW/BC (1) FP21/830/ECO (INCLUDED)

TLS

TLS

TLS

TLS

THS/TLS

TLS

TLS

TLS

TMS/TLS

TMS/TLS

TMS; TLS

TLS

TLS

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

EXITRONIX

EXITRONIX

EXITRONIX

CRESCENT

VAPOR PROOF LIGHT

FIXTURE FURNISHED WITH

HOOD

KAMMETAL

LED-90

HLED-BL-WP WITH PMC-B-1

MOUNTING PLATE

VEX-BP-WB-WH

C117BK1Y

FURNISHED WITH HOOD

C-LP1-01

HI-LITE MFG. CO.

SATCO

KAMMETAL

KAMMETAL

KAMMETAL

LUMOS

KAMMETAL

H-CW1600-2

90-2467

C-LL1-10

C-LL1-10-EM

C-LL1-03

MS-4020-B-2010035-F1 w/ (1)

MS-4042-A

C-LC2-01A

(2) SPECIAL LED

(1) SPECIAL LED

(1) SPECIAL LED

(1)FO17/830/ECO

(1) CF23EL/MINI/827

(1) 7W ECOSTORY PAR20 LED (50°-2750K) W/ GU 10 BASE

(1) 32W CFL (2700K) W/ GU 24 BASE

(1) 12W ECOSTORY PAR30 LED (30°-2750K) W/ GU 24 BASE

(4) FP21/830/ECO, (2) FP28/830/ECO

(6) 7W ECOSTORY PAR20 LED (50°-2750K) W/ GU 10 BASE

(4) FP21/830/ECO, (2) FP28/830/ECO

(6) 7W ECOSTORY PAR20 LED (50°-2750K) W/ GU 10 BASE

(2) FP21/830/ECO, (0) FP28/830/ECO, (2) ECOSTORY PAR 20 LED

(50°-2750K) W/ GU 10 BASE

(1) 12W ECOSTORY PAR30 LED (30°-2750K) W/ GU 24 BASE

(1) 12W ECOSTORY PAR30 LED (30°-2750K) W/ GU 24 BASE

120

120

120

120

120

120

120

VOLTS WATTS

120

120

37

17

120

120

14

21

120

4

120

120

120

120

2

1

4

17

23

7

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

FURNISHED WITH COVERS, (1) HARDWIRE BOX,

AND CONNECTORS, OR CORD & PLUG

FURNISHED WITH COVERS, (1) HARDWIRE BOX,

AND CONNECTORS, OR CORD & PLUG

90 MINUTE BATTERY BACKUP

LOW VOLTAGE REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHT

POWERED BY FIXTURE E1

90 MINUTE BATTERY BACKUP, FURNISHED WITH

WALL MOUNT

INSTALL LAMP FURNISHED SEPARATELY BY

LIGHTING SUPPLIER

SEE ARCHITECTURAL RCP FOR STEM LENGTH

WITH JELLY JAR. SEE ARCHITECTURAL RCP FOR

STEM LENGTH

32

12

182

182

56

12

12

WITH DUAL CIRCUIT SWITCHING, 223-T5-XX

COLORED FLUOR. SLEEVES

WITH DUAL CIRCUIT SWITCHING, EM BALLASTS,

223-T5-XX COLORED FLUOR. SLEEVES

WITH DUAL CIRCUIT SWITCHING, 223-T5-XX

COLORED FLUOR. SLEEVES

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES

A.

FLUORESCENT LAMPS NOT INCLUDED WITH THE FIXTUREA RE TO BE MANUFACTURED BY SYLVANIA UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PHILIPS FLUORESCENT LAMPS WILL BE AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE.

B. SEE THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT LIGHT LOCATIONS.

C. SEE THE ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DETAILS FOR FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS.

1

LIGHTING MASTER RELAY PANEL

LOAD

[WATTS] PANEL CIRCUIT

A

A 36

A 36

A 20

A 20

A 22

A 22

A 24

A 24

A 10

A 26

A 28

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

CATEGORY

CONDUCTORS

CONDUITS

WIRING

DEVICES

APPLICATION

#10 AWG AND SMALLER

#8 AWG AND LARGER

ALLOWABLE

MATERIAL

SOLID CU, TYPE

THHN/THWN OR

XHHW

STRANDED CU,

TYPE THHN/THWN

OR XHHW

OUTDOOR, EXPOSED

OR CONCEALED

OUTDOOR OR INDOOR

DAMP LOCATIONS,

CONNECTION TO

VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

INDOOR, EXPOSED

INTERMEDIATE

METAL CONDUIT

LIQUIDTIGHT

FLEXIBLE METAL

CONDUIT

ELECTRICAL

METALLIC TUBING

U.N.O.

INDOOR, WITHIN

1-1/2" OF ROOF

DECK

INDOOR, CONCEALED

INTERMEDIATE

METAL CONDUIT

ELECTRICAL

METALLIC TUBING,

FLEXIBLE METAL

CONDUIT, OR METAL

CLAD CABLE

FLEXIBLE METAL

CONDUIT

INDOOR DRY

LOCATIONS,

CONNECTION TO

VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

LOW VOLTAGE,

INDOOR, ABOVE GRADE

ELECTRICAL

METALLIC TUBING

LOW VOLTAGE, BELOW GRADE

IN KITCHEN,

OFFICE, OR

NON-PUBLIC

SPACES

IG OR IG/GFI

RECEPTACLES

ON DRYWALL IN

DINING ROOM

ON PLYWOOD,HOT

ROLLED STEEL, OR RICHLITE

IN RESTROOMS

RIGID NONMETALLIC

CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40

PVC)

GRAY DEVICE

WITH STAINLESS

STEEL COVER

PLATE

ORANGE DEVICE

WITH STAINLESS

STEEL COVER

PLATE

WHITE DEVICE

WITH WHITE

COVER PLATE

BLACK DEVICE

WITH BLACK

COVER PLATE

WHITE DEVICE

WITH WHITE

COVER PLATE

ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

A-6

#

X/Y/Z

J

S

S

M

S

OC

C

CONDUIT CONCEALED ABOVE THE CEILING, IN A WALL, OR

IN A RACEWAY

CONDUIT CONCEALED BELOW THE SLAB

HOME-RUN TO PANELBOARD AND CIRCUIT NUMBER SHOWN

PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON THE SAME SHEET

FOR NOTE MEANING

DISCONNECT SWITCH:

X = SWITCH RATING

Y = FUSE SIZE (NF = NON-FUSED)

Z = NUMBER OF POLES

JUNCTION BOX

ELECTRIC PANELBOARD

GENERAL PURPOSE 1-POLE SWITCH

MANUAL STARTER WITH PILOT LIGHT

OCCUPANCY SENSOR ACTIVATED WALL SWITCH

(HUBBELL LHMTS1W - LIGHTHAWK PIR & US SINGLE CIRCUIT,WHITE)

I

NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX RECEPTACLE

J

D

E

F

G

H

A

B

GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ELECTRICAL SHEETS.

ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE

ELECTRICAL CODE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AUTHORITY

HAVING JURISDICTION. SEE SHEET A000 FOR THE PREVAILING

CODES.

WIRING SHALL BE (2)#12, #12 G IN 3/4" C UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE.

INDIVIDUAL CONDUIT HOME RUNS SHOWN SHALL NOT BE

CONSOLIDATED.

CIRCUIT EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTS, ILLUMINATED EXIT

SIGNS, AND NIGHT LIGHTS AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHING.

INSTALL WALL SWITCHES AT 48" AFF TO CENTER OF SWITCH

AND RECEPTACLES AT 18" AFF TO CENTER OF RECEPTACLE

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

INSTALL CONDUIT CONCEALED ABOVE THE CEILING, IN WALLS,

OR IN RACEWAYS.

PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FROM EACH J-BOX

FOR TELEPHONE OR DATA JACKS TO ABOVE OFFICE CEILING.

SEE MATERIAL SCHEDULE FOR ALLOWABLE CONDUIT

MATERIALS. PROVIDE CONDUITS WITH MINIMAL ELBOWS AND

TERMINATE CONDUITS ABOVE OFFICE CEILING WITH CONDUIT

BUSHING.

THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE

PROJECT SITE, READY FOR UNLOADING, UNPACKING,

ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE

TERM "INSTALL" DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT

SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL UNLOADING, UNPACKING,

ASSEMBLY, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING,

WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING,

CLEANING, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "PROVIDE"

MEANS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR

THE INTENDED USE.

DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN ELECTRICAL ELEVATIONS ARE FROM

THE WALL FRAMING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

ABBREVIATIONS

IG

JB

NL

C

G

AFF

AFG

GFCI

S

WP

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

ABOVE FINISHED GRADE

CONDUIT

GROUND

GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT

ISOLATED GROUND

JUNCTION BOX

NIGHT LIGHT

SURFACE MOUNTED

WEATHERPROOF

TLS

TMB

TMS

TP

TRS

TSV

WCS

CO2AS TENANT'S CO2 ALARM SUPPLIER

GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR

HES

TAB

TCC

TES

THS

TENANT'S HVAC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S TEST AND BALANCE VENDOR

TENANT'S CABLING CONTRACTOR

TENANT'S KITCHEN EQUIPEMNT SUPPLIER

TENANT'S HOOD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MENU BOARD SUPPLIER

TENANT'S MILLWORK SUPPLIER

TENANT'S PHONE SUPPLIER

TENANT'S RAILING SUPPLIER

TENANT'S SIGN VENDOR

TENANT'S WALK-IN COOLER SUPPLIER

1

1

2

#

13

15

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

16

PLAN NOTES

INSTALL LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE LCD DIGITAL SWITCH.

CONNECT LIGHTING CIRCUIT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN THROUGH THE STORE LIGHTING SWITCH BANK.

PROVIDE ONE UNSWITCHED CONDUCTOR FOR CONNECTION TO LOCALLY-SWITCHED FIXTURES,

FIXTURES DESIGNATED AS NIGHT LIGHTS, EXIT SIGNS, AND EMERGENCY FIXTURES.

WALL MOUNT THE EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE AT 6" BELOW THE CEILING UNLESS NOTED

OTHERWISE

VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT OF EXIT SIGN PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. EXIT SIGN MUST BE VISIBLE FROM

AREA SERVED AFTER BUILDING SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN INSTALLED.

PROVIDE DOUBLE-POLE SINGLE-THROW LIGHT SWITCH IN OFFICE FOR CONTROL OF OFFICE LIGHT

AND RESTROOM EXHAUST FAN.

INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURES FURNISHED WITH THE WALK-IN COOLER

INSTALL DUAL-LITE LG2S EMERGENCY LIGHTING MINI INVERTERS, EM1 AND EM2, FURNISHED BY

OWNER ON WALL. CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN. INVERTER SHALL BE CAPABLE OF POWERING UP

TO 250W OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES AT 100% LIGHT OUTPUT FOR 90 MINUTES.

CONNECT LIGHTS TO EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTER SHOWN. CONNECT LIGHTS SO THAT THEY

OPERATE 24 HOURS PER DAY AS NIGHT LIGHTS AND ALSO STAY ILLUMINATED DURING A LOSS OF

POWER AS EMERGENCY LIGHTS.

PROVIDE (2) GFCI RECEPTACLES FOR UNDERSHELF LIGHTING AS SHOWN. CONNECT TO SWITCHED

LEG OF THE KITCHEN LIGHTING CIRCUIT. SEE ELEVATIONS ON SHEET E300 FOR RECEPTACLE

LOCATIONS, HEIGHTS, AND CIRCUITING. INSTALL RECEPTACLES IN A HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION.

INSTALL HANGING LIGHT FIXTURES WITH LOOSE CORD SO THAT CORD HAS 6"-12" OF SLACK. DO

NOT SECURE CORD TO HANGING ROD. TYPICAL.

PROVIDE UNISTRUT AS SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL RCP PER THE ARCHITECTURAL UNISTRUT

DETAIL. TYPICAL.

CONCEAL EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE ABOVE THE RESTROOM AND BELOW THE TOP OF THE

PLYWOOD BOX TO POWER REMOTE EMERGENCY FIXTURE. LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL NOT BE VISIBLE

FROM THE DINING ROOM AND RESTROOMS.

PROVIDE QUAD RECEPTACLE CONCEALED ABOVE BOX. CONNECT TO A SWITCHED LEG OF THE

LIGHTING CIRCUIT AS SHOWN.

INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR FURNISHED BY LIGHTING SUPPLIER. ADJUST

OCCUPANCY SENSOR TO PROVIDE AUTOMATIC ON/AUTOMATIC OFF OPERATION WITH A FIXED

TIMER OF 30 MINUTES AND WITH BOTH THE PASSIVE INFRARED AND ULTRASONIC SENSORS

ENABLED.

INSTALL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET.

2

SHADED REGION REPRESENTS DAY LIGHTING ZONE

CAT 5

POWER WIRING

FOR LIGHTING CIRCUITS

2

E100

LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

P3

A1

3

1

E1

E2

1

E4

4

1

16

R

A1 ,NL

A

A- 35

B

7

A- 18

BDP

5

A1

A1 ,NL A1 A1

A1

3

E1

C2

C2

C1C1

B1

9

C2

C1 C1

B1

C2

C1 C1

B1

2

A- 24

C2

B1

C2

B1

C2

B1

C1

B1

C2

B1

C2

B1

C2

B1

6

J

B1

J3

B1

B1

B1

C2

8

EM1

B1

C2

C2

B1

9

3

E1

C2

C1

C1

B1

J3

B1

B1

C2

B1

A- 22

2

B1

C2

B1

C2

B1

C2

B1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

H1

B1

C2

B1

E1

3

F1 F1 F1 F1

OC

15

K1 K1

2

A- 20

K1

K1 K1

12

E1

OC

15

F1

F1

13

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

K1

K1

K1

K1

N1-3

N1-3

E2

J1

L1-10

10

11

L2-10 ,NL

J1

A- 36

2

A- 22

J1

P1 E4

4

P1

L1-10

J1

P1

E2

P1

P1

E4

4

P1

1

E100

LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]ineering.com

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

1 11/02/15

2 01/11/16

PERMIT REVISION

DB11

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Electrical Lighting Plan

E100

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

RTU-1

ON ROOF

19

A- 21

14

7

A- 1,3,5

60/NF/3

TO ICEMAKER

WP

15

CU-2

ON ROOF

30/NF/3

A- 30,32,34

CU-1

ON ROOF

A- 21

EF-1

ON ROOF

HCP

15

12

15

RTU-2

ON ROOF

-

19

15

A- 7,9,11

HCP

MAU-1

ON ROOF

25

R-9

WP

EF-2

ON ROOF

2

E110

POWER ROOF PLAN

1/8" = 1'-0"

ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

A-6

#

X/Y/Z

J

S

S

M

S

WP

CONDUIT CONCEALED ABOVE THE CEILING, IN A WALL, OR

IN A RACEWAY

CONDUIT CONCEALED BELOW THE SLAB

HOME-RUN TO PANELBOARD AND CIRCUIT NUMBER SHOWN

PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON THE SAME SHEET

FOR NOTE MEANING

DISCONNECT SWITCH:

X = SWITCH RATING

Y = FUSE SIZE (NF = NON-FUSED)

Z = NUMBER OF POLES

JUNCTION BOX

ELECTRIC PANELBOARD

GENERAL PURPOSE 1-POLE SWITCH

MANUAL STARTER WITH PILOT LIGHT

WEATHER-PROOF SWITCH

S

OC

OCCUPANCY SENSOR ACTIVATED WALL SWITCH

(HUBBELL LHMTS1W - LIGHTHAWK PIR & US SINGLE CIRCUIT,WHITE)

NEMA 5-20R 1-PLEX RECEPTACLE

NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX RECEPTACLE

IG/GFI

NEMA 5-20R DOUBLE-DUPLEX RECEPTACLES

NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX COMBINATION ISOLATED GROUND/GFI

RECEPTACLE PASS & SEYMOUR MODEL#2095IGTRO

KP

OTHER RECEPTACLE - SEE PLAN FOR RATING AND TYPE

JUNCTION BOX FOR RJ-45 DATA OUTLETS. PROVIDE 1"

CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FROM J-BOX TO ABOVE

OFFICE CEILING. TERMINATE CONDUIT WITH CONDUIT

BUSHING.

DOUBLE GANG JUNCTION BOX FOR RJ-45 DATA OUTLETS. PROVIDE

1" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FROM J-BOX TO ABOVE OFFICE

CEILING. TERMINATE CONDUIT WITH CONDUIT BUSHING.

JUNCTION BOX FOR RJ-11 TELEPHONE OUTLETS. PROVIDE 1"

CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FROM J-BOX TO ABOVE OFFICE

CEILING. TERMINATE CONDUIT WITH CONDUIT BUSHING.

SECURITY SYSTEM KEYPAD: PROVIDE A RECESSED JB WITH

A 1/2" CONDUIT TO ABOVE THE DROP TILE CEILING IN THE

OFFICE AREA AND TERMINATE WITH A CONDUIT BUSHING

22

23

24

1

2

#

31

32

28

29

30

25

26

27

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

3

4

5

6

33

34

35

PLAN NOTES

SHOW ROOM WINDOW RECEPTACLE. COORDINATE EXACT RECEPTACLE MOUNTING HEIGHT IN THE FIELD. LOCATION SHALL BE IN

THE DRYWALL IMMEDIATELY ABOVE THE MAIN STORE-FRONT WINDOW.

ICE MACHINE ELECTRICAL TIE-IN. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH EQUIPMENT INSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE TWO

PHASE CONDUCTORS, ONE NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR, AND ONE GROUND CONDUCTOR TO THE L14-20R RECEPTACLE. PROVIDE L5-20P

FLANGED INLET WIRED TO THE REMOTE CONDENSER. PROVIDE 48" CORDS, ONE WITH L14-20P END AND ONE WITH L5-20R END,

FROM ICE MAKER TO RECEPTACLE AND FLANGED INLET.

PROVIDE SHUNT TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR CIRCUITS SERVING EQUIPMENT BELOW THE KITCHEN HOOD. CONNECT SHUNT TRIP

CIRCUIT BREAKER TO HOOD FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SO THAT RECEPTACLE IS DE-ENERGIZED UPON ACTIVATION OF HOOD FIRE

PROTECTION SYSTEM.

JUNCTION BOX FOR EXTERIOR SIGN LIGHTING. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH CHIPOTLE'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND

THE SIGN INSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN THROUGH THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTACTOR PANEL

AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 3/E300.

PROVIDE 4" OCTAGONAL JUNCTION BOX WITH SCREW THREADS SET AT THE 2 & 8 O'CLOCK POSITIONS FOR THE ANSUL PULL

STATION. PROVIDE A 1/2" CONDUIT FROM THE J-BOX TO 6" ABOVE THE CEILING AND TERMINATE WITH A CONDUIT BUSHING.

COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH THE ANSUL SYSTEM INSTALLER AND THE FIRE MARSHALL PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

HOOD CONTROL PANEL AND ANSUL CABINET SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE INTEGRAL HOOD UTILITY CABINET. PROVIDE FINAL

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS PER THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE AND

OPERATIONAL SYSTEM.

INSTALL WIRING HARNESS FURNISHED WITH WALK-IN COOLER FROM CONDENSING UNIT ON ROOF TO THE CAPSULE-PAK

REFRIGERATION MODULE ON THE WALK-IN COOLER.

PROVIDE AN EMPTY SINGLE GANG J-BOX FOR VOLUME CONTROLS. INSTALL THE 22/2 VOLUME CONTROL WIRE FURNISHED BY THE

OWNER FROM THE J-BOX TO THE AMPLIFIER IN THE OFFICE WITH 3 FEET OF SLACK AT EACH END.

COORDINATE DATA/POWER RECEPTACLE MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS WITH THE CASE WORK INSTALLER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

CONNECT WALK-IN COOLER LIGHTS TO CIRCUIT SHOWN.

PROVIDE AN EMPTY 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING FROM THE BASE BUILDING'S TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATION TO

THE SPACE ABOVE THE OFFICE CEILING.

PROVIDE A SUITABLE LENGTH OF LIQUID-TIGHT CONDUIT TO THE EXHAUST FAN EF-1 TO ALLOW THE EXHAUST FAN TO HINGE

COMPLETELY OPEN WHEN THE VIROGUARD SYSTEM IS INSTALLED.

AFTER THE FAX LINE, POS, AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED PROVIDE CHILDPROOF RECEPTACLE COVERS ON UNUSED IG

RECEPTACLES AT THE FAX LINE, POS, AND OFFICE.

PROVIDE ONE PHASE, ONE NEUTRAL, AND ONE GROUND CONDUCTOR FROM THE ICE MAKER TO THE REMOTE CONDENSER CU-2.

UNIT SHALL HAVE AN INTEGRAL NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH.

PROVIDE DOOR CHIME AND BUZZER AT 96" AFF SEE ARCHITECTURAL DOOR EQUIPMENT FOR EQUIPMENT INFORMATION.

INSTALL THE BYPASS DISTRIBUTION PANEL (BDP) FURNISHED BY THE OWNER. INSTALL PER THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL 4/E300.

ROUGH-INS TO SERVE LINE AND POS EQUIPMENT IS UNDERGROUND. COORDINATE ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATIONS

WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

ROOFTOP UNIT SHALL HAVE AN INTEGRAL UNIT-MOUNTED GFCI RECEPTACLE.

ICE MAKER RECEPTACLES SHALL BE CONCEALED BEHIND THE ICE MAKER. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ACTUAL WIDTH OF ICE

MAKER.

PROVIDE SINGLE GANG VERTICAL METAL DIE CAST WEATHERPROOF WHILE IN USE OUTLET COVER ON RECEPTACLES AT COOK LINE,

AT SALAD SPINNER, AND UNDER FOUR-COMPARTMENT SINK. COVER SHALL BE INTERMATIC WP1010MXD FOR SINGLE GANG BOXES

AND WP1030MXD FOR DOUBLE GANG BOXES. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE ACCEPTED.

LABEL BATTERY-PROTECTED RECEPTACLES "BATTERY-PROTECTED: DISCONNECT AT PANEL BDP".

LABEL MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH AND PANEL A "WARNING: BATTERY-PROTECTED RECEPTACLES IN USE. DISCONNECT AT PANEL

BDP."

PROVIDE A NEMA 5-15P FLANGED INLET (LEVITON MODEL #5239) AND A SINGLE NEMA 5-20R RECEPTACLE IN OFFICE FOR

CONNECTION TO A CENTRAL UPS SYSTEM. CONNECT THE FLANGED INLET AND THE SINGLE RECEPTACLE TO THE TERMINAL BLOCK

IN THE BDP PER THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTION FROM FLANGED INLET TO THE OUTPUT OF

THE UPS USING A 2'-LONG 20A EXTENSION CORD. PLUG THE UPS INTO THE SINGLE RECEPTACLE.

CONNECT EXHAUST FAN TO CIRCUIT SHOWN THROUGH THE DOUBLE-POLE SINGLE-THROW LIGHT SWITCH IN THE OFFICE.

INSTALL 16/2 SPEAKER WIRE FURNISHED BY OWNER FROM THE SPEAKER LOCATION TO THE AMPLIFIER IN THE OFFICE WITH 3 FEET

OF SLACK AT EACH END. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR SPEAKER LOCATIONS.

PROVIDE POWER CONNECTIONS UNDER PREP TABLE INSTALLED IN A METALLIC PEDESTAL MOUNTED ON TOP OF A CURB PER

DETAIL 5/E300. PROVIDE GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLES IN THREE J-BOXES INTEGRAL TO PREP TABLES (FOR UNDERCOUNTER

REFRIGERATOR, HOT HOLDING CABINET, AND GENERAL RECEPTACLE). PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTION FROM PEDESTALS TO

RECEPTACLES AND CARVING STATION USING LIQUIDTIGHT CONDUIT HELD TIGHT TO PREP TABLES.

PROVIDE CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE IN FACE OF BENCH BELOW SEAT.

PROVIDE PASS & SEYMOUR 2095GRY (GRAY) SPEC GRADE 20A DUPLEX GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR SALAD SPINNER.

PROVIDE 1" CONDUITS FROM LOW-VOLTAGE J-BOXES AT POS COUNTER CONCEALED WITHIN THE SERVE LINE WIRING CHASE TO

THE WALL, THEN CONCEALED WITHIN THE WALL AND ABOVE THE CEILING TO ABOVE THE OFFICE CEILING.

PROVIDE J-BOX IN CEILING AS SHOWN. PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT FROM J-BOX TO ABOVE THE OFFICE CEILING. SEE ARCHITECTURAL RCP

FOR EXACT LOCATION.

PROVIDE ROUGH-INS FOR LAUNCHPORT AS NOTED AND INSTALL LAUNCHPORT FURNISHED BY CHIPOTLE PER THE

MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS WITH THE WALLSTATION AT 62" AFF AND THE WALL PLATE DIRECTLY ABOVE THE

WALLSTATION AT 90" AFF. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR HORIZONTAL LOCATION OF WALL PLATE AND WALLSTATION.

PROVIDE SINGLE-GANG J-BOX AT 90" AFF FOR THE WALL PLATE INSTALLATION, A 4" X 2-1/8" DEEP OCTAGON J-BOX AT 62" AFF FOR

THE WALLSTATION INSTALLATION, AND A 3/4" CONDUIT BETWEEN THE TWO J-BOXES. PROVIDE A 22 GAUGE 2 CONDUCTOR CABLE

BETWEEN THE WALLSTATION AND THE WALL PLATE J-BOXES WITH 6" SLACK AT EACH END. PROVIDE RECEPTACLE AT 90" AFF NEXT

TO THE WALL PLATE J-BOX AS SHOWN. THE RECEPTACLE AND WALL PLATE AT 90" AFF SHALL BE CONCEALED FROM PUBLIC VIEW BY

THE HOOD.

PROVIDE RECEPTACLE FOR RESTROOM HAND SINK FAUCET AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 13/SHEET P300.

PROVIDE GFCI RECEPTACLE AND DATA JACK AND INSTALL CO2 ALARM FURNISHED BY CO2AS AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 11/E300.

PROVIDE DATA JACK AND INSTALL CO2 ALARM REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT FURNISHED BY CO2AS AS SHOWN IN DETAIL 11/E300.

2

Consultant:

GFCI

21

A- 17

22

13

39"

35

KP

J

8

48"

J

10

1

R

A- 35

48" J

5

A

23

34

B- 3

GFCI, 27"

27"

B

17

GFCI, 60"

102"

BDP

102"

24

BDP

BDP

22

B- 31

11

B- 3

16

96"

A- 29

96"

M

P-1

13

22

B- 15

GFCI, 92"

GFCI

GFCI, 56"

29

21

B- 32

B- 5

M

32

90"

62"

6

A- 12,14,16

B- 1

GFCI, 90"

B- 15

A- 33

GFCI

B- 2

(L14-20R) 60"

B- 11,13

(L5-20P INLET) 60"

2 20

TO REMOTE

CONDENSER

B- 29

27

B- 4

B- 37

GFCI, 76"

3

21

B- 21

27

J

J

B- 22

21

3

GFCI

B- 25

6

E300

9

J

31

30

9

13

22

B- 10,12

J

B- 9

J (6-20R) J

B- 14,16

18

B- 18,20

B- 24

26

A- 31

33

GFCI, 24"

A- 15

28

1

33

A- 31

GFCI, 24"

GFCI

B- 6

26

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

1

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

1 11/02/15

2 01/11/16

PERMIT REVISION

DB11

1

1

4

A- 26

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Electrical Power Plan

A- 13

1

1 1

J

4

A- 28

1

1

E110

POWER FLOOR PLAN

1/4" = 1'-0"

E110

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Panel Name: BDP

Mounting: Recessed

Enclosure: Type 1

Volts: 120

Phases: 1

Wires: 3

CKT

1

2

3

4

5

Circuit Description

POS

Fax Line

Office - Network Gear

Office - Computer

Office - DVR

Mains: LUGS

Amperage: 30 A

Trip

6 A

6 A

6 A

Poles

1

1

1

6 A

6 A

1

1

Total Load:

Total Amps:

Load

0.2 kVA

0.2 kVA

0.2 kVA

0.4 kVA

0.2 kVA

0.5 kVA

5 A

EXISTING PAD-MOUNTED

TRANSFORMER

1

CKT

1

Circuit Description

RTU-1

(3-#8, #10 G. in 3/4" C.)

3 --

A

Rating Poles

Type

Notes

CKT

AMPS

Load

Type

50 A 3 HACR 32.3

C 3.9 kVA 0.0 kVA

Volts: 208/120V Wye

Phases: 3

Wires: 4

Mounting: Recessed

Enclosure: Type 1

B C

-----3.9 kVA 0.0 kVA

Panel: A

Mains: 400A C.B.

Amperage: 400 A

MCB Rating: 400 A

Load

Type

CKT

AMPS

Type

Notes Poles Rating

0.0

3 60 A TVSS

Circuit Description

-------

5 --

7

RTU-2

(3-#6, #10 G. in 1" C.)

9 --

--

60 A

---

3

--

HACR 48.9

--

C 5.9 kVA 0.0 kVA

3.9 kVA 0.0 kVA --

--

--

--

---

1

--

20 A

--

Spare

21

RECEPTACLES - ROOFTOP

Receptaculo

25

SECURITY/AUDIO

Sistema de la Seguridad

27

TELEPHONE BACKBOARD

Receptaculo

29

RECEPTACLES - OFFICE

Recaptaculo

31

33

RECEPTACLES - RESTROOMS

Recaptaculo

RECEPTACLES - FAX &

LAUNCHPORT

Receptaculo

35 RELAY LIGHTING PANEL

--

20 A

23

RECEPTACLES - POS GENERAL

Receptaculo

20 A

---

1

1

20 A 1

20 A 1

20 A 1

20 A 1

20 A 1

20 A 1

--5.9 kVA 0.5 kVA E

11 -----

13

RECEPTACLES - STOREFRONT

Receptaculo

20 A 1

15

RECEPTACLES - DINING

Receptaculo

17

WARE-WASH FLOOR DRYER

Secador del Piso

20 A

20 A

1

1

19 Panel BDP 20 A 1

--

12.0

1.5

9.8

9.0

--

G 1.4 kVA 1.9 kVA

G

F

G 0.5 kVA 0.6 kVA

0.2 kVA 1.9 kVA

5.9 kVA 1.9 kVA E

--

--

1.2 kVA 0.3 kVA A

A

3.0

6.0

4.5

1.5

9.0

3.0

6.0

1.5

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

A

0.5 kVA

0.4 kVA

0.9 kVA

2.0 kVA

0.4 kVA

0.2 kVA

0.7 kVA

1.7 kVA

0.9 kVA

2.0 kVA

0.7 kVA

1.1 kVA

0.2 kVA

0.5 kVA

2.0 kVA

0.7 kVA

A

A

B

B

F

--

--

A

4.4

15.6

--

--

2.4

5.3

14.6

4.0

7.5

7.5

16.2

--

--

6.2

--

--

1 15 A EF-2

3 30 A

EF-1/MAU-1

(3-#10, #10 G. IN 3/4" C)

--

---

1

1

---

1 20 A

LIGHTING - FRONT KITCHEN

Luces

1 20 A

LIGHTING - BACK KITCHEN

Luces

1 20 A

SIGN LIGHTING

Luces

1 20 A

SIGN LIGHTING

Luces

3

--

---

20 A

20 A

20 A

--

LIGHTING - EM/NL

Luces

LIGHTING - DINING ROOM

Luces

CU-1 (WIC)

--

-----

1 20 A

LIGHTING - DINING ROOM

Luces

37 Spare 20 A 1 --0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA --1 20 A Spare

39

41

Spare

Spare

20 A

20 A

1

1

---

---

kVA

AMPS

28.3 kVA

236 A

0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA

30.9 kVA

258 A

0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA --

28.3 kVA

236 A

---

--

1

1

20 A

20 A

Spare

Spare

6

8

CKT

2

4

14

16

18

20

10

12

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

22

24

26

28

E

F

G

Type

A

B

C

D

Description

Interior Lighting

Exterior Lighting

Comfort Cooling

Comfort Heating

Miscellaneous Motor

Kitchen Equipment

Receptacles

Connected Load

4 kVA

2 kVA

29 kVA

0 kVA

6 kVA

39 kVA

7 kVA

Demand Factor

125.00%

125.00%

100.00% + 25% Largest Motor

0.00%

100.00%

65.00%

100.00%

Estimated Demand

5 kVA

2 kVA

29 kVA

0 kVA

6 kVA

26 kVA

7 kVA

Panel Totals (Includes Panel B)

Total Connected kVA:

Total Connected Amps:

Total Estimated kVA:

Total Estimated Amps:

88 kVA

243 A

75 kVA

207 A

EXT'G FUSED DISCONNECTS

EXT'G METERS

M

PROVIDE CONNECTION FROM TERMINAL STRIP IN

BDP TO THE INPUT AND THE OUTPUT OF THE UPS

IN OFFICE PER THE MANUFACTURER'S

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FINAL CONNECTION

TO UPS SHALL BE THROUGH A SINGLE 5-20R

RECEPTACLE AND A 5-15P FLANGED INLET.

EXT'G (4) 500 KCMIL CU,

#1/0 G. IN EXISTING 4"

TO EXISTING/FUTURE

TENANTS

M

C.

M

BDP

INSTALL 1500 VA

WALL-MOUNTED UPS

FURNISHED BY OWNER

A

400 AMP

120/208 VOLT

3 PHASE

INSTALL SURFACE MOUNTED TVSS UNIT (CURRENT

TECHNOLOGY MODEL CG60-120/208-3GY) FURNISHED

BY OWNER. FEED THROUGH 60A 3PH CIRCUIT

BREAKER. LOCATE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO TOP OF

PANELBOARD NEAR CEILING. CONDUCTORS SHALL NOT

HAVE SHARP BENDS. INSTALL TVSS UNIT PER

MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

KEEP CONDUCTOR LENGTH AS

SHORT AS POSSIBLE.

B

400 AMP

120/208 VOLT

3 PHASE

PROVIDE NEW PANELS A AND B AND

INSTALL PANEL BDP AS SHOWN.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN PANEL A AND B

SHALL HAVE A SERIES COMBINATION

RATING OF AT LEAST 65,000 AIC WHEN

USED IN SERIES WITH THE 400A MAIN

CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL A.

PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MARKING

ON THE

PANELBOARDS:

"CAUTION - SERIES COMBINATION

SYSTEM

RATED 65,000 AMPERES. IDENTIFIED

REPLACEMENT COMPONENTS

REQUIRED."

EXT'G 400A FUSED DISCONNECTS

EXT'G 400A METER

EXT'G WIREWAY

EXISTING CONDUCTORS

1

E200

MAIN DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

Volts: 208/120V Wye

Phases: 3

Wires: 4

Mounting: Recessed

Enclosure: Type 1

Panel: B

Mains: LUGS

Amperage: 400 A

MCB Rating:

CKT

1

Circuit Description Rating

HD-1 (CONTROL AND LIGHTS) 20 A

Poles

1

Type

Notes

CKT

AMPS

1.5

Load

Type

E

A

0.2 kVA 0.2 kVA

3

CARBONATOR/CO2 ALARM

Maquina de la Soda/Alarma

5

FOOD PREP TABLE

Receptaculo

7

REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR

Refrigerador

9

COLD TOP (SERVE LINE)

Refrigerador

11

ICE MAKER

Maquina del Hielo

20 A 1 10.9

20 A 1 GFCI 11.3

20 A 1 GFCI 13.8

20 A 1

20 A 2

12.0

10.7

F

F

F 1.7 kVA 0.8 kVA

F

B

1.3 kVA 1.4 kVA

1.4 kVA 1.0 kVA

C

1.4 kVA 1.1 kVA

Load

Type

F

CKT

AMPS

1.7

Type

Notes Poles

1

Rating Circuit Description

20 A WALK-IN COOLER

F

F

F

F

11.3

GFCI 1 20 A

FOOD PREP TABLE (ISLAND)

Receptaculo

9.4

6.3

1 20 A

SODA SYSTEM DISPENSER

Systema de Sodas

1 20 A

BLENDER

Mezclador

10.0

2 20 A CARVING STATION

13

15

GAS WATER HEATER

Calientador de Aqua del Gas

17

TORTILLA PRESS (BACK BAR)

Parilla del Emparedado

19

--

Space

--

20 A

20 A

--

--

1

1

--

---

GFCI 13.8

--

5.0

--

CKT

2

4

6

8

10

F

-1.1 kVA 2.1 kVA

F

F

-0.0 kVA 1.4 kVA

0.6 kVA 2.1 kVA

1.1 kVA 1.0 kVA --

1.7 kVA 1.4 kVA

F

--

F

--

--

20.0

--

13.0

--

--

--

--

----

2 30 A

HOT FOOD SERVER (SERVE)

Servidor Caliente del Alimento

(2-#10, #10 G. in 3/4" C.)

----

2 20 A

TORTILLA PRESS (SERVE LINE)

Parilla del Emparedado

(2-#10, #10 G. in 3/4" C.)

----

12

14

16

18

20

21 GAS GRIDDLE

23 SHUNT

25 GAS FRYER

20 A 1

SHNT

TRIP

1.5

-----

20 A 1

SHNT

TRIP

0.6

F

--

F 0.1 kVA 1.0 kVA

--

0.2 kVA 0.3 kVA

0.0 kVA 1.0 kVA

F

0.0 kVA 0.8 kVA F

F

--

2.6

1 20 A

REFRIGERATOR (COOK LINE)

Refrigerador

2

7.0

10.0

---

1 20 A SALAD CHILLER

2 20 A

HOT FOOD SERVER (FAX LINE)

Servidor Caliente del Alimento

(2-#10, #10 G. in 3/4" C.)

----

22

24

26

28 27 SHUNT -----

29

FOOD WARMER (RICE TABLE)

Warmer de Alimento

15 A 1

31

WATER SOFTENER

Suavizador de Agua

33

TORTILLA PRESS (FAX LINE)

Parrilla del Emparedado

20 A

20 A

1

1

1.5

1.5

GFCI 13.8

35 Space

37

UPRIGHT REFRIGERATOR

Refrigerador

39 Spare

-----

20 A

20 A

1

1

12.0

--

F

F 0.2 kVA 0.3 kVA

F

--

1.7 kVA 1.2 kVA

0.2 kVA 1.4 kVA F

F

F

0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA --

11.7

1 20 A

FOODWARMER (FAX LINE)

Warmer de Alimento

1 20 A SALAD SPINNER 2.1

10.0

GFCI 1 20 A

COLD TOP (FAX LINE)

Refrigerador

-1 20 A Spare

F

--

1.4 kVA 0.0 kVA

0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA

--

--

--

--

1

1

20 A

20 A

Spare

Spare

30

32

34

36

38

40

41 Spare 20 A 1 1 20 A Spare 42 ---

kVA

AMPS

10.3 kVA

86 A

12.2 kVA

102 A

0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA --

10.1 kVA

84 A

--

Consultant:

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

PERMIT SET

BID SET

# Revisions:

1 11/02/15

2 01/11/16

PERMIT REVISION

DB11

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Electrical Schedules &

Details

E200

Date of Last Print:

01/11/16

Consultant:

LOW VOLTAGE BOX RING OPEN TO WALL

CAVITY (NOT A J-BOX) FOR THE

CONCEALED INSTALLATION OF A VIDEO

CABLE. PROVIDE A PULL STRING

BETWEEN THE TWO BOX RINGS.

PROVIDE A FACEPLATE WITH 2"

GROMMET CUTOUT (DATAPRO PART #

700200) ON EACH LOW VOLTAGE BOX

RING.

J-BOX FOR (2) RJ-45 DATA OUTLET FOR

DVR & MUZAK

ISOLATED GROUND BATTERY-PROTECTED

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR DVR

EQUIPMENT (LABEL "DVR ONLY")

CIRCUIT BDP- 5

LOW VOLTAGE BOX RING OPEN TO WALL

CAVITY (NOT A J-BOX) FOR THE

CONCEALED INSTALLATION OF A VIDEO

CABLE. PROVIDE A PULL STRING

BETWEEN THE TWO BOX RINGS.

PROVIDE A FACEPLATE WITH 2"

GROMMET CUTOUT (DATAPRO PART #

700200) ON EACH LOW VOLTAGE BOX

RING.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR SECURITY

MONITOR (LABEL "MONITOR")

CIRCUIT A- 25

DOUBLE GANG J-BOX FOR DATA

OUTLETS. PROVIDE (2) 1" CONDUITS

FROM J-BOX TO ABOVE OFFICE CEILING.

2

ISOLATED GROUND BATTERY-PROTECTED

QUAD RECEPTACLE FOR COMPUTER

EQUIPMENT (LABEL "COMPUTER ONLY")

CIRCUIT BDP- 4

J-BOX FOR TELEPHONE OUTLETS

J-BOX FOR FAX OUTLET

GENERAL PURPOSE 4-PLEX RECEPTACLE

(LABEL "GENERAL")

CIRCUIT A- 29

8

E300

N.T.S.

2

E300

NOT USED

N.T.S.

GFCI SMART SAFE RECEPTACLE (LABEL

"SMART SAFE")

CIRCUIT A- 23

BATTERY-PROTECTED DUPLEX IG/GFCI

RECEPTACLE FOR POS EQUIPMENT

(LABEL "POS ONLY")

CIRCUIT BDP- 1

J-BOX FOR DATA AND CREDIT CARD

JACKS

GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR COIN CHANGER

AND RECEIPT PRINTER (LABEL

"COIN/PRINTER")

CIRCUIT A- 23

J-BOX FOR VOICE JACK

GFCI GENERAL RECEPTACLE (LABEL

"GENERAL")

CIRCUIT A- 23

J-BOX FOR DATA JACKS (SMART SAFE)

6

E300

POS COUNTER ELECTRICAL ELEVATION

N.T.S.

J-BOX FOR THE AUDIO SYSTEM. EXTEND

A 1" CONDUIT TO 6" ABOVE THE DROP

TILE CEILING AND TERMINATE WITH A

CONDUIT BUSHING.

4-PLEX RECEPTACLE FOR STEREO (LABEL

"STEREO")

CIRCUIT A- 25

HORIZONTAL GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR

UNDER SHELF TASK LIGHTING (LABEL

"LIGHT ONLY")

CIRCUIT A- 22

HORIZONTAL GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR

UNDER SHELF TASK LIGHTING (LABEL

"LIGHT ONLY")

CIRCUIT A- 22

CENTER OF J-BOX

71" AFF

IG/GFCI BATTERY-PROTECTED POS

RECEPTACLE (LABEL "POS ONLY")

CIRCUIT BDP- 2

CENTER OF J-BOX

57" AFF

J-BOX FOR CASH DRAWER CONNECTION

GFCI GENERAL RECEPTACLE (LABEL

"PHONE/PRINTER")

CIRCUIT A- 33

J-BOX FOR DATA JACKS

5" 3" 4" 5" 4"

CENTER OF J-BOX

31" AFF

J-BOX FOR CASH DRAWER CONNECTION.

PROVIDE 3/4" CONDUIT TO UPPER CASH

DRAWER J-BOX.

CENTER OF J-BOX

18" AFF

J-BOX FOR ALTERNATE FAX LOCATION

GFCI FOOD WARMER RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT B- 30

1' - 0"

1' - 2"

11" 4" 4' - 4" 11" 4" 4"

7

E300

FAX LINE ELECTRICAL ELEVATION

N.T.S.

1' - 4"

10" 4" 1' - 7"

10" 5" 4" 4" 10"

8"

CENTER OF J-BOX

94" AFF

GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR BEVERAGE

COOLER

CIRCUIT B- 7

5" 6 1/4"

1' - 5"

HORIZONTAL GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR

UNDERSHELF TASK LIGHTING. CONNECT

TO SWITCHED LEG OF CIRCUIT SHOWN.

(LABEL "LIGHT ONLY")

CIRCUIT A- 22

4" 10 1/4"

CENTER OF J-BOX

54" AFF

GENERAL PURPOSE 4-PLEX RECEPTACLE

(LABEL "GENERAL")

CIRCUIT A- 29

HORIZONTAL GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR

UNDERSHELF TASK LIGHTING. CONNECT

CENTER OF J-BOX

36" AFF

TO SWITCHED LEG OF CIRCUIT SHOWN.

(LABEL "LIGHT ONLY")

CIRCUIT A- 22

SINGLE RECEPTACLE FOR FAX (LABEL

"FAX")

CIRCUIT A- 33

CENTER OF J-BOX

18" AFF

OFFICE DESK ELECTRICAL ELEVATION

9

E300

1' - 8" 5 1/2" 1' - 10"

CHIP TABLE ELECTRICAL ELEVATION

N.T.S.

1' - 0 3/4"

CENTER OF J-BOX

76" AFF

CENTER OF J-BOX

68" AFF

CENTER OF J-BOX

55" AFF

HORIZONTAL SINGLE RECEPTACLE FOR

TORTILLA PRESS

CIRCUIT B- 17

HORIZONTAL GFCI RECEPTACLE FOR

BLENDER

CIRCUIT B- 8

10

E300

N.T.S.

CO2 ALARM OPTIONS

CO2 DETECTOR

CO2 REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT

REMOTE STROBE

RELAY

X

X

STROBE

80" AFF

INSTALL STROBE WITH WIRING TO CO2 DETECTOR

(FURNISHED BY CO2AS) (IF REQUIRED). WIRING

SHALL BE CONCEALED IN WALL.

CO2 TANK (BULK TANK OR CANISTERS)

PROVIDE GFCI RECEPTACLE AND JUNCTION BOX

WITH SINGLE RJ-45 DATA OUTLET ADJACENT TO

THE CO2 TANK/BAG-IN-BOX AS SHOWN ON THE

ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN.

NOTE: EQUIPMENT SHOWN IS TYPICAL.

SEE PLAN FOR ACTUAL EQUIPMENT

AND LOCATIONS.

SODA CARBONATOR

BAG-IN-BOX SODA RACK

RECEPTACLE/DATA JACK

27" AFF

CO2 DETECTOR

18" AFF

INSTALL CO2METER RAD-0102 CARBON DIOXIDE STORAGE

SAFETY ALARM (FURNISHED BY CO2AS) ADJACENT TO THE CO2

TANK/BAG-IN-BOX AS SHOWN.

CONNECT WIRE FOR THE REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT TO THE RJ-45

DATA JACK AND CONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER TO THE

RECEPTACLE AS SHOWN. TRIM CORDS TO MINIMIZE SLACK

AND SECURE CORDS TO WALL.

11

E300

CO2 ALARM DETAIL

N.T.S.

GFCI COLD TABLE RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT B- 34

6-20R RECEPTACLE FOR HOT TABLE

CIRCUIT B- 26,28

J-BOX FOR TELEPHONE JACKS

GFCI FAX MACHINE RECEPTACLE (LABEL

"FAX")

CIRCUIT A- 33

SINGLE TORTILLA PRESS RECEPTACLE

CIRCUIT B- 33

2" 4"

PROVIDE 24" X 18" PLYWOOD

BACKBOARD ABOVE OFFICE CEILING

FOR TELEPHONE 66 BLOCK

8" 7"

1' - 0"

DOUBLE GANG J-BOX WITH 1" CONDUIT

IN WALL TO ABOVE THE OFFICE CEILING

DOUBLE GANG J-BOX WITH 1" CONDUIT

IN WALL TO ABOVE THE OFFICE CEILING

FOR T1 AND SECURITY JACKS

CENTER OF J-BOX

102" AFF

CENTER OF J-BOX

94" AFF

PROVIDE 24" X 18" PLYWOOD

BACKBOARD ON SIDE WALL ON TOP OF

FRP. PAINT BACKBOARD WHITE.

COORDINATE WITH PHONE COMPANY

FOR T1 ROUTER TO BE INSTALLED ON

BACKBOARD.

ISOLATED GROUND BATTERY-PROTECTED

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR T1 ROUTER

(LABEL "T1 ROUTER ONLY")

CIRCUIT BDP- 3

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR SECURITY

SYSTEM (LABEL "SECURITY SYSTEM")

CIRCUIT A- 27

PROVIDE 24" X 18" PLYWOOD

BACKBOARD ON WALL ABOVE DOOR ON

TOP OF FRP. PAINT BACKBOARD WHITE.

COORDINATE WITH ALARM SYSTEM

INSTALLER FOR SECURITY SYSTEM

PANEL, CELL BACK UP, AND WIRELESS

RECEIVER TO BE INSTALLED ON

BACKBOARD.

OFFICE DOOR ELECTRICAL ELEVATION

PROVIDE GASKET BETWEEN

PEDESTAL AND 1-GANG BOX

COVER PLATE

CONCRETE CURB (SEE

ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS

FOR DETAILS)

3

E300

120V FROM PANELBOARD

NEMA 5-15P FLANGED INLET (VERIFY

THERE IS NOT 120V AT THIS INLET AFTER

WIRING AND BEFORE CONNECTING UPS)

NEMA 5-20R

SINGLE

RECEPTACLE

NOT USED

N.T.S.

PROVIDE CONCEALED CAT5 CABLE BETWEEN

DATA JACKS FOR THE CO2 SENSOR AND REMOTE

DISPLAY UNIT.

INSTALL CO2 ALARM REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT

(FURNISHED BY CO2AS) AT ENTRANCE TO THE

CO2 STORAGE AREA AS SHOWN.

CO2 REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT

48" AFF

DATA JACK

39" AFF

CONNECT THE REMOTE DISPLAY UNIT WIRE FOR THE

REMOTE DISPLAY TO THE RJ-45 DATA JACK. TRIM CORD

TO MINIMIZE SLACK AND SECURE WIRE TO WALL.

PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX WITH SINGLE RJ-45 DATA

OUTLET AT ENTRANCE TO THE CO2 STORAGE AREA AS

SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN.

PROVIDE METALLIC PEDESTAL (HUBBELL

SC3098A) WITH COVER PLATES ON EACH SIDE

SUITABLE FOR WIRING AS SHOWN ON PLAN

(SS309SF FOR HARD-WIRED CONNECTIONS AND

SS309BF FOR BLANK)

PROVIDE 1-GANG CONCRETE

FLOOR BOX COMPATIBLE WITH

CURB HEIGHT AND WITH COVER

WITH 3/4" THREADED HOLE.

2

5

E300

PEDESTAL OUTLET DETAIL

N.T.S.

UPS OUTPUT

UPS INPUT UPS POWER CORD

24" ADAPTER CORD

1500 VA UPS

MOUNTED TO WALL

LEGEND

4

E300

PREWIRED CONDUCTOR

FIELD-WIRED CONDUCTOR

NOTE

REVIEW BDP PANEL INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

BYPASS DISTRIBUTION PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM

N.T.S.

788 Morrison

Columbus, Ohio

Phone:

Road

43230

(614) 751-9610

Fax: (614) 552-5240

Contact: Elyssa Nguyen

(614) 328-2035 [email protected]

BID DOCUMENT -

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

COPYRIGHT 2015

THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH

REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND

CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC..

CHIPOTLE MEXICAN GRILL, INC.

1401 WYNKOOP STREET, SUITE 500

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

TELEPHONE: (303) 595-4000

FAX: (303) 595-4014

INTERNET: WWW.CHIPOTLE.COM

BYPASS DISTRIBUTION

PANEL (BDP)

6A

6A

6A

6A

6A

C

TERMINALS L & N

(LABELLED "UTILITY INPUT")

TERMINALS 1L & N

(LABELLED "UPS INPUT")

TERMINALS 2L & 1N

(LABELLED "UPS OUTPUT")

IN OFFICE

Issue Record:

07/22/15

01/11/16

# Revisions:

2 01/11/16 DB11

Drawn:

EN

Project No.

1401079

PERMIT SET

BID SET

Checked:

MPC

Contents:

Electrical Details

Date of Last Print:

E300

01/11/16

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement